IWCF Well Intervention Classroom Manual - Latest6th June

IWCF Well Intervention Pressure Control Manual 1 of 288| P a g e
IWCF Well Intervention

Pressure Control
Reference Manual
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

CLASSIFICATION
Owner Maersk Training

Authorised Recipients All employees Clients and Contractors of Maersk Training.
Disclaimer The purpose of this manual is to support classroom study and discussions; it is
not intended to be a definitive document.
This manual has been developed by Maersk Training, and remains their
property. It may not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in whole or in part, in any form or by any means electronic,
mechanical, photographic, recorded or otherwise without the express written
permission of Maersk Training.
Maersk Training has a policy of continually updating and upgrading all its
training material and reserves the right to make changes to this manual
without notice to its current holders.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual; however,
no responsibility can be accepted by Maersk Training concerning the use or
interpretation of information contained within.
Owner Contact Details Maersk Training Aberdeen Ltd
Prime Four Business Park
Kingswells Causeway
Kingswells
Aberdeen AB15 8PU
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0)1224 608 266

www.maersktraining.com
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Foreword ......................................................................................................................... 6

2.0 Candidates Guidance Notes ............................................................................................ 7
3.0 Learning Outcome – Syllabus Importance Levels ........................................................... 8
4.0 Test Information ............................................................................................................. 9
5.0 Aims............................................................................................................................... 10
6.0 Objectives...................................................................................................................... 10
7.0 Hydrostatic Calculations ........................................................................ 11
8.0 Fluid Pressure ................................................................................................................ 13
9.0 WB - Calculations .......................................................................................................... 22
10.0 Completion Operations ......................................................................................... 32
11.0 WA - Well Control Training & Assessment ................................................................... 34
12.0 WA - Well Control training & Assessment .................................................................... 37
13.0 WA – Pre-Operation Planning ....................................................................................... 38
14.0 WA – Handovers ........................................................................................................... 43
15.0 WB - Introduction to Well Control ................................................................................ 43
16.0 WB – Calculations ......................................................................................................... 47
17.0 WC – Introduction to Barriers ....................................................................................... 48
18.0 WD – Risk Management ............................................................................................... 60
19.0 WG – Circulating System ............................................................................................... 66
20.0 WP – Testing ................................................................................................................. 70
21.0 WH – Well Integrity....................................................................................................... 72
22.0 WI – Influx Characteristics & Behaviour ....................................................................... 77
23.0 WJ – Shut In Procedures ............................................................................................... 84
24.0 WJ – Interpretation ....................................................................................................... 88
25.0 WJ – Observations ........................................................................................................ 89
26.0 WJ – Gas Migration ....................................................................................................... 98
27.0 WK – Well Control Methods ....................................................................................... 100
28.0 WK – Calculations ....................................................................................................... 114
29.0 WN – Contingency Planning ....................................................................................... 124
30.0 WEQ – Completion Equipment ............................................................ 129
31.0 WEQA – Blow Out Preventers..................................................................................... 135
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

32.0 WEQG– Completion Equipment ................................................................................. 138

33.0 WEQG – Rig Up/Down ................................................................................................ 167
34.0 WEQJ – Annulus Pressure Monitoring ........................................................................ 168
35.0 Wireline Equipment .................................................................................................... 170
36.0 WWA – Completion Equipment .................................................................................. 177
37.0 WWA – Pressure Control Equipment ......................................................................... 181
38.0 WWA – Slick-Line/Braided Line Shear Seal BOP ......................................................... 189
39.0 Rigging Up ................................................................................................................... 196
40.0 WWA - Wireline PCE – Pressure Retention ................................................................ 198
41.0 WWG - Surface Leak or Malfunction .......................................................................... 203
42.0 WWK - CRITICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ............................................................... 209
43.0 WCA – Coil Tubing ................................................................................ 210
44.0 Pressure Control Equipment ....................................................................................... 215
45.0 WCA – BLOW OUT PREVENTERS ................................................................................. 220
46.0 WCA - RAM TYPE PREVENTERS ................................................................................... 226
47.0 WCD – RIGGING UP ..................................................................................................... 229
48.0 WCE - TESTING ............................................................................................................ 235
49.0 WCF - BARRIER PRINCIPLES......................................................................................... 237
50.0 WCG -CONTINGENCY PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 239
51.0 Snubbing .............................................................................................. 249
52.0 Snubbing Equipment ................................................................................................... 255
53.0 WSA - Pressure Control Equipment ............................................................................ 260
54.0 WSA – Ram Type Preventers ...................................................................................... 267
55.0 WSA – Seals & Sealing Elements ................................................................................. 269
56.0 WSA – Valves............................................................................................................... 276
57.0 WSD – Rigging Up Procedure ...................................................................................... 283
58.0 WSE – Testing.............................................................................................................. 284
59.0 WSF – Barrier Principles .............................................................................................. 286
60.0 WSG – Contingency Procedures ................................................................................. 287
61.0 WSH – Shut In Procedures .......................................................................................... 289
62.0 WSI – Operating Procedures ....................................................................................... 290
63.0 Snubbing Terminology ................................................................................................ 293
64.0 Snubbing Rules of Thumb ........................................................................................... 297
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

65.0 Formulae ..................................................................................................................... 299

66.0 Some Useful calculations & Formulas ........................................................................ 300
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

1.0 FOREWORD
Well pressure control is the most critical consideration in the planning and performing of any
well servicing operation.
The awareness of well pressure control in the prevention of injury to personnel, harm to the
environment and potential loss of facilities must be fully appreciated by planning engineers
and well site personnel. This appreciation must include personnel in having a sound
knowledge of legislative requirements, completion equipment, pressure control equipment
and operating practices and procedures.
‘Well Intervention’ and ‘Work-over’ are commonly used terms to describe servicing
operations on oil and gas wells and which have, in the past, had many different
interpretations. However, in general, ‘Work-over’ describes well service operations on dead
wells in which the formation pressure is primarily controlled with hydrostatic pressure. Work-
over operations are carried out by a drilling rig, work-over rig or Hydraulic Work-over Unit
(HWO) where the Xmas tree is removed from the wellhead and replaced by blow out
preventer (BOP) equipment. ‘Well Intervention’ is a term used to describe ‘through-tree’ live
well operations during which the well pressure is contained with pressure control equipment.
Well Interventions are conducted by Wireline, coiled tubing or snubbing methods. Snubbing
operations today are now usually conducted with HWO units.
This course is designed to provide essential knowledge to delegates participating in Well

Intervention Pressure Control.
Well intervention pressure control equipment used by Wireline, coil tubing and snubbing
units is so termed as it must control well pressure during live well intervention operations. It
significantly differs from BOP systems used on dead well work-overs. As most well servicing
is now conducted by live well intervention methods these are fully addressed as part of the
course. The term Well Control specifically applicable to drilling or work-over operations using
hydrostatic pressure is not addressed in this manual.
To have an understanding of well operations conducted by live well intervention methods and
the associated pressure control equipment, it is first necessary to have, or obtain, a basic
knowledge of completion designs, completion equipment, practices, well service methods
and their applications. An overview of these is given in the early sections of the reference
book.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

2.0 CANDIDATES GUIDANCE NOTES
Well Intervention Pressure Control Syllabus - Level 3 and 4
 This course syllabus aims to meet the recommendations for enhancements to well control
training, examination and certification produced by the International Association of Oil
and Gas Producers (OGP) in report number 476 in October 2012.
Who takes the Well Intervention Pressure Control course?
 We recommend personnel in the following positions should attend the appropriate level
of training and assessment:
o Level 2 - Assistant Operator (Wireline, Coiled Tubing, Snubbing).
o Level 3 - Equipment Operator (Wireline, Coiled Tubing, Snubbing).
o Level 3-4 - Single Discipline Supervisor/Engineer (on successful completion of Level
3 should progress to Level 4).
o Level 4 - Well Services Supervisor.
o Level 4 - Completion Supervisor/Service Leader.
How long is the course?
 The Level 2 training course must be a minimum of 20 hours.

 The Level 3 and Level 4 training courses must be a minimum of 28 hours – based on all
options taken - not including examination time.
How many candidates can a Centre have on a course?
 IWCF recommends a maximum of fifteen candidates per course (depending on room size/
facilities) for maximum interaction.
When can a candidate move on from Level 2 to Level 3 and then to Level 4?
 Well Intervention Pressure Control Syllabus - Level 3 and 4

 Level 2 Well Intervention courses should be run as a separate course.
 Level 3 Well Intervention courses may be partly combined with the Level 4 Supervisor
Pressure Control Training for common modules of this course.
 If Level 4 Supervisor and Level 3 Operator training courses are partially combined, whilst
advanced well pressure control operations are being taught to the Level 4 Supervisory
personnel, Level 3 Operator participants should spend this time on training to improve
detection and immediate response skills”.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

3.0 LEARNING OUTCOME – SYLLABUS IMPORTANCE LEVELS
All learning outcomes have been given an “importance”, in other words, a number of points.
This is shown in the right hand column on the syllabus and the candidate reference manual.
The importance is based on their level of “criticality” in the syllabus.
The levels shown below are based on the potential risk of the candidate not having the
knowledge:
Importance Level of Risk Explanation

Could lead to catastrophic damage to life, limb,
10 Critical
environment and industry.
5 Major Major risk factor
Key knowledge – could lead to risk to life, limb, and

4 Serious
environment
3 Moderate Necessary knowledge
2 Minor Underpinning knowledge
1 Foundation Foundation knowledge
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

4.0 TEST INFORMATION
The written test syllabus is divided into two sections:
Level 2, 3 & 4 Compulsory Modules
 Completion Operations Level 2 & 3 - Test duration 60 minutes (45 questions)

 Completion Operations Level 4 - Test duration 90 minutes (45 questions)
 Completion Equipment. – Test duration 30 minutes (25 questions)
Level 2, 3 & 4 Optional Modules
 Coiled Tubing Operations – Test duration 30 minutes (25 questions)

 Snubbing Operations – Test duration 30 minutes (25 questions)
 Wireline Operations. – Test duration 30 minutes (25 questions)
Please note: at least one optional module must be taken.
4.1 ASSESSMENT METHOD
The Level 3 and 4 course is based on written assessment.
The overall aim of the course is to provide a delegate with the theoretical skills essential in
applying well pressure control during well intervention and servicing operations with the
objective of improving the individuals’ knowledge and level of competence.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

IWCF Well Intervention Pressure Control Manual 10 of 288|
Page
5.0 AIMS
The individual aims are to:
 Improve the delegate's competence in well intervention pressure control.

 Provide an appreciation of completion types, equipment, equipment functions and
practices as recognised by the industry.
 Establish an increased awareness of well intervention/servicing well control equipment,
methods and practices.
 Furnish a student with knowledge of legislative guidelines and standards.
 Provide an awareness of how to discern well pressure control problems and apply
solutions.
6.0 OBJECTIVES
The individual objectives are to assist the delegate to:
 Identify various types of completions and their impact on well interventions.

 List the well parameters necessary to conduct a well intervention.
 List the parameters necessary to conduct a well kill operation.
 Identify well pressure control problems from available well data i.e. pressure, volume and
flow characteristic.
 Identify solutions to various well pressure control problems.
 Understand legislative guidelines and standards.
 Determine if pressure control equipment is fit for purpose.
 Obtain IWCF certification.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
7.0 HYDROSTATIC CALCULATIONS
7.1 WB - INTRODUCTION TO WELL CONTROL
Hydrostatic Pressure WB01.01/02/03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Fresh water is used as a universal standard since it may be obtained relatively easily in any
part of the world.
In the oilfield it is common practice to use the density of fresh water as the standard and
compare all other liquids densities to this standard.
 Fresh water has a density of 8.33 ppg
 The gradient of fresh water is 0.433 psi/ft.
 The Specific Gravity is 1
 The API is 10
 Weighs 62.4 Lbs/cu ft.
 The constant is .052 ( PPG to PSI )
API = 141.5 ÷ 131.5 + API Density of the liquid ÷ Cubic foot
Density of Fresh Water ÷ Density of given example
Specific Gravity = 1
X 8.33 ppg X .433 Psi/ft
Specific Gravity = 1 Specific Gravity = 1
Universal Hydrostatic Calculator
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
7.2 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDS AND PRESSURE
Understanding pressures and pressure relationships is important in understanding well

control. Pressure is defined as the force per unit area exerted by a fluid i.e:
Pressure = Force ÷ Area
Therefore, the formula can be changed to calculate the force from a given pressure and a unit
area:
Force = Pressure x Area
Pressure is usually expressed as the pounds of force that is applied against a one square
inch area, i.e. pounds per square inch (psi). Therefore, when a gas is placed in a pressure tight
container, it exerts a pressure on all sides of the container. If the gas pressure is 100psi,
it exerts a force of 100lbs on each square inch of the container area. Similarly, if a liquid is
placed in a can, it exerts a pressure on the sides and bottom of the container due to the
weight of the liquid, which is also expressed as psi. In well control, both of these effects
are of the utmost importance.
Pressure can be expressed as absolute or as gauge pressure. Absolute pressure includes

atmospheric pressure that is also applied due to the weight of the atmosphere and is 14.7psi
Some gauges, especially BHP gauges, are calibrated in absolute terms, but regular gauges
showing psig indicate they have been calibrated at atmospheric pressure and the 14.7psi is
excluded. Although this is a relatively small amount and can be ignored in most instances, it
is important when gathering data for reservoir analysis.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
8.0 FLUID PRESSURE
A fluid is any substance that is not solid and can flow. Liquids like water and oil are fluids. Gas
is also a fluid. Under certain conditions, salt, steel and rock can become fluid and in fact
almost any solid can become fluid under extreme pressure and temperature. In well control,
fluids such as gas, oil, water and completion fluids, brines and mud are encountered.
Fluids exert pressure that is caused by the density, or weight of the fluid. This is normally
expressed in pounds per gallon (ppg) or pounds per cubic foot (lbs/ft3). Other abbreviations
for these are lbs/gal and ppf3.
As the pressure developed by a fluid is relative to the true vertical depth, it is often expressed
as psi per foot (psi/ft). This is termed the fluid’s pressure gradient. The pressure gradient for a
fluid is relative to the fluid’s weight or density. The higher the density, the greater the
pressure gradient. To understand this relationship, it is helpful to visualise a cubic foot of
fluid.
Fluid Pressure Diagram
8.1 DERIVATION OF THE CONSTANT
A cubic foot contains = 7.48 US gallons.
Therefore, if the cube was filled with a fluid weighing 1ppg, the cube would weigh 7.48lbs
The pressure exerted on the base (area) is;
1ft2 = 12” x 12” area = 144sq inches
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Therefore the pressure per squared inches is;
7.48 US Gallons ÷ 144 sq. inches = 0.052psi
This relationship between a fluid weight in ppg and gradient pressure in psi/ft is always the
same therefore, 0.052 is a constant.
A cubic foot of fresh water weighs 62.4 pounds therefore the weight per gallon is;
62.4 ÷ 7.48 = 8.33ppg.
Therefore the gradient of fresh water is;
8.33ppg x 0.052 = 0.433psi/ft
Example
The pressure gradient of 10 ppg fluid = 10 ppg x 0.052 = 0.52psi/ft
Example
Find the weight of a fluid, which has a gradient of 0.465psi/ft
.465 psi/ft = 8.94ppg
This constant is probably the most useful constant used in calculations.
8.2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Hydrostatic pressure (HP) is the pressure developed by a fluid at a given true vertical depth in
a well irrespective of the measured depth. ‘Hydro’ means water, or fluids, which exert
pressure and ‘static’ means motionless. So hydrostatic pressure is the pressure created by a
stationary column of fluid. The hydrostatic pressure of any fluid can be calculated at any true
vertical depth (TVD) provided the pressure gradient of the fluid is known.
The previous calculations have dealt with fluid pressure with a gradient of one foot depth but
it is now simple to determine the pressure exerted by a fluid at any true vertical depth by
multiplying that pressure gradient by the true vertical height of the column in feet. The true
vertical height of the column is the important factor in the equation, as its volume or shape is
irrelevant.
The equation is: HP = PG x TVD where:
HP = Hydrostatic pressure PG = Pressure gradient TVD = True Vertical Depth
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Example
What is the hydrostatic pressure

of a 500ft TVD column of fresh
water?
HP = 0.433psi/ft x 500ft
= 216.5psi
Example
What is the hydrostatic

pressure of a 6,750ft well, filled
with a 0.478psi/ft pressure
gradient fluid, which has a TVD of
6,130ft ?
HP = 0.478psi/ft x 6,130ft
= 2,930psi
Measured Depth vs Vertical Depth
Example
A 12,764ft TVD well is filled with a 15ppg fluid, what is the BHP.
HP = 15ppg x 0.052 x 12,764ft
= 9,956psi
Equipped with this knowledge, it is now easy to calculate the hydrostatic pressure with two of
more fluids in a well provided the depths (TVD) of the fluid interfaces are known. Using the
same formula, the HP for each fluid section is calculated in the same way and the sum of the
individual calculations gives the HP at the bottom of the hole or well.
Example
A 10,500ft TVD well has two fluids in the well, a 15 ppg fluid from TD to 7,125ft and
8.33ppg fluid to surface, what is the HP at the bottom of the well?
HP of 15ppg fluid = 15ppg x 0.052 x (10,500 - 7,125)ft
= 15ppg x 0.052 x 3,375ft

= 2,633psi
HP of 8.33ppg fluid = 8.33ppg x 0.052 x 7,125ft
= 3,086psi
Total HP = 2,633psi + 3,086psi
= 5,719psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
8.3 SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Many fluids in the oilfield are also expressed in specific gravity (SG) as well as weight in ppg. It
is also necessary to be able to convert SG to pressure gradient in order to calculate
hydrostatic pressures.
SG is the ratio of the weight of a fluid (liquid) to the weight of fresh water. Fresh water weighs
8.33 ppg and salt water is nominally valued at 10 ppg. Therefore, the SG of salt water is:
The SG of fresh water is 1.0. As the gradient of fresh water is known to be 0.433psi/ft, to
obtain the gradient of a fluid, it is simply necessary to multiply its SG by 0.433psi/ft.
Example
What is the hydrostatic pressure (HP) exerted by a true vertical 5,000ft column of brine with a
SG of 1.17.
HP of Brine = 1.17 x 0.433 psi/ft x 5,000ft
= 2,533psi
8.4 API GRAVITY
API gravity is another value used to express relative weight of fluids, and was introduced by
the American
Petroleum Institute to standardise the weight of oilfield fluids at a base temperature of 60°
F. Water in this case was also used as the standard and assigned the value of 10API
gravity.
To convert from API gravity to specific gravity, the following formula is used.
API of Fresh Water = 10˚

Formula = 141.5 ÷ 131.5 + AP
Example
What is SG of 76 API?
SG of 76 API = 141.5 ÷ 131.5 + 76 = 207.5
= 141.5 ÷ 207.5 = .68192 SG
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
8.5 BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE
Bottom-hole pressure is used to represent the sum of all the pressures being exerted at the
bottom of the hole. Pressure is imposed on the walls of the hole. The hydrostatic fluid column
accounts for most of the pressure.
Gas Correction Tables
Correction Factors
Well Depth
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
3,000 1.064 1.075 1.087 1.098
3,500 1.075 1.089 1.102 1.115
4,000 1.087 1.102 1.117 1.133
4,500 1.098 1.115 1.133 1.151
5,000 1.110 1.129 1.149 1.169
5,500 1.121 1.143 1.165 1.187
6,000 1.133 1.157 1.181 1.206
6,500 1.145 1.171 1.197 1.224
7,000 1.157 1.185 1.214 1.244
7,500 1.169 1.204 1.232 1.264
8,000 1.181 1.214 1.248 1.282
8,500 1.193 1.239 1.266 1.304
9,000 1.206 1.244 1.282 1.324
9,500 1.218 1.259 1.302 1.345
10,000 1.232 1.275 1.320 1.366
10,500 1.244 1.289 1.338 1.388
11,000 1.257 1.306 1.357 1.410
11,500 1.270 1.322 1.376 1.433
12,000 1.282 1.338 1.395 1.455
12,500 1.297 1.354 1.415 1.477
13,000 1.311 1.371 1.434 1.500
13,500 1.324 1.388 1.455 1.523
14,000 1.338 1.405 1.475 1.548
14,500 1.352 1.422 1.495 1.573
15,000 1.366 1.438 1.515 1.596
Gas Correction Factors
8.6 GAS CORRECTION FACTORS

Most well servicing operations entails working with live wells whether using a through- tubing
method or rig intervention. Even with a rig operation, the well must be prepared by being
killed prior to the intervention. This involves dealing with gas in the well.
Production wells with gas in the fluids will exert a static surface pressure equal to the
formation pressure less the hydrostatic pressure in the production bore. The gas entrained
in the production fluids will segregate from the liquids. In a static situation, the closed in
tubing head pressure (CITHP) and hydrostatic pressure will balance the formation pressure.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
As discussed earlier, gas is also a fluid and exerts a hydrostatic pressure. Being compressible
pressure affects the density of the gas. A set of correction factors are used which are used
to calculate hydrostatic pressures at varying TVDs with a range of gas gravities. The
correction factor, according to the TVD of the gas column and the gas gravity, is
multiplied by the CITHP:
HP = Correction factor x CITHP
Example
What is the HP of a 5,000ft TVD column of 0.7 SG gas with a closed in tubing head pressure of
1,650psi?
HP of gas = 1.129 x 1,650psi

= 1863 psi
Therefore when we calculate the bottom-hole pressure from the above, we must add the
pressure together to calculate the BHP;
Surface pressure = 1650 psi

Gas Tubing Hydrostatic = BHP – SP = 1863 – 1650 = 213 psi (.0426 psi/ft)
BHP = 1863 (1650 + 213) (FG .3726 psi/ft)
Conversely when we need to determine the BHP and the maximum Surface pressure we need
to minus the pressures from the bottom up using the formation gradient (FG) = BHP;
BHP = FG x TVD = 1863 psi

Tubing gas gradient = .0426 psi/ft x 5000 = 213 psi/ft
Surface pressure = 1863 psi (BHP) – 213 (gas in tubing) = 1650 psi
Using the calculations already given in earlier sections and the gas correction factors,
hydrostatic pressures in relatively complicated systems can now be determined.
8.7 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURES
What is the differential pressure between the annulus and tubing at a circulation device
installed at a depth of 8,200ft TVD in the tubing string?
 The following are the well conditions:
 The tubing/casing annulus is filled with 10.29ppg brine.
 The well is shut in at surface with a CITHP of 600psi
 There is a gas cap of 0.6SG gas from 4,000ft
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 There is 32API oil from 4,000ft to 12,000ft
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
To help in the calculation, it is sometimes better to make a sketch.
Example
HP of brine in annulus at circulation device:
= 10.29ppg x 0.052 x 8,200ft
= 4,387psi
HP of gas cap = 1.087 (from table) x 600 psi
= 652psi
HP of oil column:
Oil SG = 141.5 ÷ 131.5 + 32
= 0.865 SG
HP of Oil Column = 0.865 SG x 0.433psi/ft x (8,200 - 4,000)ft
= 1,573psi
Total HP in tubing
= HP of gas + HP of oil
= 652 psi + 1,573 psi

=
= 2,225 psi
8.8 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ACROSS CIRCULATION DEVICE
= HP of annulus - HP of tubing
= 4,387psi - 2,225psi
= 2,162psi form annulus to tubing
If the circulation device were to be opened, then the opening tool-string would be exposed to
2,162psi differential pressure. If using wireline, this pressure differential will need to be
equalised before opening the device.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
9.0 WB - CALCULATIONS
Basic Oilfield Calculations WB0801.01/02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
To calculate well volumes, the inside and outside diameters of the tubular goods in the well
must be known. Consider the well of the following data is pertinent:
 Casing ID 6.154 ins
 Tubing OD 2.875 ins
 Tubing ID 2.441 ins
 Tubing Weight 6.4 lbf/ft
 Depth of SSD 8,210 ft
 Depth of packer 8,260 ft
 Depth of perforations 8,310 ft
Calculate:
The volume of the annulus.
The tubing volume above the SSD.
Total well volume to the circulating device with the tubing in the well.
The time to circulate kill fluid in the well at 0.75 bbl/minute.
NOTE: To calculate circulating volumes and times the circulating device is the datum
point
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Solution For 1
We can calculate the annulus volume in two

ways, either by equation or table
Method - By Calculations: (XSA cross sectional

area)
XSA of annulus 

 ID ca sin g 
2


 OD tubing  2
4 4


4
  
ID ca sing 2  OD tubing 
2

3.141
4

6.154 2  2.8752 
 23.25 ins 2
Annulus volume  Annulus area  SSD depth ( MD )

23.25
  8,210
144 Annulus Volume Calculations
 1,325.57 ft 3
1,325.57
Annulus volume   236 bbl
5.615
Note: 5.615 is a constant to convert cubic feet to barrels.
Method - By Table
Shows data on outside tubing diameter, inside casing diameters and annular volumes. Locate
7 inch casing that with an inside diameter of 6.154 inches. The annular volume in barrels per
linear foot is 0.0288 bbls/linear ft.
Solution For 2
Method - By Calculation
 IDtubing 2 3.141  2.4412

XSA  
4 4
4.68
  8,210
144
 266.8 ft 3
The area corresponding to the inside of the tubing is given by:
266.8
Tubing volume   47.5 bbl
5.615
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Method - By Tables:
The following shows data outside tubing diameters and tubing capacities. Locate the tubing
capacity in barrels per linear foot for 2,875 inch tubing with a weight per foot of 6.4 lbf/ft. This
is 0.0058 bbl/linear foot.
Tubing Volume to SSD  0.0058  8,210

 47.6 bbl
Solution For 3
Method - By Tables
Total volume  Annulus cap lin / ft  Tubing Cap lin / ft   depth to SSD
 0.0288  0.0058  8,210
 284 bbl
Solution For 4
Calculate the pumping time
Pump Rate = 0.75 bbl/min
284
Pump time  
0.75 379 minutes or 6.3 hours
REMEMBER: Always use measured depths for volume calculations.
REMEMBER: Always use true vertical depths for hydrostatic calculations.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Inside Tubing
OD 2.875” English units Volumes & Height
One String
Outside Casing
Weight with Inside
Size OD Drift Diameter Barrels for Lin Lin ft per
Coupling Diameter
(ins) (ins) ft Barrel
(lbs/ft) (ins)
4.750 16.00 4.082 3.957 0.0082 122.59
5.000 11.50 4.560 4.435 0.0122 82.17
13.00 4.494 4.369 0.0116 86.28
15.00 4.408 4.283 0.0108 92.20
18.00 4.276 4.151 0.0097 102.75
20.30 40184 4.059 0.0090 111.41
20.80 4.156 4.031 0.0087 114.29
23.20 4.044 3.919 0.0079 127.27
24.20 4.000 3.875 0.0075 133.10
5.500 13.00 5.044 4.919 0.0167 59.93
14.00 5.012 4.887 0.0164 61.08
15.00 4.974 4.849 0.0160 62.48
15.50 4.950 4.825 0.0158 63.40
17.00 4.892 4.767 0.0152 65.71
20.00 4.778 4.653 0.0141 70.68
23.00 4.670 4.545 0.0132 76.01
26.00 4.548 4.423 0.0121 82.89
5.750 14.00 5.290 5.165 0.0192 52.21
17.00 5.190 5.065 0.0181 55.14
19.50 5.090 4.965 0.0171 58.35
22.50 4.990 4.865 0.0162 61.88
6.000 15.00 5.524 5.399 0.216 46.27
16.00 5.500 5.375 0.0214 46.82
17.00 5.450 5.325 0.0208 48.02
18.00 5.424 5.299 0.0205 48.66
20.00 5.352 5.227 0.0198 50.52
23.00 5.240 5.115 0.186 53.64
26.00 5.140 5.015 0.0176 56.70
6.625 17.00 6.135 6.010 0.285 35.05
20.00 6.049 5.924 0.0275 36.34
22.00 5.989 5.864 0.0268 37.29
24.00 5.921 5.796 0.0260 38.42
26.00 5.855 5.730 0.0253 39.57
28.00 5.791 5.666 0.0245 40.74
29.00 5.761 5.636 0.0242 41.30
32.00 5.675 5.550 0.0233 43.00
7.000 17.00 6.538 6.413 0.0335 29.86
20.00 6.456 6.331 0.0325 30.81
22.00 6.398 6.273 0.0317 31.51
23.00 6.366 6.241 0.0313 31.91
24.00 6.336 6.211 0.0310 32.29
26.00 6.276 6.151 0.0302 33.08
28.00 6.214 6.089 0.0295 33.92
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
29.00 6.184 6.059 0.0291 34.34

30.00 6.154 6.029 0.0288 34.77
32.00 6.094 5.969 0.0280 35.66
33.70 6.048 5.923 0.0275 36.36
35.00 6.004 5.879 0.0270 37.05
38.00 5.920 5.795 0.0260 38.44
40.00 5.836 5.711 0.0251 39.91
Annular Volumes
Weight with Coupling lbs/ft Inside Drift

Size OD Barrels Lin ft per
Non Integral Diameter Diameter
(ins) Upset per Lin ft Barrel
Upset Joint (ins) (ins)
2.000 3.30 1.670 1.576 0.0027 369.11
2.063 2.66 1.813 1.656 0.0032 313.18
3.20 3.25 1.751 1.656 0.0030 335.75
2.375 3.10 2.125 1.901 0.0044 227.97
3.32 2.107 1.901 0.0043 231.88
4.00 2.041 1.947 0.0040 247.12
4.60 4.70 4.70 1.995 1.901 0.0039 258.65
5.30 5.30 1.939 1.845 0.0037 273.80
5.80 5.95 5.95 1.867 1.773 0.0034 295.53
6.20 1.853 1.759 0.0033 299.81
7.70 1.703 1.609 0.0028 354.94
2.875 4.36 2.579 2.485 0.0065 154.77
4.64 2.563 2.347 0.0064 156.71
6.40 6.50 6.50 2.441 2.347 0.0058 172.76
7.90 7.90 2.323 2.229 0.0052 190.76
8.60 8.70 8.70 2.259 2.165 0.0050 201.72
8.90 2.243 2.149 0.0049 204.61
9.50 9.50 2.195 2.101 0.0047 213.66
10.40 2.151 2.057 0.0045 222.49
10.70 2.091 1.997 0.0042 235.44
11.00 11.00 2.065 1.971 0.0041 241.41
11.65 1.995 1.901 0.0039 258.65
3.500 5.63 3.188 3.3063 0.0099 101.29
7.70 7.70 3.068 2.943 0.0091 109.37
9.20 9.30 9.30 2.992 2.867 0.0087 114.99
10.20 10.30 10.30 2.922 2.797 0.0083 120.57
12.80 2.764 2.639 0.0074 134.75
12.70 12.95 12.95 2.750 2.625 0.0073 136.12
13.30 2.764 2.639 0.0074 134.75
15.80 15.80 2.548 2.423 0.0063 158.56
16.70 16.70 2.480 2.355 0.0060 167.37
17.05 2.440 2.315 0.0058 172.91
4.000 9.50 9.40 3.548 3.423 0.0122 81.78
11.00 11.00 3.476 3.351 0.0117 85.20
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
11.60 3.428 3.303 0.0114 87.60

13.40 13.40 3.340 3.215 0.0108 92.28
22.80 2.780 2.655 0.0075 133.20
4.500 12.60 12.75 12.75 3.958 3.833 0.0152 65.71
13.50 13.50 3.920 3.795 0.0149 66.99
15.50 15.50 3.826 3.701 0.0142 70.32
16.90 3.754 3.629 0.0137 73.05
19.20 19.20 3.640 3.515 0.0129 77.69
21.60 3.500 3.375 0.0119 84.03
Tubing Capacity
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
9.1 ANNULAR VOLUMES
Having been given the following information from an annular chart. Calculate the total
volume above the packer. The well was completed with 9 5/8” 32.30 lbs/ft. casing and 3 ½”
Tubing. The packer was set at 9210ft MD (8750 TVD) by using the information below.
OD of Casing Bbls per Lin

Lbs per ft Ft3 per Lin ft Lin ft per ft3 Lin ft per bbl
Open Hole ft
OH 0.4180 2.3900 0.0745 13.4400
29.30 0.3607 2.7723 0.0642 15.5763
9 5/8” 32.30 0.3546 2.8200 0.0632 15.8228
36.00 0.3468 2.8835 0.0618 16.1812
40.00 0.3385 2.9542 0.0603 16.5837
9.2 CLOSED END TUBING CALCULATIONS
Occasionally, well services personnel may have to calculate volumes for pumping operations
or for well kill.
In nearly all cases, these figures can be obtained from industry standard tables of pipe
capacities, annular volumes, etc. from the above chart
It is important to remember that all volume calculations must be done using the measured
depth (MD) of the hole. If tables are not available, the following formulae may be used to
calculate capacity.
The capacity of a section of pipe in bbl/ft. is Cap. = D2 ÷ 1029.4 Where D = diameter in

inches.
The capacity of an annular space in bbl/ft. is Cap. = (Casing ID2 - Tubing OD2) ÷ 1029.4 (OD &
ID are diameters in inches)
Having obtained the capacity of a length of pipe from tables or from calculation, the total
fluid volume can be easily calculated by Fluid volume = capacity x length.
Capacity is in bbl/ft - Length is in MD.
It may be necessary to calculate the time it will take to pump a given volume of fluid.
Time to pump = Total volume ÷ pump rate/min.
Some pump rates are given in strokes/min, the pump output (bbls/stroke) will be known. This
is usually in the region 0.117 bbls/stroke, depending on the liner size.
A pump operating at 40 strokes/min will deliver 40 x 0.117 = 4.68 bpm.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
9.3 TUBING CLOSED END DISPLACEMENT

Tubing closed end displacement is the volume of fluid displaced by the tubing volume
(volume of the steel plus the volume of the tubing contents.) when the tubing is placed in
the casing bore to make an annulus.
The strokes required to displace the entire wellbore by circulating will be equal to the strokes
required to displace the volume contained in the casing less the volume displaced from the
casing by the tubing weight (and contents.) + Strokes used to displace the tubing
Calculate closed end displacement
Closed end displacement = Tubing OD2*- 1029.4
(Casing capacity-Tubing closed end displacement) = Annular Capacity Annular capacity x MD

(or MD shoe) = Annulus capacity (bbls)
Annular capacity ÷ Pump rate = strokes to displace the annulus by circulating = (casing
capacity- tubing closed end displacement) = 0.04049 - 0.01190 = 0.02859 bbls/ft
= .02859 x 10000ft = 286 bbls (in the annulus)
= (286 bbls ÷ 0.0899 bbls/stroke) = 3180 strokes in the annulus = 3180 strokes to displace
annulus by circulating.
Strokes to displace the entire wellbore = 3180 + strokes to displace the tubing = 3180 + 922
(tubing strokes)
Strokes to displace the entire wellbore by circulating = 4102
9.4 CLOSED END CALCULATION

Bottoms up refers to the time taken, volume required and or the number of strokes to move a
fluid from the circulating point to the surface.
NOTE: The direction of the circulation is important to know.
To calculate capacities, pump strokes and times, the following information is required:
Tubing Capacity
Casing Capacity
Closed End Metal Displacement
Pump Displacement/Rate
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
9.4.1 Circulating Reverse Example – Times
Times to Pump: Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD(ft)
Pump Rate (bbls/min)
Tubing: Tubing capacity (bbls/ft) x MD = Total Volume
Example: 0052 bbls/ft x 5000 ft MD = 26 BBLS
26 barrels ÷ Pump Rate (bbls/min) = Times
Example 26 Barrels ÷ .75BPM = 35 Minutes
9.4.2 Circulating Forward Example – Time
Time to Pump: Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD (ft)
Pump Rate (bbls/min)
Casing Capacity – Closed End = Annular Capacity
Example: Csg Cap .04039 – CETD .01183 = .02856 Ann. Cap
Annulus: Annular capacity (bbls/ft) x MD = Total Volume
Example: .02856 bbls/ft x 5000 ft MD = 143 BBLS
143 Barrels ÷ Pump Rate (bbls/min) = Time
Example: 143 Barrels ÷ .75BPM = 191 minutes
9.4.3 Circulating Reverse Example – Strokes
Strokes to Pump: Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD (ft)
Pump Displacement (bbls/Stroke)
Tubing: Tubing capacity (bbls/ft) x MD = Total Volume
26 barrels ÷ Pump Disp. (bbls/Str) = Strokes
Example 26 Barrels ÷ .0789 bbls/str = 329 Strokes
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
9.4.4 Circulating Forward Example – Strokes
Strokes to Pump: Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD (ft)
Pump Displacement (bbls/Stroke)
Casing Capacity – Closed End = Annular Capacity
Example: Csg Cap .04039 – CETD .01183 = .02856 Ann. Cap
Annulus: Annular capacity (bbls/ft) x MD = Total Volume
143 Barrels ÷ Pump Disp. (bbls/str) = Strokes
Example 143 Barrels ÷ .0789 bbls/str = 1812 Strokes
9.4.5 BOTTOMS UP for Reverse Circulation

Bottoms Up for reverse circulation is the volume of the tubing. In a planned well kill we pump
down the annulus and up the tubing.
9.4.6 BOTTOMS UP for Forward (normal) Circulation

Bottoms Up for forward circulation is the volume of the annulus. Directionally down the
tubing and up via the annulus
9.4.7 Full Circulation

(Tubing capacity x MD)/pump rate in bbls/min
(Annular capacity x MD)/ pump rate in bbls/min
Time required for a full circulation = time to displace the annulus + time to displace the
tubing.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
10.0 COMPLETION OPERATIONS
10.1 WA - WELL CONTROL INCIDENTS
Negative Impact & Effects WA01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Well control is the management of the dangerous effects caused by the unexpected release
of formation fluid, such as natural gas and/or crude oil, upon surface equipment and escaping
into the atmosphere. Technically, oil well control involves preventing the formation fluid,
usually referred to as kick, from entering into the wellbore during drilling.
Formation fluid can enter the wellbore if the pressure exerted by the column of drilling fluid is
not great enough to overcome the pressure exerted by the fluids in the formation being
drilled. Well control also includes monitoring a well for signs of impending influx of formation
fluid into the wellbore during drilling and procedures, to stop the well from flowing when it
happens by taking proper remedial actions.
Failure to manage and control these pressure effects can cause serious equipment damage
and injury, or loss of life. Improperly managed well control situations can cause kicks or
influxes which are uncontrolled and explosive expulsions of formation fluid from the well,
potentially resulting in a fire, injury/death, environmental problems and loss of the asset.
Blowouts are easily the most dangerous and destructive potential disasters in the world of oil
drilling. Not only can they lead to serious injury and even death, but they can also cause
massive, debilitating production shut-downs and can have a negative effect on future
production from the lost well. Blowouts can also cause severe ecological damage. As with any
potential disaster, prevention is the first step in avoiding an otherwise costly and dangerous
situation. These preventative measures are called, collectively, Well Control.
"Blowout Prevention is simply the training and understanding of how to prevent this from
happening."
Blowout prevention is a very broad term that can encompass anything from the
precautionary methods used on rigs to prevent "kicks" -- the unexpected and undesired flow
of formation fluids into a well -- from developing, to the use of sophisticated devices called
Blowout Preventers (or BOPs) designed to close off a well in the face of a looming blowout.
The first stage of blowout prevention/Intervention operations is preparedness. Most

countries and corporations require certification in well control/intervention practices from all
drilling/Intervention employees, a policy that underscores the potential danger of a blowout
or an unplanned event.
To prevent kicks, drilling operators must use "drilling mud," otherwise known as drilling fluid,
a viscous mud-like substance that comes in varying densities, to balance the tremendous
upward pressure of the formation fluids surging up the well. The downward pressure of the
drilling fluid is called bottom hole pressure. Drilling fluid engineers must be vigilant and
careful to ensure that the pressures reach equilibrium, a tedious but vitally important task.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
"The working fluid in a well is considered the primary barrier against blowouts or unplanned
events, "Theoretically, if the formation pressure is greater than the bottom-hole pressure,
formation fluids could enter a well and, if uncontrolled, develop into a disaster."
Macondo 2011 SINTEF investigation
Important underlying causes of the accident:
 Ineffective leadership
 Compartmentalisation of information and deficient communication
 Failure to provide timely procedures
 Poor training and supervision of employees
 Ineffective management and oversight of contractors
 Inadequate use of technology/instrumentation
 Failure to appropriately analyse and appreciate risk
 Focus on time and costs rather than control of major accident risks
Well Integrity WA01.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
With regard to oil wells, is defined as the Application of technical, operational and
organizational solutions to reduce risk of uncontrolled release of formation fluids throughout
the life cycle of a well.
There are various facets to well integrity, including accountability and responsibility, well
operating processes, well service processes, tubing/annulus integrity, tree/wellhead integrity
and testing of safety systems.
Well Barriers are the corner stone of managing Well Integrity.
The primary purpose of well integrity management is to maintain full control of fluids at all
times to prevent the loss of containment to the exterior of the wellbore, the environment and
the formations penetrated by the wellbore.
This is achieved by employing and maintaining one or more barrier envelope.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
11.0 WA - WELL CONTROL TRAINING & ASSESSMENT
This is what we want to avoid!

Why is Well Integrity Im portant?
It can help to prevent incidents like this
11.1 INTEGRITY DRIVERS & IMPLEMENTATION
 Safety
 Statutory regulations
 Internal Policy & Standards
 Production
 Reputation
 Technical & Performance Standards
 Procedures
 Industry Standards
 Vendors Procedures
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
11.2 KNOWLEDGE, TRAINING & COMPETENCY
This can be defined as the ability to undertake responsibilities and perform activities to a
recognised standard on a regular basis. It is a combination of skills, experience and
knowledge. The inadequate management of competence has not only contributed to
disasters such as Esso Longford and BP Texas City, but also to fatalities, personal injuries.
Training is an important component of establishing competency but is not sufficient on its

own. Consolidation of knowledge and skills through practice is a key part of developing
competency.
Training and competence assessment methods should be appropriate to the hazard profile of
the tasks being undertaken.
Training should be validated (“Did it deliver what it was supposed to”) and recorded.
The purpose of training is for personnel to be able to carry out defined tasks without
supervision. Because you are part of a team other people rely on you to be able to identify
risks and deal with them
Training is always ongoing
11.3 WELL INTEGRITY MINIMUM STANDARDS
Accountable Person Wells Technical Authority
Well Operating Procedures Well Handover Process & Operate Wells
Well Intervention Procedures Field Specific Procedures
Tubing / Casing Integrity Management Field Specific Procedures
Field Specific Procedures & Planned

Xmas Tree Maintenance & Testing Policy
maintenance routines (PMR’s)
Field Specific Procedures & Planned
DHSV / ASV Integrity Management
maintenance routines (PMR’s
Knowledge Management Drilling & Well Operations Policy
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
11.4 ROOT CAUSES OF WELL CONTROL INCIDENTS
There will always be potential oil well control problems, as long as there are drilling
operations anywhere in the some are actually unavoidable. Since we know the consequences
of failed well control are severe, efforts should be made to prevent some human errors which
are the root causes of these incidents. These causes include:
 Lack of knowledge and skills of personnel
 Improper work practices
 Lack of understanding of well control training
 Lack of application of policies, procedures, and standards
 Inadequate risk management
11.5 BUILDING WELL CONTROL CULTURE
Good well control culture requires personnel involved in well control to develop a core value
for it by doing the proper thing at the proper time. A good well control culture will definitely
minimize well control incidents. Building well-control culture would involve developing
competent personnel that are able to recognize well-control problems and know what to do
to mitigate against them. This is usually done through quality-assurance programs and
training.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
12.0 WA - WELL CONTROL TRAINING & ASSESSMENT
Training and Competency WA02-01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
It is each and every employee’s responsibility to ensure that they have satisfied themselves
with the requirements of the Work Programme and the status of all equipment etc. prior to
commencing operations. If any other issues have not been addressed and confirmed, then
the operation must cease until an agreeable solution has be identified and actioned.
Ensure that the crew are aware of any pre operational Safety and Environmental Risk
Assessments that are to be completed prior to operations commencing.
Liase with the Production Control Room and any relevant Supervisors with regard to the
bleed down and venting of equipment.
Liase with the platform supervisor, deck foreman and crane drivers with regard to operations
being undertaken, so they are aware of the restrictions on crane movement within the vicinity
of the intervention equipment.
Check that all pressure control equipment, power packs, wire, slings and lifting equipment
have current valid certification.
Check Well File and Work Programme with regard to any hazardous well conditions,
problems, etc. that have already been logged in the past.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
13.0 WA – PRE-OPERATION PLANNING
Responsibilities for Well Control WA03-01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Primary well control shall be maintained at all times. In the event secondary control becomes
necessary, the well shall be brought back under control as safely as possible. For each well
control operation all personnel shall have a pre-assigned task appropriate to their function.
All personnel shall also ensure familiarity with Company well control procedures.
The intervention crew, the operator rep. and the Well Services Supervisor have had a pre-job
meeting.
A crew from an intervention company has its own internal organization, with a supervisor and
one or more operators as well as any personnel in training. Since the supervisor also has a lot
of administrative work, he will not be at the work site at all times It is therefore important
that an operator is certified and capable of carrying out the operation and ensuring safety on
the well when the supervisor is not available.
If more than one company works on the same well, the work must be organized and a co-
ordinator responsible for this, appointed. The intervention company’s supervisor or
coordinator reports to their leader, who is the operator’s representative.
Before work begins, the program must be reviewed by all those involved. The operator
company’s representative calls in and leads this meeting where the operation is reviewed.
Representatives from other affected parties, for example production and cranes, will usually
attend these meetings. If large operations are to be executed, the program can be reviewed
in sections as the work progresses.
If some parts of the work are not covered by the procedures, a meeting must be called where
the work is reviewed and its risk evaluated. Before the operation is started, relevant work
permits and security clearance must be procured. The work crew’s supervisor must inform his
team about the lines of action and elements of risk in short work meetings called as the work
progresses. This is especially important if some of the work is new to any of the workers or if
there is need to change the procedure at any point.
If any abnormal situations arise on the well, the person executing the work must secure the
well as a first priority, at the same time reporting the abnormalities to their supervisor.
When the well is under control, it is important that the situation is reviewed and evaluated
before further action is carried out or normal work resumes. Make sure that all involved
parties are informed about the status of the well and the work that is done and shall be done
to secure the well.
Pre-Op Planning WA03-02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
13.1 REMIT
A well is initially drilled and completed under the control of the drilling and completions
department operating under the request of the asset. Once the well is completed, control is
transferred to the asset's production team, who will operate the well as appropriate for their
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
purposes. Should any issues of well integrity or any requirement for well work arises, the
asset will refer the issue to the well services. During interventions, control of affected well is
handed over from production to the well services crew at the well site, a practical action
involving transferring control lines from the production control panel to the well services
control panel.
13.2 ONSHORE/OFFICE BASED
The organization of a well services department will vary greatly from location to location. In
general, however, it will comprise a number of well operations engineers (WOE) tasked with
looking after the well of a specific asset. This focused mandate allows the WOE to develop a
close relationship with the staff in his/her assigned asset and to become familiar with the
issues around the wells and the well site at large. The WOE's expertise on wells is important
on a daily basis as he/she can offer thoughts on any well integrity issues, even when no
particular well work is required.
13.3 OFFSHORE/WELL SITE

When well work is required, it is the responsibility of the WOE to assemble the team and
arrange there dispatch to the well site. The team will consist of a well services supervisor and
other operators. The well services supervisor is a dedicated worker who is sent to oversee
well services operations at well sites and take responsibility for all well services personnel. At
offshore sites, there will commonly be two, to cover both day shift and night shift. The other
operators will usually consist of personnel from supplier companies, who are trained in the
relevant field, such as wireline, coiled tubing, wellhead maintenance, etc.
A Pre-Job Meeting WA03-02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
A pre operational meeting must be

held with all parties who may be
involved in or be affected by the
well intervention programme. The
following agenda Guidance must be
adhered to as a minimum and made
clear to all members of the work
party.
This process must be repeated for

each well intervention programme.
Additionally, regular pre shift
meetings must be held and
recorded as well as further toolbox
talks to be held during the shift at
every operational phase change, to
ensure that all members of the well intervention team are kept fully informed of every aspect
of the operation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
These toolbox talks shall involve all members of the intervention team and client
representatives as required. Any non-routine issues MUST be reported to the client
representative onboard and to the onshore support team as required.
Pre Operations Offshore Meeting Guidelines
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
This meeting shall have representation from the following departments / service lines.
 Company crew – All disciplines and grades.
 Other service company representatives.
 Operating Company Representative.
 Production Department Representative
 Drilling Department Representative
 Facilities Department Representative
If any given department is not represented at this meeting, they must be made aware of the
operational requirements of the intervention team immediately after the meeting, these
requirements should include, but not be limited to, the following:
 Planned Well Operation Programme to be reviewed step by step and all parties agree
on roles and responsibilities within the intervention team.
 Review of any onshore Risk Assessment details and findings.
 Review of well history. (To be reviewed in line with planned operation).
 Current status of Well and Christmas tree.
 Any safety issues e.g. H2s presence etc.
 Working rules i.e. two people must be present at the worksite during Wireline
operations in the well bore.
 All pre operational equipment checklists must be completed and equipment

confirmed as fit for purpose.
 Any defects must be recorded in compliance with QA procedures. Thus adopting a

prevention attitude to operational equipment and potential operational issues.
 All personnel to be aware of the procedure that MUST be followed in the event that
there is a significant change to the agreed Programme. It must be made clear to all
that the operation must STOP until agreement on the way ahead is reached by all.
Any significant changes to the Programme must be communicated back to the
company onshore support team.
 It must also be made clear that no other work can be carried out on the well or
surrounding area without the knowledge and consent of the senior company
representative.
 If in doubt:
Stop – Check– Validate

Stop - the operation if there is any doubt or concern about the operation no matter how small
it may initially appear, seek the advice of other qualified personnel or client, personnel and
onshore support, if required, before considering the continuation of the operation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Check - that what is being done is in accordance with all company and client policies,
procedures and written work instructions and ensure that all relevant aspects of the pre job
safety briefing have been considered.
Validate - all aspects of the operation including equipment and pre operational checks and
crew competence. If in doubt, ask for validation for any issue or situation. Do not continue
with any operation unless you are completely satisfied that all aspects of the operation and
personnel have been validated and confirmed. When required, verification should be
confirmed by counter signature.
Importance of Pre-Job Planning WA03.03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
All operations must be carried out with due regard to the operating Companies Permit to
Work System and working procedures, so familiarise yourself with it in plenty of time.
It is the Senior Representative’s responsibility to ensure that any safety or operational

condition on the permit is adhered to and to ensure that all pre-job meetings and
assessments are completed as per Safety Procedures
If, however, a Contractual Interface Agreement exists, where the operator’s format of Pre-
operations Meeting (Toolbox Talk) must be employed, then this meeting format will be
adopted.
If no interface agreement exists, then the company format as laid out in the referenced
relevant Safety Procedures and this Work Instruction will be us.
Tool Box Talks WA03.03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Well control related information shall be disseminated to relevant personnel and contractors,
as required, and well control aspects shall be regularly discussed during the weekly safety
meetings, or toolbox meeting. Safety meetings with rig and contractor personnel shall be
conducted before all well control operations. The meetings should review planned operations
and contingencies.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Tool Box Talk
14.0 WA – HANDOVERS
Handovers WA04-01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The handover from the “outgoing” to “incoming” crew shall be carried in a formal and
consistent manner and include all safety critical and relevant details to assure operating
integrity and the safe, continuous and effective operation of the intervention procedures
Analysis of accidents has repeatedly cited lack of effective communication as a major

contributory factor and particularly where breaks in work continuity occur, as can be the case
where a crew change takes place.
Handover notes that are not supported by clear and concise “verbal” communication often
leads to misunderstanding as to the “true status” being conveyed. Misinterpretation of the
handover documents may result, because each individual’s information needs are different.
Ultimately these may impact upon asset performance through missed opportunities and
unplanned deferments.
To address the above all Safety Critical aspects personnel shall conduct a formal hand-over
with both written and verbal actions. Where required the handover will be supplemented by
Checklists and Handover Sheets with the current well status.
15.0 WB - INTRODUCTION TO WELL CONTROL
Hydrostatic Pressure WB01/2/3 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
See under section 1 Calculations
Formation Pressure WB02.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Formation pressure is the pressure of the fluid within the pore spaces of the formation rock.
This pressure can be affected by the weight of the overburden (rock layers) above the
formation, which exerts pressure on both the grains and pore fluids. Grains are solid or rock
material, and pores are spaces between grains. If pore fluids are free to move, or escape, the
grains lose some of their support and move closer together. This process is called
consolidation. Depending on the magnitude of the pore pressure, it can be described as being
normal, abnormal or subnormal.
Normal Pore Pressure or formation pressure is equal to the hydrostatic pressure of

formation fluid extending from the surface to the surface formation being considered. In
other words, if the formation was opened up and allowed to fill a column whose length is
equal to the depth of the formation, then the pressure at the bottom of the column will be
equal to the formation pressure and the pressure at surface is equal to zero. Normal pore
pressure is not a constant. Its magnitude varies with the concentration of dissolved salts, type
of fluid, gases present and temperature gradient.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
When a normally pressured formation is raised toward the surface while prevented from
losing pore fluid in the process, it will change from normal pressure (at a greater depth) to
abnormal pressure (at a shallower depth). When this happens, and then one drill into the
formation, mud weights of up to 20 ppg (2397 kg/m ³) may be required for control. This
process accounts for many of the shallow, abnormally pressured zones in the world. In areas
where faulting is present, salt layers or domes are predicted, or excessive geothermal
gradients are known, drilling operations may encounter abnormal pressure.
Abnormal Pore Pressure is defined as any pore pressure that is greater than the hydrostatic
pressure of the formation fluid occupying the pore space. It is sometimes called overpressure
or geopressure. An abnormally pressured formation + .465psi/ft can often be predicted using
well history, surface geology, downhole logs or geophysical surveys.
Subnormal Pore Pressure is defined as any formation pressure that is less than the
corresponding fluid hydrostatic pressure at a given depth. Subnormal pressured formations
have pressure gradients lower than fresh water or less than 0.433 psi/ft (0.0979 bar/m).
Naturally occurring subnormal pressure can be developed when the overburden has been
stripped away, leaving the formation exposed at the surface. Depletion of original pore fluids
through evaporation, capillary action and dilution produces hydrostatic gradients below 0.433
psi/ft (0.0979 bar/m). Subnormal pressures may also be induced through depletion of
formation fluids. If Formation Pressure < Hydrostatic pressure then it is under pressured. If
Formation Pressure > Hydrostatic pressure then it is over pressured.
Formation Fracture Pressure WB03-01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The amount of pressure a formation can withstand before it splits is termed the fracture
pressure. The pressure of fluid in a well must exceed formation pressure before the fluid can
enter a formation and cause a fracture. Fracture pressure is expressed in psi, as a gradient in
psi/ft, or as a fluid weight equivalent in ppg.
In order to plan a conventional rig well intervention, it is necessary to have some knowledge
of the fracture pressures of the formation to be encountered. If wellbore pressures were to
equal or exceed this fracture pressure, the formation would break down as the fracture was
initiated, followed by loss of work-over fluid, loss of hydrostatic pressure, loss of primary well
control and irreparable damage to the formation.
Most operating companies have strict policies and procedures to ensure the fracture pressure
is never exceeded (unless the formation was to be deliberately fractured for reservoir
productivity improvement through sand fracking operations, etc.). Unless the service is to
conduct remedial operations on or in the casing across the formation, it is preferred to isolate
the formation from the kill fluid by installing a barrier or plug.
Fracture pressures are related to the weight of the formation matrix (rock) and the fluids
(water/oil) occupying the pore space within the matrix, above the zone of interest. These two
factors combine to produce what is known as the overburden pressure. Assuming the average
density of a thick sedimentary sequence to be the equivalent of 19.2ppg then the overburden
gradient is given by:
0.052 x 19.2 = 1.0psi/ft
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Since the degree of compaction of sediments is known to vary with depth, the gradient is not
constant.
Onshore, since the sediments tend to be more compacted, the overburden gradient can be
taken as being close to 1.0psi/ft. Offshore, however the overburden gradients at shallow
depths will be much less than 1.0psi/ft due to the effect of the depth of seawater and large
thickness of unconsolidated sediment.
Barrier Classification
This section describes the classification of each common barrier grouping definitions used.
Note: these may not be generic to the industry world-wide.
Primary Pressure Control WB04.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Primary pressure control is the system, which provides the first line of defence from an
uncontrolled well flow. In each of the well servicing intervention methods it is provided by
different mechanical systems. On a wireline rig up it is simply the stuffing box and lubricator
envelope, however on a CT or snubbing rig up, it consists of the riser pressure envelope and
internal work-string check valves. Examples of Primary Barriers are:
 Stuffing Box
 Grease Injection Head
 Stripping Packers
 Upper/Lower Stripping Rams
 Stripping Rubbers
Secondary Pressure Control WB05.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Secondary pressure control is the system, which provides the second line of defence, in the
event that primary well control cannot be properly maintained. This is generally provided by
the BOP system.
If pumping facilities are available, a hydrostatic fluid barrier can be placed in the wellbore as a
secondary barrier when both the primary or original secondary barrier has failed and there is
no tertiary barrier.
Tertiary Well Control
Tertiary oil well control describes the third line of defence, where the formation cannot be
controlled by primary or secondary well control (hydrostatic and equipment). The following
are examples of tertiary well control:
 Shear/Seal BOP
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Xmas Tree Master Valve designed to cut wire
 Shear BOP
 Safety Heads
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Pressure Control Equipment WB06.01 Level of Importance L3-5/L4-5
Typical items of pressure Control
16.0 WB – CALCULATIONS
Calculations WB801/02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
See under Section 1 Calculations
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
17.0 WC – INTRODUCTION TO BARRIERS
Well Barrier Envelope Philosophy WC01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Well Barriers are the corner stone of managing Well Integrity.
The primary purpose of well integrity management is to maintain full control of fluids at all
times to prevent the loss of containment to the exterior of the wellbore, the environment and
the formations penetrated by the wellbore.
The barrier system for the well is called the ‘well barrier envelope’. This system includes both
active barrier elements (like DHSV and master valves) and passive barrier elements (like
casing, tubing and production packer).
 Barriers are not 'stand-alone' items, they are part of a group of components which
form a barrier envelope i.e. they form part of a barrier system.
 The wireline stuffing box is only a component (element) of the stuffing box-
lubricator-BOP envelope which contains well fluids.
 In the following drawing the envelope of barrier elements that prevents flow out of
the well via the tubing string when the tree is closed is as follows:- If any one of the
elements in this envelope fails, there are various secondary elements which should
prevent the escape of wellbore fluids from the well. For example, if there is a leak at
the packer into the annulus, the overbalanced completion fluid will initially stop the
wellbore fluids from reaching the production casing. After a while, this may change as
the completion fluid escapes from the annulus and the wellbore fluids will then be
prevented from leaving the well by the production casing, side outlet valves and the
tubing hanger seals.
For all live well work, we rely on barriers. These may be downhole barriers (mechanical plugs,
columns of fluid, etc.) or they may be surface barriers. Barriers are divided into primary,
secondary and tertiary barriers, or barrier elements.
During intervention work, there will be one primary barrier such as the stuffing box on a slick-
line job. This primary barrier may not be the same for the whole job. In the slick-line example,
the stuffing box is only the primary barrier when the wire is in the hole. When the wire is out
of the hole, and the lubricator laid down, the Xmas tree (swab valve) is the primary barrier.
The backup safety devices are the secondary barriers (the BOP's in slick-line work) and the
tertiary barriers are those which are only used in the event of an emergency (the cutter
valves).
There may be multiple barriers such as when two or more plugs are placed in a well or when
two valves in the same line are closed. For a truly safe operation, double barriers should
always be used. Barriers alone will not contain well pressure. In the example of the slick-line
rig up, the stuffing box (the primary barrier) will not contain the wellbore fluids and pressure
without the lubricator when it is attached to and all the other components connected to the
tree.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Annular
OVERBALANCED COMPLETION FLUID
© 2009 Aker Qserv Ltd
DHSV Pressure Envelope
Barrier Elements
1. SCSSSV
2. Tubing
3. Packer
4. Casing below the Packer
©2009 Aker QservLt d
In this way we can consider a barrier envelope. The envelope is made up of the barrier
elements containing the pressure or fluids. In the example of the slickline rig up, the envelope
is the tree X-over, the BOP, the lubricator sections and the stuffing box.
The DHSV forms part of the pressure containing tubing string in the same way as any other
non-well control completion component.
If any one of the elements in this envelope fails, there are various secondary elements to
prevent the escape of wellbore fluids from the well. For example, if the packer leaks into the
annulus, an overbalanced completion fluid will initially stop the wellbore fluids from reaching
the production casing. After a while, this may change as the completion fluid escapes from
the annulus and the wellbore fluids will then be prevented from leaving the well by the
production casing, annulus valves and the tubing hanger seals.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Well Barrier Philosophy – WC01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The purpose of developing a well is to safely and economically produce oil or gas and, as such,
the completion is one of the key elements in the safety of the well. The well should be
designed to ensure that, in general, there are two reliable and independent barriers between
the reservoir and the environment at all times.
A barrier is any device, fluid or substance that prevents the flow of well bore fluids and it does
this by blocking off the flow path.
It is good practice to ensure that at least two tested barriers are available at all times and it
should be borne in mind that a well which cannot sustain flow should have the same amount
of barriers as a well that can flow.
Barrier Management WC02.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The primary well barrier elements are SCSSV, production packer & completion string.
Secondary barrier elements include Christmas tree, tubing hanger, wellhead, casing and
cement.
Well barrier elements include deep-set plugs under the production packer and plugs in the
hanger assembly for the completion string
Well Barrier Element Testing WC02.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Element Type Function Failure mode
Exerts a hydrostatic pressure

Fluid Column on the formation that prevents Leak off into the formation
the flow of pressure or gas
Provides a mechanical seal in

the annulus where the
formation is not isolated by
cement or tubulars. Leak off into the formation
Provides a continuous Not sufficient formation
permanent & impermeable strength to with stand annulus
Formation Strength hydraulic seal above the pressure
reservoir. Not sufficient formation
Impermeable formation strength to achieve a hydraulic
located above the reservoir seal
sealing either cement/annulus
isolation or directly to the
casing/liner.
Provides mechanical support
for suspending the casing and Leaking seal or valves
Wellhead
tubing hanger. Mechanical over load
Provides a mechanical
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
interface for connecting a

riser, BOP or xmas tree
Contains completion fluids Leak at any connections

within its bore so that it does Leaks caused by corrosion or
Casing
not leak out into any other erosion
annuli or exposed formations Parted connections
Provides a positive sealing

Leak across v packing either
Deep Set Plug device in the tubing to prevent
externally or internally
flow from the formation side.
Provides a mechanical seal

between the completion
tubing and the casing liner.
Leaks across either the internal
Production Packer Establishes the “A” annulus
or external seals
above thus preventing
communication from the
formation into the annulus.
Barrier Test Documentation WC02.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
All pressure tests must continue until a straight line has been held for 10-minutes to the
specified pressure on a certified chart recorder or equivalent.
This chart must be signed by a company representative to witness the completion of a

satisfactory pressure test and must contain the following information:-
 Sequence that pressure test was carried out against relevant section of chart.
 Equipment identification numbers being pressure tested.
 Client name
 Field
 Well No.
 Date
 Test Medium
The different mediums commonly used while pressure testing are as follows:
 Water
 Water/Glycol mix
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Corrective Action Test Failure WC02.06 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Depending on the type of barrier that failed will depend on the course of action to be taken?
Failed wireline retrievable DHSV would require changing out.
Failed tubing retrievable DHSV would require locking out & set insert valve.
Failed plug would either require pulling and resetting if leak-off was insignificant set another
plug above.
Annulus pressure would require monitoring or lubricating and bleeding
Mechanical Barriers WC02.07 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
All barriers that are not liquid are mechanical barriers. Just like a fluid barrier, a mechanical
barrier must also satisfy many requirements in order to be approved. It must be defined,
described, tested, approved and documented.
We have several types of mechanical barriers and it is natural to undertake a grouping. We

discern between permanent and temporary barriers. In addition, we separate between
permanently installed and closable barriers.
There are requirements for the testing of barriers. Since there are different types of
equipment that go into the barriers, it is necessary to test in different ways. In some cases it
is necessary to put extra pressure on one side. This is called a positive test. Other times it is
necessary to bleed off pressure on one side to check if there is leak. This is called an “inflow
test,” or a negative test.
As an example, the well will be pressurized to test if the cement holds when the casing has
been cemented. When the BOP is to be tested before rigging up, it is closed and exposed to
pressure from different directions depending on how it is configured.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Barrier Types WC02.07 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
There are two types of barrier:
 Mechanical Plugs
 Check Valve / BPV Valve
 Pressure Cycle Plug
 Pump Through Plug
 Expendable Plug
 Wireline Plug
 Pump Open Plug
 Bridge Plugs
 Cement Plugs
 Ice Plugs
 Overbalanced Fluids
17.1 FLOW CONTROL DEVICES
17.1.1 TUBING HANGER PLUGS
The innermost hanger, the tubing

hanger, usually has a profile for
locating a Tubing Hanger Plug (THP)
or Back Pressure Valve (BPV) or Two
Way Check Valve (TWCV). These all
perform the same function i.e. seal
off the top of the well below the
Xmas tree to allow the tree to be
tested, repaired or removed.
These well containment devices can

be run into the tubing hanger with
the well under pressure and used as mechanical barriers required before removing a Xmas
tree.
There are two basic types of tubing hanger plugs, wireline plug type and a type that is
mechanically screwed into the hanger called Back Pressure Plugs (BPV)
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
17.1.2 WIRELINE TYPE PLUGS
The wireline plugs are run into the profile and locked in the tubing hanger. The various types
of plug.
Seal off the wellbore from below but still allow pumping through from above (BPVs),
Seal off in both directions (Positive Plugs) and that will seal off in either but allow slow
pumping through the valve from above (Tics).
These plugs can be run and pulled with a wireline unit or by using a special lubricator which
does the same job but is operated manually using rods whilst still containing the well
pressure.
17.1.3 THREADED PLUGS (BPV)
These plugs are screwed into a threaded section of the tubing hanger where they seal
externally. They are run and pulled using a special lubricator (Polished Rod Lubricator)
that contains the wellbore pressure whist the plug or valve is being run or pulled.
17.1.4 BLANKING PLUGS
Blanking plugs are set in nipples to shut off the flow of fluids. A true blanking plug has no fluid
bypass facility making running procedures slow. Bypass blanking plugs allow fluid bypass and
may require one or two runs to set them. Before these plugs are pulled they should be
equalised above and below.
17.1.5 CHECK VALVES (STANDING VALVES)
Standing valves or check valves (not to be confused with the check valves which form part of
a coil tubing or snubbing Bottom Hole Assembly) are run and set in a nipple and are designed
to hold pressure from above only. They are used for pressure testing the tubing above them
and for setting packers.
The valve can be recovered as soon as pressure testing or packer setting operations are
complete. This type of valve is usually fitted with an equalising valve that will shear prior to
pulling.
Check valves will normally only require one wireline trip for running and retrieval since the
wireline remains latched during packer setting or pressure testing operations.
17.1.6 PUMP THROUGH PLUGS
Pump through Plugs hold pressure from below and are used to isolate the well below their
location in the wellbore. These plugs can be pumped through for well kill operations etc.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
17.1.7 PUMP OPEN PLUGS
Pump Open Plugs are positive plugs but can be pumped open by applying excess surface
pressure. They serve as temporary tubing plugs that can be pumped open for production
without having to be retrieved by wireline.
17.1.8 EXPENDABLE PLUGS
This is a plugging device run as an integral part of the tubing. It can be used to set a
hydraulic set packer or to test the tubing string. When the plug is expended, the
plugging material disintegrates leaving a full tubing I.D.
17.1.9 PRESSURE CYCLE PLUGS
Pressure cycle plugs are similar to Pump Open Plugs but with this design the plug opens after
pressure above the plug has been cycled a pre-set number of times (up to 20) and to a pre-set
pressure. This cycling offers better protection against premature opening. These plugs can be
run into a nipple on a lock mandrel or they can be pre-installed prior to running the
completion.
17.1.10 ICE PLUGS (FREEZE METHOD)
This (non-routine) type of plug is classified as a mechanical plug and is set using the Freeze
Method. An ice plug is made in the wellhead or other surface component. The process of
making ice plugs involves chemicals like glycol, heat exchangers, dry ice, liquid nitrogen and
static fresh water. The process is very slow and it may take up to 18 hours for an ice plug to
form.
While testing a mechanical barrier (positive plug) in a well, it will mainly be exposed to
differential pressure when one bleeds off pressure on the topside of the plug. There are many
ways of performing a test and it is important to know where information about the correct
procedure can be found.
In many cases it will be internal test procedures or the operator company’s procedures that
apply. Often the applicable procedure will be put in as a part of the well program or referred
to in the operational manual, API, NORSOK or the equipment suppliers’ recommendations.
The procedures will be built on experience, manufacturer recommendations, and
requirements from the authorities.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
17.2 BARRIER REQUIREMENT
All wells should be secured with a minimum of two

barriers that must be tested, whether the well is live or
dead. So, what then do we understand by the word
barrier? Any mechanical or fluid device that prevents
the flow of pressure or fluids
On a drawing of a cross section of a well, we can draw

a line from the bottom of the well up to the surface
and down again on the other side. We call this a
barrier envelope. Such an envelope is composed of
many barrier elements, and we must differentiate
between the envelope and the elements.
If we put a plug in the well, it is a barrier element that

is part of a barrier envelope. The barriers are to be
independent of each other. This means that we
should be able to draw two separate lines outside each
other on the well drawing.
That which is active against the well pressure is the

primary barrier. For example, in wireline the lubricator
and stuffing box are the primary barrier. If this leaks,
the secondary barrier activates, which will be the BOP
closing around the wire. If the secondary barrier fails,
the tertiary barrier is activated, which is some form of
a cut-and-seal ram.
IWCF defines everything that cuts and seals as a

tertiary barrier. It can be a rigged up a manual shear
ram, a hydraulic shear ram in the BOP, or a main valve
in the Xmas tree if it is designed for cutting wire.
In any case, the valves must be individually tested and

approved before they are accepted as barriers.
17.3 HYDROSTATIC (FLUID)
A fluid barrier is a liquid fluid column with a specific gravity that allows the hydrostatic
pressure to be higher than the reservoir pressure at the bottom of the well. A fluid barrier is
always the primary barrier and must be observable. A mechanical barrier is a tested and
approved barrier that is not liquid
A fluid barrier is a fluid column with enough specific gravity to create a hydrostatic pressure
that is larger than the reservoir pressure at the bottom of the well in question is called an
overbalance.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Overpressure on the reservoir is called overbalance or kill margin. The strength and friction in
the reservoir decides how large this difference can be. It is assumed that there is fluid from
the bottom all the way to the
surface. It is also assumed that the
fluid column is in direct contact
with the reservoir fluid and
pressure. In other words, there
cannot be a plug placed in the well.
It is a requirement that the fluid

barrier is observable. This can be
done in several different ways, the
most primitive way being to keep
watch at the top of the well to see
that the fluid is stable. A fluid
barrier will always be a primary
barrier. As a curiosity we can say
that if we freeze water so that it
becomes an ice plug this will be a
mechanical barrier once it is tested
and approved. Barriers MUST be observed
Hydrostatic barriers are primary barriers if they are being monitored i.e. it is important to
know the fluid is still present and the physical properties of the fluid to ensure an overbalance
at the top of the perforations. Hydrostatic barriers exert a hydrostatic pressure sufficient to
overbalance the formation pressure.
Principle of Barrier Classification WC02.09 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Barriers are classified as follows:
Primary - The barrier that performs well pressure control function during normal operating
conditions. Usually a closed barrier
Secondary - The barrier that performs well pressure control function in the event that the
primary barrier fails. Usually a closable barrier.
Tertiary - The barrier that performs well pressure control function in the event that the
primary and secondary barriers fail
The Primary barrier for slickline is the stuffing box or for braided line, the grease head. The
equivalent device for Coiled Tubing and Snubbing operations is the Stripper packer, Stripper
rubber or Stripper rams.
The Secondary barrier for Wireline is the wireline BOP, for Coiled Tubing the tubing rams
(pipe rams) and for Snubbing the Safety rams (pipe rams)
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The Tertiary barrier for all three services is a cutter valve, usually a shear seal (safety head)
which is normally mounted immediately above the Xmas tree. This type of barrier would be
used only in a real emergency situation.
Types of Mechanical Barriers:
CLOSED BARRIERS
 Stuffing boxes
 Strippers
 Grease Heads
 Plugs
CLOSABLE BARRIERS
 BOP's
 Shear Seal/BOP valves
 Annular Preventers
 Xmas Tree Gate Valves
 Sub-Surface Safety Valves
In some areas, Sub-Surface Safety Valves are not classified as barriers since API specifications
allow an acceptable leak rate for safety valves. Sub-¬Surface Safety Valves may however be
classified as barriers if they are leak tight.
17.4 PRINCIPLE OF PRIMARY & SECONDARY WELL BARRIER ENVELOPES
Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
While testing a mechanical barrier (positive plug) in a well, it will mainly be exposed to
differential pressure when one bleeds off pressure on the topside of the plug. There are many
ways of performing a test and it is important to know where information about the correct
procedure can be found.
In many cases it will be internal test procedures or the operator company’s procedures that
apply. Often the applicable procedure will be put in as a part of the well program or referred
to in the operational manual, API, NORSOK or the equipment suppliers’ recommendations.
The procedures will be built on experience, manufacturer recommendations, and
requirements from the authorities.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
17.5 BARRIER REQUIREMENT
All wells should be secured with a minimum of two barriers that

must be tested, whether the well is live or dead. So, what then
do we understand by the word barrier? Any mechanical or fluid
device that prevents the flow of pressure or fluids
On a drawing of a cross section of a well, we can draw a line from

the bottom of the well up to the surface and down again on the
other side. We call this a barrier envelope. Such an envelope is
composed of many barrier elements, and we must differentiate
between the envelope and the elements.
If we put a plug in the well, it is a barrier element that is part of a

barrier envelope. The barriers are to be independent of each
other. This means that we should be able to draw two separate
lines outside each other on the well drawing.
That which is active against the well pressure is the primary

barrier. For example, in wireline the lubricator and stuffing box
are the primary barrier. If this leaks, the secondary barrier
activates, which will be the BOP closing around the wire. If the
secondary barrier fails, the tertiary barrier is activated, which is
some form of a cut-and-seal ram.
IWCF defines everything that cuts and seals as a tertiary barrier.

It can be a rigged up a manual shear ram, a hydraulic shear ram
in the BOP, or a main valve in the Xmas tree if it is designed for cutting wire.
In any case, the valves must be individually tested and approved before they are accepted as
barriers.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
18.0 WD – RISK MANAGEMENT
Principles of Risk Management WD01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
 Are generally a way to express such a risk is by combining the probability of an event
with its consequences.
 Barriers are introduced as a means of risk management, by reducing the probability

or severity of an event.
 Defined as measures designed/implemented to reduce the probability of triggering a

pre-defined hazard and/or to reduce the consequence of a pre-defined hazardous
event.
For example a well to kick, the primary barrier is the preventive barrier while the secondary
barrier is the mitigating barrier.
18.1 PRINCIPLES OF RISK MANAGEMENT
 Create value – resources expended to mitigate risk should be less than the
consequence of inaction, or the gain should exceed the pain
 Be an integral part of organizational processes
 Be part of decision making process
 Explicitly address uncertainty and assumptions
 Be a systematic and structured process
 Be based on the best available information
 Be flexible
 Take human factors into account
 Be transparent and inclusive
 Be dynamic, iterative and responsive to change
 Be capable of continual improvement and enhancement
 Be continually or periodically re-assessed
18.2 METHOD
For the most part, these methods consist of the following elements, performed, more or less,
in the following order.
Identify, characterize threats
Assess the vulnerability of critical assets to specific threats
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Determine the risk (i.e. the expected likelihood and consequences of specific types of attacks
on specific assets)
Identify ways to reduce those risks
Prioritize risk reduction measures based on a strategy
Management of Change WD01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
An Examiner will be responsible for verifying that the program execution follows the well
design/plan in regard to critical well control issues and ensures compliance with the reporting
as it relates to those requirements; ensuring all critical changes as they relate to well control
issues are managed thru appropriate risk assessment and management of change (MOC)
procedures
To ensure that any deviations from approved procedures or processes used by the company
are:
 Documented
 Managed
 Authorized
The impact of risks to people and the environment are assessed and mitigated prior to the
deviations being implemented.
Where there is a belief a change may introduce new hazards or increase risk, the procedure
shall be implemented.
This procedure shall apply to all activities carried out by employees of the company and by its
Subcontractors. It shall apply to all health, safety and environmental risk it shall cover all
activities including field operations, base operations and maintenance.
Shall apply across all activities including:
 Situation or client changes to the work scope in the field, including formal variation
orders.
 Changes impacting testing activities wherever these are carried out.
 Change which occurs as a result of events effecting routine operational, maintenance

and/or workshop fabrication activities.
Major change requires the following:
 All work affected by the change must be stopped
 Complete the company documentation,
 Offshore documentation must also be signed by the company man.
 Risk Assessment done to take account of changes
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Management approval must be obtained before the work can resume
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
18.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
 All Personnel
 Supervisors
 Managers
 Personnel
 Stay alert and assess the impact of change and its potential for creating or increasing
risk or pass information about the change to a competent person who can make the
assessment.
 Act on the assessment and document and implement a revised work activity and risk
assessment.
PS - Before resuming work, communicate the changes to all persons potentially affected by
the changes.
Management of Change Procedures WD01.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Minor Change - If a change is minor it shall be dealt with at the worksite using relevant
company procedure and clearance to proceed will be based on a suitable assessment.
Major Change - If a change is major it shall be dealt with using the company MOC form. This
must be completed at the worksite and the content communicated to an appropriate
manager. If the MOC relates to offshore or onshore field based work for clients, the MOC
must be signed by the client. The risk assessment for the work shall be reviewed and
approved. The manager must give his approval before work can resume
Emergency Drills WD02.01 Level of Importance L3-5/L4-10
The following guidelines shall be followed for well control drills:
 Well control drills shall be initiated by the contractor or the Drilling Supervisor
and performed under the supervision of the Drilling Supervisor to ensure that the
crews are adequately trained and prepared to implement well control procedures
correctly.
 Well control drills shall only be conducted when they do not complicate ongoing
operations.
 A kick should be simulated by manipulation of a primary kick indicator such as the

tank level indicator or the flow line indicator.
 The drills described in the above section include the full sequence of shutting in a
well. The critical reaction time shall be measured up to the point when the well is
closed in.
 Trip drills shall only be conducted if the BHA is inside the casing shoe.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Out-of-hole drills may be conducted at any time when out of hole with no tools or
wire line through the BOP stack
18.4 ABANDONMENT DRILL
Abandonment drills must include the following:
 Each drill must include summoning of industrial personnel and crew to muster
stations with the general alarm, followed by drill announcements on the public
address or other communication system, and ensuring that all on board are made
aware of the order to abandon ship. Each should include the following:
o Reporting to stations and preparing for the duties described in the muster
list.
o Check that all personnel and crew are suitably dressed.
o Check that lifejackets or immersion suits are correctly donned.
o Lower at least one lifeboat after any necessary preparation for launching.
o Start and operate the lifeboat engine.
o Operate the davits used for launching the life rafts
18.5 FIRE DRILLS

Fire drills must, as far as practicable, be planned in such a way that due consideration is given
to regular practice in the various emergencies that may occur depending on the type of unit.
Each fire drill must include:
 Reporting to stations, and preparing for the duties described in the muster list for the
particular fire emergency being simulated;
 Start fire pumps and the use of two jets of water to determine that the system is in
proper working order;
 Check the fireman's outfits and other personal rescue equipment;
 Check the relevant communication equipment;
 Check the operation of watertight doors, fire doors, and fire dampers and main inlets
and outlets of ventilation systems in the drill area;
 Check the necessary arrangements for subsequent abandonment of the unit and
simulated operation of remote controls for stopping ventilation and fuel supplies to
machinery spaces.
 The equipment used during drills must immediately be brought back to its fully
operational condition, and any faults and defects discovered during the drills must be
remedied as soon as possible
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
18.6 REPORTING
The Drill is to be documented in the daily report. Under remarks the following shall be
recorded:
 Type of drill.
 Time of drill.
 Reaction time in seconds from the moment the kick is simulated until the well is
closed in.
The designated crew member is a member of the drill crew who is present on the drill floor at
the time of a BOP drill or well control situation. All drill crew members must be capable and
able to react correctly to the drill or real well control situation.
The total time taken for the drill. The time taken should be less than a pre-determined
benchmark. If not, the drill shall be repeated.
The following shall be recorded on the DDR:
 The reaction time from the moment the kick is simulated until the designated crew
member is ready to start the closing procedure.
 The total time it takes to complete the entire drill.
 Time drill was held (to determine which crew performed the drill).
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
19.0 WG – CIRCULATING SYSTEM
Circulating System Purpose WG01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Pump pressure is produced by the pump to move the required volume of mud/fluids from the
pump through the drill-string, the bit and up the annulus to the surface.
All the pressure produced by the pump is expended in this process, overcoming friction losses
between the mud and whatever it is in contact with.
The pump should be capable of pumping the surface lines and a maximum anticipated SIWHP
plus a margin for friction.
Pumping Equipment contains the following items:
 Pump
o Rating
o Barrel/stroke
o Relief valve setting
 Surface Pump Lines
 Choke Manifold
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Isolation Valves
 Pressure Gauge
 Fluid Disposal System
 Mixing Tanks
 Reserve Tanks
 Fluid
 Chemicals
o Corrosion Inhibitor
o Oxygen Scavenger
o Biocide
Bottom Hole Pressure increases when the pump is running. Pump pressure, which is also
referred to as system pressure loss, is the sum total of all the pressure losses from the well
surface equipment, the drill pipe, the drill collar, the drill bit, and annular friction losses
around the drill collar and drill pipe. It measures the system pressure loss at the start of the
System Pressure Losses
Surface Lines = 25 psi
PUMP PRESSURE
14 16 18
12 20
10 PSI X I00 22
8 24
6 26
4 28
2 0 30
40 SPM
TOTAL PUMPING PRESSURE = 25 psi
System Pressure Losses System Pressure Losses
Drill Pipe = 100 psi Drill Collars = 125 psi
PUMP PRESSURE PUMP PRESSURE
14 16 18 14 16 18
12 20 12 20
10 PSI X I00 22 10 PSI X I00 22
8 24 8 24
6 6 26
26
4 4 28
28 2
2 0 30 0 30
40 SPM 40 SPM
TOTAL PUMPING PRESSURE = 125 psi TOTAL PUMPING PRESSURE = 250 psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
circulating system and measures the total friction pressure.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
System Pressure Losses Changes in Pump Speed PUMP PRESSURE
14 16 18 14 16 18
12 20 12 20
10 10 PSI X I00 22
Drill Bit = 325 psi

PSI X I00 22
8 24 8 24
6 26 6 26
4 28 4 28
2 0 30 2 0 30
40 SPM
PUMP PRESSURE
Calculate a change in pump speed
14 16 18
12 20
10 PSI X I00 22
8
6
24
Current Pressure x [New SPM / Old SPM]2
26
4 28
2 0 30
650 psi x (80 ÷ 40) ² = 2600psi

40 SPM
TOTAL PUMPING PRESSURE = 575 psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
20.0 WP – TESTING
Inflow Testing WP01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
After setting a barrier in the well needs to be tested preferably in the direction of the flow by
means of an “Inflow test” or negative test. They are generally carried out to verify that there
is no communication with the formation through the casing, a liner lap or past a cement plug
(bridge plug) and other pressure control devices set in the well, either during production or
work-overs.
Most of the applications are in connection with testing or squeezed off perforations and
casing leaks, testing liner-laps, Xmas trees, DHSV, cement plugs and bridge plugs, wireline
plugs or individual well barrier elements.
An inflow test is performed by reducing the hydrostatic head above the item to be tested by
circulating to a lighter fluid or by bleeding pressure above the barrier in question then
monitoring for any pressure build up.
Interpreting Inflow Test Results WP01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The “Horner Plot” method should be used for interpreting inflow tests to confirm the
integrity of liner laps for over pressured gas wells.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Inflow Test Procedures WP01.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Direction of flow – Confirmed - OK
Alternative
 Pressure Test
 Lower than maximum load
 Opposite direction to flow
 Differential volume
Other - Physical Test
 Slack off weight
 Mud density check.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
21.0 WH – WELL INTEGRITY
Integrity Testing WH01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
A mechanical barrier must always be tested from below by means of an inflow test before it
can be accepted. The way this is done varies depending on which component is being tested
and in which situation the need for testing arises. One thing in common for all the test
methods is that a predefined pressure difference must be created in such a way that it can be
read off and documented on a pressure recorder.
Integrity Testing Procedures WH01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
In some cases, we will pump fluid into the well and then increase the pressure on one side in
order to observe a drop in pressure. In other cases we will bleed off pressure on one side and
then observe a pressure increase. In all cases we act according to the described procedures
and leak criteria.
21.1 SAFETY VALVE LEAK TESTING
 Leak tests are performed immediately after Sub-Surface Safety Valves are installed.
 A typical leak test involves closing the production, kill and swab valves on the Xmas
tree and bleeding off the control line pressure to the Sub Surface Safety Valve.
 Tubing pressure is bled off slowly above the valve to zero for a tubing retrievable
valve and in 100psi. (6.9bar) stages for a wireline retrievable valve.
 For hydrostatic on body, the test pressure shall be determined by the rated working
pressure of the equipment. Refer to API Spec. or manufacture’s procedure for details
of testing.
 During testing, check visible signs for leakage and for multiple bore component, each
bore shall be tested individually.
21.2 TREE AND WELLHEADS
 Bi-directional valves shall have hydrostatic seat test pressure equal to the rated
working pressure applied to each side of the gate with the other side open to
atmosphere.
 For uni-directional, valves shall have pressure applied in the direction indicated on the
body, except for check valve which will be tested on the down-stream side.
 If function tests under full differential pressure are required, check for actual pressure
maintained
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
21.3 MECHANICAL BARRIERS
Must be tested, preferably from the direction of flow. If an inflow test cannot be carried out it
can be tested from above by using positive pressure.
 Tests on closed type barriers should be leak tight. The leakage rate on closable
barriers such as Xmas tree valves etc. should be the API leakage criteria: 400cc/min or
900scf/hr with the exception of sub-surface safety valves used in well plugging (refer
to note above in list of closable barriers).
 Each operator should develop procedures for testing Xmas tree and sub-surface
safety valves to meet this criterion.
21.4 SLIDING SIDE DOOR

A communication device such as a Sliding side door is tested when it has been moved to the
closed position. Because the well bore is open to the formation the only feasible solution is to
apply a small amount of pressure to the annulus to prove the backside of the SSD is holding
pressure.
21.5 FORMATION INTEGRITY TESTS

To determine the fracture pressure of a formation, a leak-off test (LOT) or a formation
integrity test (FIT) may be performed with a solids carrying fluid or mud. Where solids free
workover fluids are used, a formation integrity test cannot be conducted and in these cases
the formation is protected solely by a MAASP, which is set at a safe percentage of the original
casing pressure rating.(i.e 80% of casing burst pressure)
LOTs and FITs determine if the cement seal between the casing and the formation is
adequate and the maximum pressure or fluid weight that the formation(s) can withstand
without fracturing. As the leak-off test actually causes a fracture to determine the fracture
gradient, it is rarely used in well servicing operations and the FIT is adopted.
Whichever is to be performed, it must be ensured that the well is fully circulated to the
correct weight workover fluid and the pump deliverability is sufficient.
21.6 LEAK OFF TESTS

The test is performed by applying incremental pressures from the surface to the closed
wellbore/casing system until it can be seen that fluid is being injected into the formation.
Leak-off tests should normally be taken to this leak-off pressure unless it exceeds the
pressure to which the casing was tested.
A typical procedure is as follows:
 Before starting, gauges should be checked for accuracy. The upper pressure limit
should be determined.
 The casing should be pressure tested before well operations commence.
 Circulate and condition the mud, check mud density in and out.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Close BOPs.
 With the well closed in, the pump is used to pump a small volume at a time into the
well typically a 1/4 or 1/2bbl per min. Monitor the pressure build up and accurately
record the volume of mud pumped. Plot pressure versus volume of mud pumped.
 Stop the pump when any deviation from linearity is noticed between pump pressure
and volume pumped.
 Bleed off the pressure and establish the amounts of mud, if any lost to the formation.
Examples of leak-off test plot interpretation
In non-consolidated or highly permeable formations fluid can be lost at very low pressures. In
this case the pressure will fall once the pump has been stopped and a plot such as that shown
will be obtained as shown typical plots for consolidated permeable and consolidated
impermeable formations respectively.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Idealised Leak-Off Test Curves
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
21.7 FORMATION INTEGRITY TEST
A FIT can be performed when it is not acceptable to fracture a formation. In a FIT, fluid is
pumped into the shut in well until a predetermined pressure is reached that is determined to
be below the pressure to break down the formation. This value used is usually obtained by
accessing information from well’s completion report and nearby well data.
The procedure is:
 Before starting, gauges should be checked for accuracy.
 The casing should be pressure tested before well operations commence.
 Circulate and condition the mud, check mud density in and out.
 Close BOPs.
 With the well closed in, the pump is used to incrementally raise the pressure in the
well to the test pressure and monitor the pressure to ensure that there is no leak off.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
22.0 WI – INFLUX CHARACTERISTICS & BEHAVIOUR
Boyles Law WI01-01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Boyle's Law, a principle that describes the relationship between the pressure and volume of a
gas. According to this law, the pressure exerted by a gas held at a constant temperature
varies inversely with the volume of the gas. For example, if the volume is halved, the pressure
is doubled; and if the volume is doubled, the pressure is halved. The reason for this effect is
that a gas is made up of loosely spaced molecules moving at random. If a gas is compressed
in a container, these molecules are pushed together; thus, the gas occupies less volume. The
molecules, having less space in which to move, hit the walls of the container more frequently
and thus exert an increased pressure
Gas Behaviour WI01.03 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.10
Gas kicks that dissolve in mud can be difficult to detect, especially if the kick is relatively
small. Since they are absorbed by the mud, little or no pit gain occurs. Also, no measurable
increase in the flow rate of the mud being pumped out of the well occurs.
Later, however, as the dissolved gas in the mud nears the surface, it begins evolving from the
mud and rapidly expands. This rapid expansion suddenly increases the return flow rate and
can create a large pit gain if the well is not rapidly shut in.
Also, when a gas kick dissolves in the mud, and Crew members do detect it, they may believe
that the well has taken a saltwater kick: the pit gain may be relatively small and the difference
between the shut-in Drill pipe pressure and the shut-in casing pressure may be small. When
dissolved gases come out of solution, however, they expand rapidly.
As a result, the shut-in casing pressure rises quickly. Personnel should be aware of the
problem and keep close surveillance on the casing pressure. Because gases can dissolve in
mud, most operators and contractors prefer to consider all kicks as gas kicks and react
appropriate.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Influx
Pressure Changes WI01.02 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
Conclusion
If the well is shut in and the gas influx is allowed to migrate, gas pressure will remain
constant; however, bottom-hole pressure and casing pressure will increase. If you let casing
pressure (surface pressure) increase too much, you can break formation or damage surface
equipment.
Influxes & Their Characteristics WI01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The gas kick is highly compressible, the space the gas occupies will depend on the pressure
and temperature.
Ignoring the temperature and other effects, reducing the pressure on the gas will allow it to
expand occupying more space.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
If the pressure is increased then the volume will decrease.
If the pressure is maintained then the volume will remain unchanged
Behaviour of Influx Fluids WI01.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Gas in the horizontal section is unlikely to migrate.
The undulations (unevenness) of the horizontal section may allow gas pockets to become
trapped during kill operations. Therefore higher flow rates at a later stage may move these
pockets along the hole with the potential for the loss of hydrostatic pressure due to gas
expansion, once the influx moves out of the horizontal section.
As soon as gas is circulated out of the horizontal section, it will then affect bottom-hole
pressure, but not necessarily the pit volume until it moves closer to surface. Gas migration
may be rapid in the high angle sections of a hole due to the influx moving up the “High Side”.
Wells that are deviated at or close to surface may encounter severe problems with gas
migration.
Brine fluid circulated up the annulus in high angle wells will tend to flow on the high side.
Bottoms up may occur sooner than expected, due to the reduced flow path.
During well control operations, as a gas influx, is circulated from the horizontal section, into
the deviated section, it will cause the casing pressure to increase without any corresponding
increase in pit level.
Running into swabbed fluids in the horizontal section may cause the influx fluid to move
into the deviated well section therefore reducing bottom hole pressure.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Horizontal Gas Kick WI01-04 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.10
The gas kick volume will increase when the kick is circulated out of the horizontal section
because the reduction in hydrostatic pressure results in expanding of gas as per Boyle’s gas
law (see below).
Boyle’s Law
P1 x V1 = P2 x V2
The pressure trend for a gas influx

in an open well will increase the
bubble size but will reduce the
pressure. If the bubble doubles the
pressure will half.
22.1 SHUT IN DRILL PIPE PRESSURE AND SHUT IN CASING PRESSURE IN

HORIZONTAL WELLS
In horizontal wells, kicks can come into the well and

you will see pit gain but when the well is shut in you
will not see any difference between shut in casing
pressure and shut in drill pipe pressure. This situation
happens because the kick in the horizontal section
does not have the vertical height
Gauge reading zero when gas is in the horizontal section
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
You will not see any drastic pit gain when the gas kick is still in
the horizontal zone but the pit gain will significantly increase
once it starts going into the deviated / vertical section of the
well.
Gauge readings when the gas enters the vertical section
Basic Gas Volumes WI01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Accumulator is a unit used to hydraulically operate Rams BOP, Annular BOP, HCR and some
hydraulic equipment. There are several of high pressure cylinders that store gas (in bladders)
and hydraulic fluid or water under pressure for hydraulic activated systems. The primary
purpose of this unit is to supply hydraulic power to the BOP stack in order to close/open the
BOP stack for both normal operational and emergency situation. Stored hydraulic in the
system can provide hydraulic power to close BOP’s in well control operation, therefore, kick
volume will be minimized. Accumulators should have sufficient volume to close/open/close all
preventers and accumulator pressure must be
maintained all time.
Use following information as guideline for

calculation:
Volume per bottle = 10 gal
Pre-charge pressure = 1000 psi
Operating pressure = 3000 psi
Minimum system pressure = 1200 psi
Pressure gradient of hydraulic fluid = 0.445 psi/ft
22.2 FOR SURFACE APPLICATION
Step 1 - Determine hydraulic fluid required to increase pressure from pre-charge pressure to
minimum:
Boyle’s Law for ideal gas: P1 V1 = P2 V2
P1 V1 = P2 V2
1000 psi x 10 gal = 1200 psi x V2
10,000 ÷ 1200 = V2
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
V2 = 8.3 gal
It means that N2 will be compressed from 10 gal to 8.3 gal in order to reach minimum
operating pressure. Therefore, 1.7 gal (10.0 – 8.3 = 1.7 gal) of hydraulic fluid is used for
compressing to minimum system pressure.
Step 2 - Determine hydraulic fluid required increasing pressure from pre-charge to operating
pressure:
P1 V1 = P2 V2
1000 psi x 10 gals = 3000 psi x V2
10,000 ÷3000 = V2
V2= 3.3 gal
It means that N2 will be compressed from 10 gal to 3.3 gal. Therefore, 6.7 gal (10.0 – 3.3 = 6.7
gal) of hydraulic fluid is used for compressing to operating pressure.
Step 3 - Determine usable fluid volume per bottle:
Usable volume per bottle = Hydraulic used to compress fluid to operating pressure – hydraulic
volume used to compress fluid to minimum pressure
Usable volume per bottle = 6.7 – 1.7
Usable volume per bottle = 5.0 gallons
G AS VO LU M E CH AN G ES
0 ps i 200 psi 4 00 psi
1 0 g a ls g a s
1 0 0 psi 5 g a ls g a s .
200 psi 2 .5 g a ls g a s . 4 0 0 p s i
B o y l e ’s G a s L a w i s ; P 1 x V1 = P 2 x V 2
10 0 x 1 0 20 0 x 5 4 0 0 x 2 .5
= 10 0 0 = 10 00 = 10 00
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
GA S V O L U ME C H A N GE S
0psi 200 psi 400p si
1 0 g a ls
100 psi 5 g a ls 2 5. g a ls ,
200p si 400psi
V 2 = P1 x V1
P 2
P1 V1 P1 V1 P1 V 1
V 2 = 100 x 10 V 2 = 100 x 10 V 2 = 100 x 10
2 80 2 00 4 00
P 2 P2 P2
= 3. 57 ga l = 5 gal = 2. 5 gal
G AS V O LU M E C H AN G E S
1200 psi 1350 psi
1 .6 7 g a ls 2 .6 g a ls
H y d . flu id H y d . flu id
1 0 g a ls g a s
1000 psi 8 .3 3 g a ls g a s 7 .4 g a ls g a s
1200 psi 1350 psi
V 2 = P 1 x V 1
P 2
P 1 V 1 P 1 V 1 P 1 V 1
V 2 = 1000 x 10 V 2 = 1000 x 10 V 2 = 1000 x 10
1500 1200 1350
P 2 P 2 P 2
= 6 .6 6 g a l = 8 .3 3 g a l = 7 .4 g a l
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
23.0 WJ – SHUT IN PROCEDURES
General Shut in Procedure WJ01.01 Level of Importance L3-10/L4-10
Normal opening and closing of the Xmas tree when running in or pulling out of the hole.
Before running into the well, the rig up is tested according to the current procedures to a
minimum of CITHP.
Running In
Check that the lower master valve (Manual Master Valve - MMV) is open. Count the number
of turns and report if the number deviates from the well records. Open the upper master
valve (Hydraulic Master Valve - HMV). This is usually a “normally closed” or “fail safe close”
type valve and must therefore be kept open with the help of hydraulic pressure.
Well pressure can now be read off the gauge in the Xmas tree’s body and pressure in the
lubricator can be equalised to well pressure. The swab valve, which is a manual valve, can now
be opened. The revolutions are to be counted and reported so that they can be compared the
next time the valve is closed. The xmas tree is now opened up and well intervention
equipment is ready to be run into the well.
Pulling Out
When the equipment is pulled out of the well after the task, the Xmas tree shall be shut in
again. This takes place more or less in the opposite direction of what is described above:
 Pull the equipment out of the hole and up into the lubricator in accordance to the
current procedures. Close the swab valve carefully while counting the number of
turns. If too few turns are registered, this means that there is an obstruction in the
valve. Open the valve and attempt to pull farther out of the hole before trying to
close the valve again.
 When the swab valve is closed with the correct number of turns, it can be tested. The
upper master valve (HMV) can now be closed. Check that it is completely closed with
the help of the indicator. When the master valve is closed, it is to be tested. The
most common way to do this is by opening the swab valve with a few rotations and
then bleeding off the pressure into the drain.
 When the master valve is tested, the swab valve is closed once more. At this point we
can define ourselves as being out of hole; the lubricator can be opened and tools can
be changed/replaced.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Valve Tree
Procedure - Tree Shut In WJ02.01 Level of Importance L3-10/L4-10
When equipment is run into the well it is no longer possible to close the Xmas tree in the usual
way since there is now a wire-line or pipe through the valves. If the need arises to close and
secure the well in this situation, one must resort to shutting in the rigged up BOP around the
wireline or pipe.
When activating the BOP, this will normally take place with the help of hydraulics, either by
activating an accumulator, or by using the air-driven pumps. This is controlled form the
BOP’s control panel or from the panel on the pump unit themselves. When the BOP is
hydraulically closed, the manual stem should always be screwed in to secure that the BOP is
and stays closed. If possible, the BOP is now tested in the current situation, and it cannot be
disconnected or worked on before the testing is completed.
Testing consists of bleeding off pressure on the upside of the BOP and inflow testing the
valve. Leakage criteria and the length of the test can vary from operator to operator.
Ensure that the applicable procedures are available before running into hole. In some cases it
will not be enough to secure the well in the described manner. It may then be necessary to
cut the wireline or pipe so that it is possible to shut in the Xmas tree and possibly the
subsurface safety valve.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
In such instances it is often the case that you should pull out of hole enough that the pipe or
wireline falls below the valve after cutting. Emergency procedures for this will vary from
operator to operator, but they have common features. Make sure that you know the
procedure and have it available before running in the hole.
Procedure – Shut In Well WJ02-02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
How to verify that the well has been shut in and explain the correct action.
Once the well is shut-in, check the following:
 That shut-in pressures are being monitored
 That the pit gain is recorded
 That the preventer is making the proper seal
 Check the flow line for possible leaks
 The choke manifold is lined up and check for leaks
 Close if necessary the valve upstream of the active choke
Procedure – Pressure Increases WJ02-03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
When a well has been shut in after years of productivity, it will become necessary to monitor
the SITHP for a period of time. It is not unusual to have small bubbles of gas in the well, which
will require time to migrate to the surface, therefore it is imperative to monitor the gauge on
the tree cap. When the pressure stops building it will
be safe to proceed with the work over as per
company procedures.
Common causes of Increase shut-in tubing head

pressure are:
 Gas Migration
 Thermal Expansion
 Gas Build up
Procedures - Valve Opening Precautions WJ02.05 Level of Information L3.10/L4.1
Most valves are constructed to be opened and closed under pressure, but not with pressure
on only one side. This means that one usually can close a valve without significant problems,
but that one must always ensure that there are no mechanical objects in the flow path of the
valve that is to be closed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
It is standard practice to count the turns a manual valve has in order to verify whether it is
entirely opened or closed. On hydraulic valves there is usually an indicator that shows
whether the valve is fully opened or closed.
If you want to open a valve, you have to ensure

that the pressure is first equalized, so that no
damage occurs to the valve or equipment
downstream of the valve. On a manual valve
there is danger for damage on the stem while on
hydraulic valves there is greater danger for
damage on the gate and seat.
The damage that can be caused by pressure

waves downstream of the valve are primarily
related to The damage that can be caused by
pressure waves downstream of the valve are
primarily related to situations where there is for
example well intervention equipment in the
riser. A pressure shock will potentially damage
the equipment in the riser or the tool-string rope
socket. It may also have equipment damage and delays.
Opening:
Differential surges of pressure possibly kinking the wire at the rope socket
Causing damage to the stem
Closing:
Closing the valves on the tool-string
Possibility of cutting the wire
Counting the turns on the swab valve
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
24.0 WJ – INTERPRETATION
Well Shut In Pressures WJ04-01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
When the well has to be shut in after a period of flow or production, it is advisable to observe
the well head pressure gauge to ensure that the wellhead pressures can be monitored. The
procedure is quite simple,
Close the choke followed by the Flow wing valve.
Ensure that the tree cap pressure gauge is not isolated.
Pressure gauges must the correct diameter and pressure rating
Pressure gauges must also be in calibration and within the test certification.
Monitor wellhead pressure and note any build up in pressure. Gas percolation
When pressure stops building up wait a suitable length of time to ensure no further build up.
Differences between SICP/SIDP WJ04.02

The reasons for possible differences between the

shut in drill pipe pressure and casing shut in pressure
could be due to one of the following:
 Blockages in the annulus
 Inaccuracy of the pressure gauges
 Well deviation
 Well bore fluids
 A kick has occurred
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
25.0 WJ – OBSERVATIONS
Limitations of Pressure Gauges WJ05.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Broken gauges lead to bad decisions, and bad decisions lead to process downtime or
accidents. The frustrating part is that most of these expensive and potentially dangerous
issues could be relatively easily prevented.
When there are hundreds or even thousands of gauges in a large offshore facility, some
gauges are going to be damaged or malfunction in a given year no matter the technical
proficiency of the maintenance team. It's simply a matter of statistics. Many times, gauge
failure can be attributed to misapplication, but all too often, extreme or stressful conditions
may cause gauges to fail.
Common reasons for gauge failure and recommended solutions to help avoid the headaches
of frequent replacement and risks of inaccurate readings, which can lead to a catastrophic
disaster.
25.1 TEMPERATURE
Extremely high or low temperatures can have a negative impact

on gauges and other instrumentation. Gauges not designed for
these extreme operating conditions can malfunction in a
relatively short period of time. Some gauges are designed for
extreme temperature conditions and will provide reliable
information for the lifetime of the instrument.
Gauges designed for use in extreme temperatures, are made

from special corrosion-resistant alloys and can be equipped with
cooling fins or a diaphragm seal to isolate the gauge from the hot
or cold media.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
25.2 MECHANICAL VIBRATION
Numerous studies have shown that vibration is the main cause

of pressure gauge failure in manufacturing facilities. Vibration
has a negative impact on gauge accuracy in two ways. First, it is
difficult to accurately read a pointer on a dial when a gauge is
vibrating. Second, incremental damage to the pointer
mechanism from vibration can eventually move a pointer off
zero, producing inaccurate readings.
Different types of gauges are built to withstand various types

and levels of vibrations, and it is critical to use an appropriate,
quality gauge for every application. Installing a pressure gauge
with low vibration resistance in a high-vibration area is a recipe for trouble. Not only will it
have a dramatically shortened lifetime, the vibration might even crack the Bourdon tube and
release process media. High quality liquid-filled gauges, which dampen vibrations and
minimize stress on internal components, are ideal for high-vibration applications.
25.3 OVERPRESSURE
Process media is normally transported through a piping system

at relatively high pressure, and gauges appropriate for that
pressure are installed for process monitoring. However, when
workers switch pumps on or off, or open or close valves, a surge
of media flows through the pipe and impacts the pressure
gauge, causing a spike which can damage the gauge. The
solution to overpressure problems is to use reliable gauges with
tolerances several times higher than the standard flow pressure
or to install overpressure protectors on gauges in areas where overpressure spikes tend to
occur.
25.4 PULSATION
Pulsation can be defined as regularly occurring overpressure

spikes. When media rapidly cycles through the gauge, the
pressure spikes intermittently. The most common solution for
pulsation involve installing a socket restrictor or a pressure
snubber, which slows down the media by reducing the size of
the intake orifice and minimizes pressure fluctuations.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
25.5 CORROSION
Many process media are corrosive, and any gauges used in

these process streams must have internal parts that are
resistant to corrosion. Bourdon tubes can corrode and release
dangerous process fluid if a gauge made of non-corrosion-
resistant material is used or if a gauge made of an appropriate
material is used beyond its lifetime. Another solution is to use a
diaphragm seal made of a corrosion-resistant alloy.
25.6 CLOGGING
Clogging can be a serious problem for gauges, especially with

process media that are subject to congealing or crystallization.
Gauges that become clogged often "freeze up," creating a
dangerous situation of indicating no pressure when in fact the
system is under tremendous pressure. The best solution for
most clogging problems is to use a diaphragm seal equipped
with flushing ports to constantly flush the diaphragm surface.
25.7 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A well is initially drilled and

completed under the control
of the drilling and
completions department
operating under the request
of the asset. Once the well is
completed, control is
transferred to the asset's
production team, who will
operate the well as appropriate for their purposes. Should any issues of well integrity or any
requirement for well work arise, the asset will refer the issue to the well services. During
interventions, control of affected well is handed over from production to the well services
crew at the well site, a practical action involving transferring control lines from the production
control panel to the well services control panel.
 During a handover it is the responsibility of the signatory to ensure the full status of
the well/equipment are as per the hand over report. (WSS)
 During an intervention operation it is the responsibility of the equipment operator to

maintain well control
 In the event of an emergency it is the nominated person responsibility to shut the

well in
 (Control Panel)
 Production is responsible for the well until it is handed over to Well Services
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
25.8 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Every well is completed with equipment that is adjusted to the particular reservoir pressure
and expected maximum shut-in pressure on the Xmas tree. There are many different
pressure classes and qualities of pipe and connections, in addition to dimensions and thread
types. When it comes to the actual valve arrangement on the top we usually find fewer
choices, but there are standard pressure classes available. Examples of these are 5000 psi,
10000 psi and 15000 psi.
The equipment that is to be rigged up on the Xmas tree must always have at least the same
pressure class as the Xmas tree. It must naturally also have the same dimensions and
connection types as the Xmas tree, or a crossover must be used. If there are special
situations, such as H2S or other damaging fluids in the well, the material in the well
intervention equipment must tolerate it. The equipment must have a gate length and
dimensions that are sufficient for the operation in question, and correct equipment in relation
to the chosen tubular specification. If equipment with a lesser temperature or pressure
specification were accidentally used the tree would be de-rated to the lowest equivalent
piece of equipment.
API defines equipment as follows:
Dimension on BOP: Inner diameter ID
Pressure class; working M for 1000, eg. 5M = 5000 psi
Annular preventer: A
Ram preventer: R ( Rd double, Rt triple, Rq quadruple)
Spool: S
Hydraulic connector: C
Flanges: Inner diameter (nominal)

A 7”, 10M ram preventer means a single ram preventer with 7 1/16” inner diameter and
a working pressure of 10.000 psi.
7” is nominal diameter in well service. In drilling it is always given as an exact
diameter. Pipe for use in a well is always denoted with the outer diameter and weight
class.
7” is nominal diameter in well service. In drilling it is always given as an exact diameter. Pipe
for use in a well is always denoted with the outer diameter and weight class.
For example. 5”, 18 #/ft tubing is tubing with OD=5” and steel weight of 18 lbs. per foot. In
other words, the weight class indirectly gives the inner diameter. If equipment with a lesser
temperature or specification
25.9 REASONS FOR WELL INTERVENTIONS
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Many servicing operations can be conducted by rig workovers, however live well intervention
is preferred since killing a well risks fluid invasion of the formation, thereby causing potential
formation damage.
The primary objective of well intervention operations is the management of wells to provide
optimum well production. This is achieved by conducting live well remedial operations,
obtaining downhole reservoir data or preparation of the well for a dead well workover (if live
well servicing cannot solve a problem). Occasionally, gathering of downhole reservoir data is
a secondary objective when an intervention is planned for other reasons.
This data is usually to provide well information on lateral and vertical movement, current
location of oil, water and gas and identifying the producing zones. There are many reasons
for remedial live well intervention well operations, most notably to:
 Remove obstructions to flow such as tubing blockage with sand, wax or asphalt.
 Eliminate excessive water or gas production.
 Repair mechanical failure.
 Improve production through well stimulation, re-completions or multiple

completions on low productivity wells.
 Enhance production by conducting well stimulation such as hydraulic fractures on

high productivity wells.
 Increase production by bringing other additional potentially productive zones on

stream.
Before a well is entered, a complete analysis must be made of the current well status, the
reasons for work carefully established, the associated risks identified and appropriate
contingency measures planned in the event of operational failure.
All oil and gas wells will encounter some impairment to production during their producing life
and well service operations need to be planned, either, to rectify or improve the conditions
within the wellbore. Therefore, common servicing operations such as cleaning out fill, re-
perforating, chemical treating, acidizing, fracturing or a combination of these techniques are
routinely carried out to enhance production.
25.10 EXCESSIVE WATER OR GAS PRODUCTION
As an oil zone is depleted, the gas/oil or water/oil interfaces will move vertically in the
formation. This may result in increasing undesired water or gas production. Excessive gas
production leads to a premature decrease in reservoir pressure, hence reducing the energy
available to move the oil into the well bore and ultimately reducing the quantity of gas
necessary to lift the oil to surface.
When excessive water is produced, it leads to reduced oil production due to the increased
hydrostatic head in the tubing acting against the formation pressure, increased risk of
corrosion and production problems in handling and disposing of the water. It may also cause
sand production that can lead to erosion of completion and production equipment. These
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
problems can be controlled by the appropriate well intervention measures, as described

below.
25.11 CONTROL OF WATER PRODUCTION
There are different reasons for water problems:
Fingering of water in stratified or layered reservoirs where the water production is essentially
from one zone.
Advancing water level due to oil depletion.
Water coning in reservoirs where there is appreciable vertical permeability
When a rock becomes saturated with water, the relatively permeability to water increases in
regard to that of the other fluids. This leads to a self- aggravating cycle of increasing water
flow.
Prior to running or planning operations for water control, production logs must be run to
identify the zones from which water is being produced. Once identified, this can usually be
controlled by a number of different methods depending on the specific well design and well
conditions:
 Sand placement in the sump
 Setting a through tubing bridge plug
 Cement squeezing
 Chemical treatment to produce a gel block.
Sand placement in the sump may solve the problem in circumstances where there is sufficient
height of sand and the vertical permeability of the column of sand is high and blocks water
flow.
Cement squeezes have probably been the commonest means of plugging off water
producing zones in the past utilising workover methods requiring the well to be killed, the
completion to be pulled before cementing and re- completing.
25.12 CONTROL OF GAS PRODUCTION
The most common reason for excessive gas production is the growth of the gas cap as oil is
produced. The gas/oil contact will gradually move downward causing an increase in the
production of gas.
The common method of remedying excessive gas coning is to squeeze the gas producing
zone and deepen the well by re-perforating (converse to water coning). An alternative is to
conduct a workover where the well is plugged back and side-tracked with the new hole drilled
horizontally through the lower part of the reservoir avoiding the gas cap in a layer
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
25.13 MECHANICAL FAILURE
Well service operations to repair mechanical completion failures are still relatively common in
old wells, however in new wells less servicing is required due to the increasing reliability of
modern completion equipment.
In the past, one of the most common reasons for working over a well was to replace a
downhole safety valve that had failed. For this reason, engineers were inclined to install
wireline retrievable valves as they could easily be replaced using live well interventions by
wireline methods, hence avoiding the need to pull tubing. Nowadays, this is no longer the
case as the reliability of tubing retrievable valves has increased substantially and it is now the
most commonly used valve.
Probably the most common reason for remedial mechanical operations today is tubing failure
due to erosion or corrosion. Some completion failures can be repaired by wireline or CT
methods but, in some circumstances, a full workover programme to pull the tubing is
necessary. Typical failures are:
 Downhole safety valve mechanical failure or leak.
 Casing, packer or tubing leaks.
 Casing collapse.
 Tubing collapse.
 Cement failure.
 Gas lift failure or inefficiency.
 ESP or hydraulic pump failure.
 Recovery of a fish unable to be recovered by intervention methods.
A full workover programme usually entails the placement of an overbalanced fluid against the
formation unless it can be isolated using a plug, e.g. a Wireline plug in a permanent packer
tailpipe or setting a through tubing plug in the casing above the producing zone(s).ayered
reservoir, gas producing zones can also usually be effectively squeezed off with cement.
There are many reasons why a well may have low productivity, such as:
 Formation damage
 Low permeability
 Pressure depletion
 Liquid hold up in a gas well
 Gas slip in an oil well
 Sand or other fill or debris
 Excessive water or gas production
 Mechanical failure
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Artificial lift failure
Formation damage and low permeability can sometimes be improved by stimulation

operations such as acidisation or hydraulic fracturing.
In oil or gas wells where there is liquid hold up or gas slip; this is often countered by installing
smaller diameter velocity strings. These may be coiled tubing strings installed inside the
original completion. This tubing reaches down into the sump and provides a smaller flow area
to improve liquid lift. These reeled strings are normally 2 3/8 inch, 2 7/8 inch or 3 V2 inch OD
and are run and hung off on a wireline lock or similar device.
The tubing is snubbed into the well by normal CT methods from large reels after a lock
mandrel has been attached to the coil and RIH to setting depth.
The main disadvantage with this solution is the high weight of such large reels, which is often
above the lifting capacity of some offshore installations. Smaller, more manageable, reel
sizes involve more connections to make up offshore. These problems, however, are
outweighed when set against the costs of a full re-completion programme.
An artificial lift system is usually required in any low permeability well to give adequate
production rates. A work programme to re-complete this type of well is required once the
well flow has reached the minimum economic acceptable natural flow. If the well has already
been on gas lift and it is no longer efficient, then the gas lift design should be reviewed to
optimise the existing gas lift completion.
25.14 PARTIALLY DEPLETED RESERVOIRS
In a depleted oil reservoir, an effective artificial lift system can be installed to increase
production. If a well was originally planned and designed for gas lift and completed with gas
lift mandrels in the string then the gas lift valves are simply installed by wireline intervention.
However, if a re-completion is needed, a full dead well workover would be necessary. In high
angle wells, gas lift valves can be installed by coiled tubing methods.
Improved recovery by reservoir pressure maintenance is usually the best long-term approach
to increased production rates.
25.15 SAND CONTROL
There are normally two solutions for controlling unconsolidated sand
 Gravel pack
 Install a pre-packed screen (resins are occasionally used )
The drawback of having to implement such control measures is that they reduce productivity
typically by 10% to 15%.
The installation of a gravel pack involves a full workover and re-completion although new
methods using HWO unit have been developed.
For a successful gravel pack it is important to ensure that clean fluids (containing little or no
dispersal solids) are used on initial completion or when the gravel pack is installed. A second
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
requirement is that the gravel is correctly sized in relationship to the formation sand to
prevent further ingress or blind off. It also is desirable, if completing in a sand zone that is
known to be unconsolidated, that the gravel pack is installed immediately, as it is more
difficult to install at a later stage.
If an Open Hole (external) gravel pack is required the hole will need to be enlarged to about
twice its size by under-reaming first before the liner/screen is run. Properly sized gravel is
placed outside the screen by reverse circulation techniques. External gravel packs are utilised
when high production rates are required. Internal gravel cause reduced production rates.
The use of pre-packed screens has increased in recent years as they can often be installed in
an existing completed well avoiding re-completion; however they are more prone to blinding
off as they do not provide the same effectiveness as a regular gravel pack in controlling the
production of fine. Tractors should not be run in wells where a history of sand exists.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
26.0 WJ – GAS MIGRATION
Gas Migration WJ06.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
It’s a principle that describes the relationship between the pressure and volume of a gas.
According to this law, the pressure exerted by a gas held at a constant temperature varies
inversely with the volume of the gas. For example, if the volume is halved, the pressure is
doubled; and if the volume is doubled, the pressure is halved. The reason for this effect is that
a gas is made up of loosely spaced molecules moving at random.
If a gas is compressed in a container, these molecules are pushed together; thus, the gas
occupies less volume. The molecules, having less space in which to move, hit the walls of the
container more frequently and thus exert an increased pressure
The gas kick is highly compressible, the space the gas occupies will depend on the pressure
and temperature.
Ignoring the temperature and other effects, reducing the pressure on the gas will allow it to
expand occupying more space.
If the pressure is increased then the volume will decrease. If the pressure is maintained then
the volume will remain unchanged
If gas is allowed to migrate in a wellbore that is closed in then there is no room for any
expansion to take place. This means the gas will take its original pressure with it as it moves
up the wellbore. When this happens it is seen as a pressure rise on both SICP and SIDPP. This
causes the well to pressure up in all directions creating extra pressure at the shoe and on the
bottom of the hole, whilst the gas bubble pressure remains unchanged. To reduce the
pressure caused by gas migration a calculated amount of drilling fluid must be bled from the
choke in order to allow the gas to expand, which will in turn reduce the pressure. This
procedure will return SIDPP to its original value but SICP will have increased slightly above its
original value.
Gas in water based mud can migrate up the well bore. Migration will occur if the well is shut in
or open.
With the well open gas will expand as it migrates and displace mud from the well. The
pressure from the gas will be reducing. If the well is shut in and the gas migrates, it cannot
expand, no mud is being displaced from the well, to allow expansion. If the gas cannot expand
then the pressure will not change.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Gas Pressure Trends/Monitoring WJ06.02/03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
E F F E C T S O F K E E P IN G C A S IN G P R E S S U R E
C O N S T A N T W H I L E G A S I S M IG R A T I N G
E F F EC T S O F B L E ED IN G D R IL L P IPE PR E S SU R E
T O O R IG IN A L ST A B IL IS E D VA L U E W H IL E G A S IS M IG R A T IN G
E F F E C T S O F N O T B L E E D IN G P R E S S U R E
W H I L E G A S IS M I G R A T I N G
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
27.0 WK – WELL CONTROL METHODS
Production Well Kill Procedures WK02.01 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
The choice of well kill procedure will depend on a number of factors including tubing and
casing integrity, ability to circulate the annulus, formation pressure and the method of well
completion.
When it is required to kill a production well, the easiest, quickest, most certain method is by
circulation. This requires establishing a communication path as close to the producing zone as
possible. This might be by opening a SSD just above the packer (or punching a hole in the
tubing, or pulling a dummy from a SPM) in a completion or by using a string of pipe that has
been run to a suitable (deep) depth using Coiled Tubing or Snubbing.
In this case, the method of killing the well is to circulate a kill weight fluid around the wellbore
whilst maintaining a constant BHP sufficient to give a slight overbalance against the
formation pressure. This is achieved by opening or closing a surface choke, and following a
pre-calculated kill sheet which gives the required tubing surface pressure during the kill. The
principles for working out the kill sheet are the same whether it is forward or reverse
circulation.
Various factors must be taken into account when preparing a kill graph.
 Is the tubing the same ID/OD for the whole length?
 Weight of fluid currently in tubing and annulus and weight of kill fluid?
 Current shut in WHP and annulus pressure?
 Contents of wellbore, oil or gas?
Well Kill Methods Ad/Disadvantages WK02.02 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
The different methods that are used to kill a well are as follows:
 Reverse circulation (annulus/tubing)
 Forward circulation (tubing/annulus)
 Bullheading (tubing/formation)
 Lubricate and Bleed (Replace gas with fluid)
To kill a well using circulation, we can proceed in two ways:
Normal circulation (“forward”) - Kill fluid circulates down the production tubing, through a
circulation point over the packer and up the annulus. The circulation point can be a side
pocket, sliding sleeve, or shoot holes in the production tubing to establish a circulation point.
Reverse circulation - Kill fluid is circulated down through the annulus, through the circulation
point over the packer and up the production tubing, this would be a planned operation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The fluid that is used to kill the well is weighed up. This fluid must be heavy enough to give a
small overbalance against the formation pressure.
It is very important that the kill fluid does not damage the reservoir or reservoir fluid. If the
kill fluid reacts with the reservoir rock or fluid, it can lead to plugging of the reservoir.
Normally, the annulus is filled with packer fluid that is heavier than the hydrocarbons. It is
therefore most practical to use reverse circulation. This means that the fluid that is in the
annulus is displaced into the production tubing by the kill fluid.
A production well with an open circulation point over the packer can be compared to a U-tube
that is open at the bottom. When a well is to be killed with circulation, we can put a plug in
the tail pipe, or the circulation can be completed without this plug. The purpose of the plug is,
among other things, to prevent the kill fluid from coming into contact with the reservoir fluid.
The principle for preparing a kill sheet is the same for both reverse and normal circulation. A
kill sheet is a graph that shows how the wellhead pressure develops as the kill fluid is pumped
in. A kill sheet is an important tool for securing that the bottom-hole pressure is always larger
than the formation pressure.
Well Kill Principle – Appropriate Selection WK02.03 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
The choice of well kill procedure will depend on a number of factors including tubing and
casing integrity, ability to circulate the annulus, formation pressure and the method of well
completion. Can we establish a circulating point, is the DHSV serviceable etc. etc.
Reverse Circulate WK03.01 Level of Importance L4.5
Directional down the annulus and up thru the tubing is generally the method used in a
planned well kill. All wells can normally killed in this manner because there is less risk of
formation damage, surface pressures remain lower and clean kill fluid fills both the annulus
and tubing.
Advantages
 Hydrocarbons brought up through the Xmas Tree to the production facilities
 Gas and oil will remain segregated throughout
 Low circulation pressures on the annulus
 Little or no damage to the formation by foreign fluids or contaminants from the

tubing or annulus
 Little risk of accidentally fracturing the formation
PS – Can only be done if there is a circulating point and there are no issues with the DHS
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Kill fluid is pumped down the tubing, through a circulating device (or out the end of a work
string/coiled tubing) and up the annulus. If washing out fill or debris in the bottom of the well
(rat hole), care must be taken to ensure that the work is done very slowly because:-
 Large quantities of solids in the annulus can add significant weight to the fluid in use,
increasing the BHCP and can cause lost circulation. This assumes that the well has
been killed and the packer has been pulled.
 If there is a large quantity of solids in the annulus and the pump has to be shut down
or fails, there is a chance of the solids settling out around tool-strings or BHA's
causing them to become stuck. This assumes that the well has been killed and the
packer has been pulled.
If the well is not plugged and circulation is taking place through a SSD or SPM, there is a risk
of hydrocarbons entering the annulus.
After running a completion, a light fluid (often diesel) is usually pumped down the annulus to
provide a lighter column of fluid in the wellbore for under balanced perforating or for bringing
the well in. This is followed down with the completion brine which, after careful calculation, is
left in the annulus. The SSD or SPM is then closed, stopping the fluids in the well from U-
tubing. When the sleeve is closed the annulus pressure can be bled off to check there is no
communication.
Forward circulation has several disadvantages over reverse circulation:
 It involves higher annulus circulation pressures
 Disposal of formation fluids through the side outlet valves is difficult.
 It is more difficult to pump the oil/gas ahead of the kill fluid.
 The fluid in the wellbore may mix with fluid in the annulus making choke operation
and disposal more difficult.
 The empty pipe will have to be filled when running in the hole in order to stop it from
collapsing.
As the pumps are run up to speed, the tubing pressure will rise as the well is killed with the kill
fluid coming out of the bottom of the pipe and up the completion. The control of the
operation is undertaken by adjusting the choke, which must be in the flow path from the
completion or tree, so that the pumping pressure follows the predicted graph.
Under normal circumstances, a forward circulation kill would probably only be undertaken
with a Coiled Tubing or Snubbing string in the hole.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The following graphs represent the typical pressure at the top of the Coiled Tubing or
Snubbing string (tubing pressure) and at the top of the pipe/completion annulus (annulus
pressure).
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The graphs assume
 The sizes of the work string and completion do not vary from top to bottom.
 The work string is already full of the kill weight fluid.
 The well is not approaching horizontal.
 The well contains oil and gas.
There is no gas invasion of the kill fluid as it comes up the annulus.
27.1 REVERSE CIRCULATION - KILL FLUID IS LIGHTER THAN ANNULAR FLUID
The following must be calculated and noted before the kill

operation is started:
 Volume in the production tubing bbl/ft capacity
 Volume in the annulus bbl/ft capacity
 Total well volume.
 The density of the kill fluid: Calculated from the reservoir

pressure.
 Wellhead pressure (read or calculated from the reservoir).
 Calculate static annular pressure when communication is

established between the annulus and production tubing.
 Vertical well/well angle
Our Well
Vertical Well 10,000 ft
Packer Depth n/a
SSD Pressure 5,400 psi
Gas Density .1psi/ft
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Oil Density .4psi/ft

Annular Fluid Density .62psi/ft
Calculationa
Capacity of the production tubing 0.05 bbl/ft
Volume in the production tubing 0.05 x 10,000ft TVD = 500 bbl/ft
Capacity in the annulus Casing minus closed end displacement
Volume of annulus 0.07 x 10,000 = 700 bbl
Density of kill fluid .54 psi/ft
WHP reservoir pressure – hydrostatic
3,500 psi
pressure from the reservoir to the surface
Full circulation is equal to annulus + tubing
700 bbl + 500 bbl = 1200 bbl
volume
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The foregoing is a well that had a SSD opened when there was a large differential pressure,
thus creating a “U” tube affect. The result of the differential left a large void in the annulus at
the start of the well kill.

Start the pumps and open the choke take SCR at 30spm & 40s
Annular void being filled up due to the differential when opening the sleeve
0
Point B
0
Ga s .1
273 Barrels Comp F luid . 62
O il .4
400 x .1 = 40 81 4 x 0 = 0
B rine.54
3 900 x .54 = 2106

3000 x .4 = 1200
Tb
A
gn n
528 6 x .62 = 32 77
66 02 x .6 2 = 4 094
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

5400psi SS D 10,000 ft 5400 psi A B
Page
0 Point C
0
389 Barrels Gas .1

Comp Fluid .62
Oil .4
Brine.54
2222 x .4 = 889
5556 x .54 = 3000
tbg
Ann
4444 x .62 = 2755
7778 x .62 = 4822
5756psi 5756 psi A B C

SSD 10,000 ft
Gas has been displaced from the tubing.
Point D
0
572
Gas .1
500 Barrels Comp Fluid .62
Oil .4
Brine.54
10000 x .62 = 6200 7143 x .54 = 3856
tbg
Ann
2857 x .62 = 1771
6200psi SSD 10,000 ft 6200 psi A B C D
Gas completely displaced from the tubing. Annulus has got some kill and some completion
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
0 Point E
800
700 Barrels Gas .1

Comp Fluid .62
Oil .4
Brine.54
10000 x .62 = 6200 10000 x .54 = 5400
tbg
Ann
6200psi 6200 psi A B C D E

SSD 10,000 ft
This is the annular volume ie when completion fills the tubing and kill fluid fills the annulus.
Point F
0
0
Gas .1
Oil .4
Brine.54
Barrels 1200
10000 x .54 = 5400 10000 x .54 = 5400
tbg
Ann
SSD 10,000 ft 5400 psi A B C D E F

5400psi
The well is dead, clean kill fluid fills the annulus and tubing, well head pressure is zero.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
P res sure v V olum e Gr aph of the w ell
572 800
25 2 8
TBG PSI A nn ul ar p si
A B C D E F
0 Bls 27 3 38 9 5 00 70 0 1 20 0
REVERSE CIRCULATION - annular fluid is lighter than kill fluid
Our Well
Vertical Well 10,000 ft
Packer Depth n/a
Reservoir Pressure 5,100 psi
Gas Density .14 psi/ft
Production
Oil Density .37 psi/ft Tubing
Annular Fluid Density .51psi/ft
Annular Capacity 0.03 bbl/ft
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Calculationa
Capacity of the production tubing 0.008 bbl/ft
Volume in the production tubing 0.008 bbl x 10,000 = 80 bbl
Capacity in the annulus Casing minus tubing displacement
Volume of annulus 0.03 x 10,000 = 300 bbl
Density of kill fluid .54 psi/ft
WHP reservoir pressure – hydrostatic
5,100 psi
pressure from the SSD to the surface
Full circulation Annulus + Tubing (300 + 80) = 380 bbl
2320 psi
C ompl etio n F lui d .5 1
0 psi Ki ll Fl ui d .54
O il .37
G as .1 4
40 00 Fe et
Annulus Capac ity = .030 Barrels /F oot

100 00 Fe et
Tubing C apac ity = .0080 Barrels /F oot
Static Annulus BH P @ SSD = 5100 ps i
Static Tubing BH P @ SSD = 5 100 ps i

60 00 Fe et
Maintain 220 psi Overbalanc e
Sliding Sleeve – 10,000 feet T VD
Maintain a 200psi overbalance during the circulation
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
2320
Start O/B
0
Gas .14
Comp Fluid .51
Oil .37
Brine.54
4000 x .14 = 560 Annulus Cap .030
Tubing Cap. 0080
220 psi O/B
Barrels 0
tbg
10000 x .51 = 5100
6000 x .37 = 2220
Ann
5100psi SSD 10,000 ft 5100 psi A
The sliding sleeve (SSD) is opened. BHP 5100 psi
1060 Point B
187
Gas .14
1100 x .54 = 594 Oil .37
6000 x .37 =
2220 Brine.54
tbg
8900 x .51 = 4539
4000 x .51 = 5100
Ann
5320psi SSD 10000 ft 5320 psi A B
Gas has been displaced from the tubing. BHP 5320 psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
220 Point C
151
Gas .14
2286 x .54 = 1234 Oil .37
Brine.54
10000 x .51 = 5100
tbg
7714 x .51 = 3935
Ann
5320psi SSD 10000 ft 5320 psi A B C
Oil has been displaced from the tubing. BHP 5320
220 Point D
31
Gas .14
220 Barrels
Comp Fluid .51
Oil .37
6286 x .54 = 3395
Brine.54
10000 x .51 = 5100
tbg
3714 x .51 = 1895

Ann
5320psi SSD 10,000 ft 5320 psi A B C D
Displacing completion fluid BHP 5320 psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
220 Point E
0
Gas .14
300 Barrels
Comp Fluid .51
Oil .37
10000 x .54 = 5320 Brine.54
10000 x .51 = 5100
tbg
Ann
5320psi SSD 10,000 ft 5320 psi A B C D E
Point E is the annular volume ie the annulus is completely full of kill fluid and the tubing is completely full
of completion fluid BHP is 5320 psi
0
Point F
0
Gas .14
380 Barrels
Comp Fluid .51
Oil .37
10000 x .54 = 5400 Brine.54
10000 x .54 = 5400
Tbg
Ann
5400psi SSD 10,000 ft 5400 psi A B C D E F
The well is dead kill fluid occupies the annulus and the tubing. Both surface gauges read zero.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
28.0 WK – CALCULATIONS
Perform Calculations WK04.01/12 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
See section 1
Bull-Heading WK05.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Bullheading (or squeeze killing) involves pumping kill weight fluid down the tubing and
forcing the wellbore fluids back into the formation through the perforations. This method is
only possible if the well conditions are such that pumping back into the formation is possible.
If the tubing or perforations are blocked then this method cannot be used. It is also used
when the tubing has been landed in a packer and it is not possible to establish a circulation
path around the tubing shoe (other than perforating)
The pumping rate during bullheading must be high enough to stop any gas migrating back up
through the kill fluid and to keep the fluid from free falling down the tubing and mixing with
the wellbore fluids. Ideally a wall of fluid should be forced down the tubing, pushing
everything in front of it.
The pump pressure must not exceed formation fracture pressure. Fracturing the formation
can cause severe losses that are very difficult to stop even with coarse LCM (lost circulation
material). Pressure ratings of surface equipment must also be considered.
Most producing wells have reduced formation pressures and a full column of kill fluid
(seawater is the normal minimum) may give rise to excessive bottom hole pressures which
may cause the fluids to be lost into the formation. In this case, solids such as sized salt
particles or Calcium Carbonate etc. may be required to temporarily block off the perforations
to enable them to support the full column of kill fluid.
In low permeability wells where it is difficult to pump fluids into the formation, high surface
pressure can result from low pump rates.
Small ID tubing strings may also cause pressure problems because of high friction losses in
the tubing. If the tubing is very large, pressure will probably not be a problem although it may
be difficult to maintain the clear interface between the kill fluids and the wellbore fluids. This
can cause the kill to take much longer with much more fluid lost to the formation.
The main disadvantage of bull-heading is that everything that is in the wellbore, including
scale, debris, sand, etc. is likely to be forced back into the formation. There is even the risk of
plugging the perforations before the kill is achieved. Surface and downhole pressures will be
the highest with bull-heading.
If filtered kill fluids are to be pumped into a high permeability reservoir, then the bullhead kill
may be the preferred option.
A typical graph of the pumping pressure is illustrated, again assuming that the completion
geometry does not alter, the well is not approaching horizontal, there is no gas migration and
the wellbore fluids can be easily pumped back into the formation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Bullhead Graph Example
Advantages
 Tubing contents pumped into the formation.
 Quick operation if time or speed is important, especially if there is a lack of well files
or information regarding the well configuration to calculate a reverse kill.
 Would depend on formation permeability and rated equipment pressure to carry out
the operation
Disadvantages
 Scale or contaminants in the tubing are pumped against the formation – Pore or
perforation plugging with scale or debris from the well is a common cause of near
well bore damage
 Low formation fracture pressures may be exceeded causing accidental fractures
 Gas may slip up the tubing if the pump rate is not sufficient for larger tubing size
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The following factors must be taken into consideration:

The pressure necessary to push the formation
fluid back into the formation. Decided by an
Injection pressure injection test. Remember to record the
relationship between pump rate and injection
pressure.
Decides the static surface pressure, refer to

Density, formation fluid
formation pressure and pressure developed.
Decides the pressure development during the

Density, kill fluid process and change in the frictional pressure
loss.
Decides the frictional pressure loss and as well as

Pump rate
the change in frictional pressure
Deciding factor for the choice of pump rate. If it

is a gas, the pump rate must be as high as
Formation fluid possible at least greater than the migration
speed of the gas in fluid. Use migration speed
1000 - 4000 ft/hour.
When choosing a pump rate we must avoid using
an injection pressure that exceeds the formation
Formation strength strength in order to avoid fracturing. The
strength of the cement behind the casing must
also be considered.
The formula for calculating the kill fluids density is: Formation Gradient ÷ TVD
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
2730 psi 0 psi
5246 psi
3192 psi
5366 psi
4670 psi
The pump pressure is increased until the kill fluid is pushed into the tubing and the well fluid is
displaced back into the reservoir. Surface pressure will gradually sink as the hydrostatic
pressure of the fluid column rises.
965 psi 0 psi
5246 psi
3192 psi
5366 psi
4670 psi
A production tubing volume is pumped and the well is killed. 965 psi is the pressure that we
must have to overcome the reservoir friction and frictionally pressure loss in the tubing and
surface equipment.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
0 psi 0 psi
4695 psi
3192 psi
4815 psi
4670 psi
The pump stops and the surface pressure will go to 0 psi; the bottom hole pressure is at 4815
psi and has a kill margin of 174 psi. The well is killed.
Changes in friction can be difficult to evaluate directly, especially on gas wells, because a fluid
gives completely different frictional pressures. Frictional pressure loss with well fluid can be
measured and related to the production rate. Frictional pressure loss is measured as the
pressure difference between reservoir pressure, measured downhole pressure, and surface
pressure in production. Calculate the frictional pressure loss with kill fluid.
When you are going to begin volume calculations, you sum up the capacity multiplied by the
length of each section. The pressure course during the process relates to the number of pump
strokes or the pumped volume. In the process, the following happens:
 Surface pressure is gradually reduced as the hydrostatic pressure from the kill fluid
increases.
 Friction in the system changes as the kill fluid replaces the well fluid. Normally, the
friction increases.
 Injection pressure stays the same as long as the pump rate is held constant, until the
kill fluid meets the formation. Then the pressure will usually increase.
 The course of the pressure is described by doing calculations for 5 - 10 points in the
process and plotting the results in a pressure/volume or pressure/pump stroke
diagram.
 If we wait until the kill fluid meets the reservoir, we will see a strong increase in
pressure on the pump.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
When this happens, it is normal to stop pumping and end the operation.
Lubricate and bleed WK06.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
We use this method if it is not possible to use any of the other methods we have discussed. A
condition for using this method is that we are dealing with a gas well, or that there is a lot of
gas in the pipe that is to be killed. Examples of situations where we use this method include
when we have a well control problem, such as a stuck wireline cable in the well, and where we
cannot bullhead before the shut-in pressure of the well is reduced.
When we pump into the well, gas is compressed. Therefore, we see an increase in pressure at
the top. In addition, the hydrostatic pressure in the well increases. These two conditions lead
to a pressure increase in the well that must not exceed that which the well tolerates (refer to
injection or fracturing). The amount that can be pumped in is therefore limited, so that the
process must be repeated until all the gas is bled out and replaced with fluid. If we know the
height of the gas and the formation pressure, we can calculate the necessary density to kill
the well.
Lubricate & Bleed Summary WK06.06 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
This method is very rarely used and involves pumping a controlled amount of kill fluid to
exceed the SITHP. Given sufficient time for the kill fluid to gravitate into the tubing bore
before bleeding off pressure to below the original SITHP.
This operation may be restricted by tubular burst pressures, formation permeability, frac
pressure and the rating of the surface equipment being used.
Lubricate & Bleed Procedure: WK06.05 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
Lubricate and bleed (sometimes called a lubricated kill) is performed by:
 Calculating the capacity of the tubing and pumping half that volume of kill fluid into
the well.
 Observing the well for 30-60 mins. The tubing head pressure will drop due to the
hydrostatic head of the initial kill mud pumped. When the wellhead pressure is
constant the next step is taken.
 Pump around 10 barrels of kill fluid and ensure that the wellhead pressure does not
exceed 200 psi above the observed tubing head pressure.
 Bleed off gas from the tubing at a high rate immediately after pumping the batch of
kill fluid. The tubing head pressure should drop an amount equal to the hydrostatic
head of the mud pumped. If the gas pressure is not bled off quickly enough, the
additional pressure caused by the increased hydrostatic, may cause losses.
 The gas migrates to surface through a non-viscous fluid in a straight well at up to

perhaps 2000 ft/hr, time must be allowed for the fluid to fall through the gas before
bleeding off. This is to avoid bleeding off the kill fluid that has already been pumped.
Lubricate and bleed method can take a long time to perform.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 With 27/8" tubing in the well and 9 ppg kill fluid (brine), a typical pressure reduction
might be in the order of 80-85 psi/barrel pumped. In a 6500 ft. well, it might take 40
bbls to fill the tubing. The graph shows typical pumping pressure during a kill
operation.
 When the well is dead, it will contain a full column of fluid. Assuming that it is
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
stationary and overbalanced, this fluid is the primary barrier.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
28.1 COMBINING THE METHODS

Once in a while it can be advantageous or necessary to combine the methods we have just
described. Examples of this can be when we bullhead tubing into a reservoir before opening
the sliding sleeve and circulating, or when we lubricate and bleed the tubing before we
continue bullheading.
28.2 WORKOVER/WELL KILL FLUIDS

Fluids used in completing or well services operations have many applications e.g. During
perforating, cementing, fracturing, acidising, well killing, re-completing, milling, drilling,
clean outs and fluid loss prevention. They may also have long term functions as packer or
completion fluids. They must provide an overbalance and be clear dens brines.
 Generally, the most economic fluid, which meets all of the criteria, is used and it
should be solid free and non-damaging.
 Clear brines are used as they are cheap, readily obtainable, easily transportable and
easily filtered in normal weight ranges.
 The disadvantage is that they have no bridging capability and are easily lost into the
formation (unless the well is plugged). In this case, a LCM pill is usually placed against
the formation to prevent or reduce the losses.
 Clear brines are weighted by salts to achieve the desired densities.
 Brines are available in weight ranges from 8.3 to 21.0lbs/gal.
 The heavier brines can be very corrosive to metals and hazardous to personnel, hence
require special handling. Personnel must use appropriate safety work-wear and be
aware of the hazards.
28.3 CHEMICAL MAKE-UP OF BRINES
Potassium Chloride KCl 8.3 – 9.7 lbs/gal

Sodium Chloride NaCl 8.3 – 10.0 lbs/gal
Calcium Chloride CaCl 8.3 – 11.8 lbs/gal
Calcium Chloride / Calcium CaCl / CaBr2 11.8 – 15.2 lbs/gal
Bromide
Calcium Chloride / Calcium CaCl / CaBr2 / ZnBr2 14.5 – 19.2 lbs/gal
Bromide / Zinc Bromide
Zinc Bromide ZnBr2 13.5 – 21.0 lbs/gal
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
28.4 FILTRATION AND CLEANLINESS

Brines are usually filtered to a predetermined level of cleanliness, selected to meet the
demands, by a filtration unit or a centrifuge. The two main types of filtration units used are:
 DE Filtration Press
 Cartridge Units.
The former uses Diatomaceous Earth formed as a cake on the faces of plates pressed
together through which the fluid is pumped.
NOTE - They are a function of temperature, therefore the higher temperature the lower
the pressure density
Typical kill fluids might include:
 Sea Water
 Completion fluid
 Drilling mud (oil or water based).
 Fresh Water
It is very important that the kill fluid is compatible with the formation and the formation
fluids. Incompatible fluids can cause swelling of clays and chalks, scale deposition and other
problems that can permanently block the perforations or greatly reduce productivity
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
29.0 WN – CONTINGENCY PLANNING
Blockages WN10.01/02/03 Level of Importance L3-5/L4-10
In all well intervention there is a risk that we cannot get into the well because of blockages.
Examples of this include:
 A collapsed production tubing or casing
 Fish in the hole
 Sediment deposits (“scale”)
 Build-up of sand
There are differences in how this is registered in wireline, pressure pipe and coiled tubing
operations.
In wireline operations that relate to gravity and the weight of the work string, the loss of
weight on a place where there, according to the well sketch, should be free passage, indicates
that we have met a blockage.
Pressure pipe will be the same as in wireline operations if you operate in “pipe heavy” mode,
in other words that the pipe is heavier than buoyancy and friction. But if you are in “pipe light”
mode, where the pipe must be pushed against the well pressure, the blockage will be
registered as an increase in compressive force or negative weight.
Coiled tubing will be similar to pressure pipe operations, but here it is also common that we
pump at the same time as the pipe is run into the well. It can therefore sometimes be an
increase in pump pressure that first warns the operator that the equipment has run into
blockage.
All the situations described above occur while running into a well, but it is possible that
problems arise when pulling out equipment. This will then register as an increase in weight in
all cases except where coiled tubing and pressure pipe are in “pipe light” mode, in which case
it will be registered as a reduction in negative weight. While running in there might be an
edge or shoulder in the completion that stops the equipment. It will often be necessary to
pull out of hole in order to change the tool string. If this doesn’t work it will be natural to
attempt to pass the obstruction with a smaller tool and possibly use a Lead Impression Block
to make an impression of the blockage.
In coiled tubing and pressure pipe we can attempt to push through with force, but we risk
getting stuck. Another possibility is to try to wash out the blockage by circulating fluid
through the string and taking the returns at the surface.
In a pressure pipe we also have the possibility to rotate the string at the same time as we
move it up and down. This can be the solution if the string is hanging on an edge.
The consequences of blockage in the well will often be that the planned operation will not be
able to be completed before the blockage is removed, allowing the equipment to be run to
the planned depth. Based on the actual well depth, history and experience, an evaluation will
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
be made to identify which type of blockage we are most likely facing. Afterwards, a plan will
be made to solve the problem.
PS Do not run tractors where a well has a history of sand.
Hydrates WN05.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Hydrates are a product that arises when gas molecules bind to water molecules. The
chemical reaction happens quickly when it first begins. The product can be compared to ice
and snow, but is not frozen water.
The creation of hydrates can only occur if there is free water available for the gas to react
with. By free water we mean that the molecules are not bound to other matter, for example
glycol or methanol.
The chemical reaction can only occur within a certain area of pressure and temperature for
each type of gas. The lower the temperature and the higher the pressure, the greater the risk
for hydrate formation. The gas’ molecular weight also has meaning here. A lighter gas will
react more easily with water than a heavier gas.
Pressure and temperature can seldom be regulated in a live well, so we must primarily
concentrate on the free water to prevent the formation of hydrates.
One must avoid supplying free water in connection to leakage testing and pressure balancing.
Therefore we commonly use a 50/50 mixture of water and glycol. If there is a lot of water in
the well to begin with, one can use pure glycol so that the water binds when the glycol is
released into the well
In other situations it may occur that large amounts of fluid are pumped into the well to
prevent hydrates.
The fluid can be brine or diesel.
If hydrates
arise in the
well, the
flow line or
the riser, we
will attempt
to remove
them in the most effective way. The
methods that are used can be different
depending on where the hydrates are localized. It is therefore important to first try to find out
where the problem is; afterwards you can decide which method to use to remove the
hydrates.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
29.1 HYDRATE PREVENTION/REMOVAL

If the hydrates are down in the well, they will often be removed on their own by increasing
temperature, especially if the well has been cooled down by diverse pumping operations.
Some will also bleed down pressure over the hydrates, but this is very risky as the hydrate
plug can loosen and shoot up the well.
A safer alternative is, if possible, to pump methanol. At some places we also pump warm
fluid in the annulus that raises the temperature a little. A flow line on the seabed will be extra
vulnerable to hydrates and it is here we often circulate methanol in order to prevent the
formation of hydrates, as well as to remove any existing hydrates.
If there are problems with hydrate formation on surface intervention equipment, it can
sometimes be seen on the outside of the equipment as frost. We can attempt to warm up
this area with warm water or steam.
If we have the possibility to heat, you can go ahead even if we haven’t registered a specific
area with outer frost. If it is possible to pump in methanol or glycol, it is done. Methanol will
loosen up the hydrates. Glycol will not unless it is warm, but it will prevent a worsening of the
situation and prevent the formation of new hydrates if the hydrates are loosened up by heat.
External Hydrate Indicators:
 Vents blocking during venting down
 Wireline gear sticking downhole for no apparent reason
 A tree valve sticking or being completely blocked
 Icing up on the outside of a valve or pipe work
 Stuffing boxes Icing up
Internal Hydrate Indicators:
 Prevents vital equipment from functioning properly
 Unable to flow the well
 Unable run or pull wire line tools
 Unable to circulate a well dead
Minimise the Risk
Prior to pressure testing pure glycol or glycol mix the density of the fluid should be measured
for water content as follows
Acceptable specific gravity range:
 MEG: Mono Ethylene Glycol 1.115 to 1.120
 TEG: Tri Mono Ethylene Glycol 1.123 to 1.128
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Hydrate Prevention:
 Chemical Injection Lines
 Flow the well (if possible)to keep pipe work and subsurface components “warm”
 Glycol (anti-freeze) can be added to pressure testing water to inhibit hydrate

formation
Hydrates Forming
29.2 HYDRATE QUESTIONS
Glycol can dissolve hydrates TRUE

‘DRY’ Gas always contains free water TRUE
Oil produced with gas inhibits hydrates TRUE
Hydrates can damage surface equipment TRUE
Hydrates can completely plug a flowline TRUE
A steam cleaner should be used to disperse FALSE
Injecting distilled water inhibits hydrates FALSE
Hydrates can form at the subsea BOP TRUE
Salt content in drilling fluids can inhibit hydrates TRUE
A sudden increase/decrease on the weight indicator @ surface is a good
TRUE
indication of a possible Hydrate
Hydrates resemble snow/ice TRUE
Are found at the bottom of separators FALSE
A pressure drop induces a hydrate formation TRUE
Temps below Freezing are required FALSE
Commonly found downstream of chokes TRUE
Methanol can prevent hydrates TRUE
Methanol can dissolve hydrates TRUE
Glycol can prevent hydrates. TRUE
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
29.3 SAFETY INCIDENT
During the night-shift wireline operations on the rig floor, a tool-string was ejected from the
lubricator and traveled 50ft into the air, before penetrating two thick metal surfaces on the
top drive. You will see from the photographs below that the energy involved in this incident
was extremely high. The injured party chose to look inside the lubricator just as the tool-
string was ejected under pressure. The injured party was working as part of a team on the rig
floor and any one of the other people could have intervened to prevent him being injured. No
one intervened. At present it is understood that the injured party has not been seriously
injured was treated in hospital.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
30.0 WEQ – COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
30.1 COMPLETION DESIGN

Completion, in petroleum production, is the process of making a well ready for production (or
injection). This principally involves preparing the bottom of the hole to the required
specifications, running in the production tubing and its associated down hole tools as well as
perforating and stimulating as required. Sometimes, the process of running in and cementing
the casing is also included.
The well design process begins with an understanding of the environment in which the well
will be drilled. Interpretations of local geologic structure, geo-pressure and formation
strengths are developed. These interpretations may be derived either from local drilling
experience or from seismic data. It should be noted that uncertainties will exist in the
interpretation of the data and ultimately in the description of the geologic environment. The
quality of geologic predictions ( e.g., pore pressure, fracture gradient, bottom hole
temperature and pressure, formation fluids, H2S, CO2, chloride concentration, etc. ) often
relies on the amount of control within a given area. As such, these predictions are usually
expected to be more reliable for development wells than for exploration wells. However, for
drilling operations in established deep water fields, the pore pressure and fracture gradient
often demonstrate variability due to production.
With a description of the geologic environment in place, constraints are then introduced by
the designer to address specific well requirements. These include the directional drilling
objectives and the required well depth. Production or evaluation requirements dictate the
hole size desired at total depth. Depending on the geographical location, some wells will
require an additional surface casing string for the isolation of shallow water or gas flows. It is
common for deepwater Gulf of Mexico wells to penetrate long sections of salt. In some
locations, the salt will provide a higher fracture strength, which may reduce the number of
casing strings required to reach the ultimate well objective. The presence of salt in other
locations may present drilling challenges such as shear/rubble zones, inclusions, or abnormal
pressures within.
30.2 LOWER COMPLETION
This refers to the portion of the well across the production or injection zone. The well
designer has many tools and options available to design the lower completion according to
the conditions of the reservoir. Typically, the lower completion is set across the productive
zone using a liner hanger system, which anchors the lower completion to the production
casing string. The broad categories of lower completion are listed below.
30.3 BAREFOOT COMPLETION
This type is the most basic, but can be a good choice for hard rock, multi-laterals and
underbalance drilling. It involves leaving the productive reservoir section without any
tubulars. This effectively removes control of flow of fluids from the formation; it is not
suitable for weaker formations, which might require sand control, or for formations requiring
selective isolation of oil, gas and water intervals. However, advances in interventions such as
coiled tubing and tractors means that barefoot wells can be successfully produced.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
30.4 OPEN HOLE
The production casing is set above the zone of interest before drilling the zone. The zone is
open to the well bore. In this case little expense is generated with perforations log
interpretation is not critical. The well can be deepened easily and it is easily converted to
screen and liner. However, excessive gas and water production is difficult to control, and may
require frequent clean outs. Also the interval can be selectively stimulated.
30.5 CASED HOLE COMPLETION
This involves running casing or a liner down through the production zone, and cementing it in
place. Connection between the well bore and the formation is made by perforating. Because
perforation intervals can be precisely positioned, this type of completion affords good control
of fluid flow, although it relies on the quality of the cement to prevent fluid flow behind the
liner. As such it is the most common form of completion...
30.6 TYPES OF FLOW
 Pumping flow - the tubing and pump are run to a depth beneath the working fluid.
The pump and rod string are installed concentrically within the tubing. A tubing
anchor prevents tubing movement while pumping.
 Tubing flow - A tubing string and a production packer are installed. The packer means
that all the flow goes through the tubing. Within the tubing you can mount a
combination of tools that will help to control fluid flow through the tubing.
 Gas Lift Well - Gas is fed into valves installed in mandrels in the tubing strip. The
hydrostatic head is lowered and the fluid is gas lifted to the surface.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
30.7 DESIGN
No matter what the design of the completion is, whether complicated or simple, the nature of
a completion is either production or Injection. Most Production wells have some sort of
artificial lift installed in their well life.
 Rod pump
 Gas Lift
 Jet Pump (Venturi effect), Electric / Hydraulic Submersible Pump (ESP)
 Screw pump
 Plunger lift
 Water Injection wells are crucial for the life and development of an oil field.
 Water Injection
30.8 COMPLETIONS
In the early 1900s, oil and gas wells were commonly completed with only a string of
cemented casing. As deeper, multiple and higher pressure reservoirs were encountered, it
was recognised that such completions imposed limitations on well servicing and well control
and that downhole designs would need to be changed to meet increasing needs for zonal
isolation, selectivity, re-entry and control. This objective was achieved through the
development of downhole equipment.
Today, conventional oil and gas wells are completed with a variety of downhole devices
designed to meet the functional and production requirements of the well.
In simple terms "completion" refers to the method chosen to finalize a newly drilled well and
will include:
 A method of providing communication between the reservoir and the wellbore
 Tubing and casing design
 A method of lifting well fluids to surface
The installation of various components to allow efficient production, pressure testing,

emergency containment of reservoir fluids, reservoir monitoring and placement of barriers,
well maintenance and well kill procedures
30.9 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF A COMPLETION
Completion design involves the selection of components to perform specific functions

dependent on the philosophy of the operating company and, in some cases; the choice of
component is based on historic reasons and preference.
Some basic functional requirements may include:
 The provision of optimum flowing conditions
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Protecting the casing from corrosive well fluids
 Containment of reservoir fluids in an emergency
 Chemical injection
 Well Killing requirements
 Routine intervention operations
 Tubing movement (compensation)
 Internal erosion
 Installation of barriers
30.10 WELL CONSTRUCTION PRINCIPLES
 Generally a well will consist of conductor, casing, tubing, wellhead and Christmas
tree.
 The conductor protects the casing from seabed to platform surface, and provides a
stable support for the wellhead and Christmas tree.
 Three or four strings of casing will be run inside the conductor, with diminishing I.D’s
 Typically 30” conductor.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 20” Surface Casing
 13.3/8” Intermediate Casing
 9.5/8” Production Casing
 7” Liner
30.11 COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
Most wells include at least one string of tubing in the

completion. Other items such as flow couplings,
circulation devices, blast joints and packers are run
as an integral part of the completion string or
tailpipe.
30.12 COMPLETION EQUIPMENT SUB-

ASSEMBLIES
Why needed:
 Pre-assembled modules ensure pressure

integrity of equipment in workshop
 Pre-assembled modules function tested in

workshop
 Addition of pup joints allows for easier

shipping / handling to the well site
 Modules can be made up and saved ready

for the completion operations
 More cost effective and safer than

performing the operation at the well site
What checks are required:
 Pressure/Temperature ratings
 Tubular Details Pressure ratings/service
 Internal/External & Drift dimensions
 Pressure test charts:
 Pressure high & Low pressures applied
 Times each test was carried out
 Test medium used
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Sign off Signatures
 Physical dimensions of all sub-assemblies
31.0 WEQA – BLOW OUT PREVENTERS
Flange Connections WEQA05.01

Flanges are API connections and can be one of two

types:
 Type 6B for 2000, 3000 and 5000 psi. flanges
 Type 6BX for 10000, 15000 and 20000 psi

flanges
There are one or two exceptions to this rule. Low

pressure flanges (2000 & 3000 psi.) have rounded ring
grooves as opposed to flat bottomed ring grooves.
Type 6B flanges use either and R or RX ring gasket.

The gaskets are interchangeable, the only difference
being that the RX gasket is pressure energised. The
flanges do not make face-to-face contact when made
up.
Type 6BX flanges use BX ring gaskets.
Note - the given size of the flange is the internal diameter of the flange.
All new pressure containing equipment (risers, BOP's, etc.) is tested to manufacturers test
pressure (usually 1.5 times its working pressure) before being put into to service for the first
time. In any equipment rig up, the maximum pressure rating is governed by the lowest rated
component. "6B' and '6BX' flanges may be used as integral, blind or weld neck flanges.
Type '6B' may also be used as threaded flanges. Some type '6BX' blind flanges are also used
as test flanges. Segmented flanges are used on dual, triple, and quadruple completion wells
and are integral with the equipment.
Design
Type '6B', '6BX', and segmented flanges are designed for use in the combinations of nominal
size ranges and rated working pressure as shown in the table.
Type '6B' Flanges General
API Type '6B' flanges are of the ring joint type and are not designed for make-up face-to-face.
The connection make-up bolting force reacts on the metallic ring gasket. The Type '6B'
flanges shall be of the through-bolted or studded design.Ring gaskets have a limited amount
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
of positive interference that assures the gasket will be joined into sealing relationship in the
flange grooves; these gaskets should not be reused.Ring-joint gaskets should meet the
requirements of API Specification 16A and be of the material and hardness specified in API
Specification 6A. API RP 53 chapter 20.2.4 7.11.5.8
All bolts and nuts used in connection with flanges, clamps, and hubs should be selected in
accordance with provisions of API Specification 6A.
Flange Connections Type 6BX are of a ring joint type. These flange
connections are designed for face to face make up. The dimensions
shall conform to API 6A specifications Section 900
Flange Connections Type 6B are of a ring joint type.

These flange connections are not designed for
face to face bolting source re-acts on the metallic ring
gasket. The type 6B flange may be of the bolt through or
studded design. The type 6B uses type R or RX gaskets.
The dimensions shall conform to API 6A, specifications
Section 900
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
31.1 FLANGES & HUB INCORRECT MAKE UP FACTORS
Human Factors - Remains the number one cause of flange leakage, and with accredited
training the candidate will become aware of all the key issues to consider prior to assembly
and tightening of a bolted connection.
Uneven Bolt Stress - An incorrect tightening/assembly procedure or difficult access to

fasteners can leave some bolts loose while others are over tightened and can crush the
gasket. This can cause in-service leaks, especially in high temperature services when the
heavily loaded bolts relax.
Dirty or Damaged Flange Faces - Dirt, scale, scratches, protrusions, weld spatter on gasket
seating surfaces, and warped seating surfaces provide leakage paths or can cause uneven
gasket compression that can result in flange leakage.
Excessive Piping System Loads at Flange Locations - Excessive forces and bending
moments can loosen the bolting or distort the flanges and lead to leaks. Common causes are
inadequate piping flexibility, using cold spring to align flanges, and improper location of
supports or restraints.
Incorrect Gasket Specification and Size - this can result in blow out and flange leakage
during start up or commissioning.
Improper Flange Facing - Deeper serrations than specified will prevent the seating of double
jacketed or spiral wound gaskets and provide a leakage path.
High Vibration Levels - Excessive vibration can loosen flange bolts and ultimately cause
flange leakage.
Non validated torque or tension values – challenge the source of all information supplied
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.0 WEQG– COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
Xmas Trees WEQG01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
We can install the Xmas tree when the hanger system, casings and tubing are in place. We
use it when we open and close the well for flow or well interventions. It is extremely
important that this is done according to current procedures. The Xmas tree is composed of
several valves installed together in a system that secures the well.
The Xmas tree is composed of many different valves with different functions and uses.
The main valves:
 Lower master valve is a manually operated

gate valve. It is normally open, and should
not be used to regulate the well stream etc.
The valve can be shut in conjunction to
maintenance of valves found higher up and in
emergency situations.
 Upper master valve is a hydraulically

operated gate valve that is normally
controlled from a control panel. The valve is
also a part of the automatic security system
and can be activated by an individual closing
signal.
 Swab valve is used in conjunction with well

intervention and is manually operated.
 Production wing valve (flow wing valve) is

found as both a manually or hydraulically
operated valve. In the North Sea the
hydraulically operated valve is used, and these
are then associated with the same security
system as the upper master valve.
 Kill wing valve is normally manual and is used

to pump in or circulate out fluid in the well.
On Xmas trees located in the North Sea we normally find two automatic “fail safe close”
valves. These can be pneumatically, electromagnetically or hydraulically operated, or a
combination of these. We know them best as the hydraulic wing valve and the hydraulic
master valve. The hydraulic wing valve is primarily used in conjunction to process-related
considerations. The hydraulic master valve closes at different alarm levels and with loss of
hydraulic control pressure.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.1 INFORMATION – CLOSING THE TREE

Normal procedures when opening and closing the
Xmas tree is as follows:
 Test rigged up equipment according to

procedures or a minimum of CITHP
 Ensure that the lower master valve is open.
 Open the swab valve with the expected

number of turns.
 After counting the turns, report if there is a

difference.
 After this, the upper master valve is

opened. This one is usually a “normally
closed” or “fail safe close” type of valve and
must therefore be kept open with the help
of hydraulic pressure. The well pressure can
now be read on the gauge in the Xmas
tree’s intersection and pressure in the
lubricator can be set equal to the well
pressure.
 The swab valve, which is manual, can now

be cranked up. The turns are counted and reported so that it can be compared to the
next time the valve is to be closed.
 The Xmas tree is now opened up and all is ready for running in well intervention
equipment into the well to complete the planned operation, or parts of it.
When the equipment is pulled out of the well after a completed or unsuccessful mission, the
Xmas tree is closed again. This takes place in the reverse order of that described.
Run the equipment out of the hole and up

the lubricator according to the current
running procedure.
Close the swab valve carefully while

counting the number of turns. If too few
turns are registered, it most often means
that there is an obstruction in the valve. If
the valve can be almost completely closed,
but is missing about 3 to 5 turns, it could be
an obstruction in the valve. Do not try to
force the valve again, as you might cut the
wire.
Open the valve and try to pull it farther out of the hole before attempting to close the valve
again.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
When the swab valve is closed with the correct number of turns, it can be tested, but this is
not customarily done in all places.
The upper master valve can now be closed. Check that it closes completely with the help of
the indicator rod. When the master valve is closed it is tested. The most common way of
doing this is by opening with a few turns on the Swab Valve and thereafter bleeding off
pressure on the Lubricator manifold. .
When the master valve is tested, the swab valve is closed again. At this point we can define
ourselves as out of hole, the lubricator can be detached and replaced if necessary. If there
shall be rigging up or down from the well NORSOK requires a subsurface safety valve.
The X-mas tree has ports in the intersection for pressure discharging. Depending on the well
fluid, we can calculate the actual pressure at the subsurface safety valve’s depth. The
pressures balances before pulling the wireline subsurface safety valve. At high well pressures
there may sometimes be problems with opening the valve and keeping it open, so that the
control line pressure must be increased.

Solid Block Xmas Tree Design
Tubing Hangers WEQG01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Tubing hangers bear and lock the upper most part of the production tubing. It seals between
the outside of the production tubing and the inside of the casing, and it also usually provides
the ability to install a plug or check valve on the inside. The tubing hanger is a primary barrier.
During installation, the tubing hanger’s inner part is landed in the tubing hanger’s outer part
and is sealed with elastic packers or metal-to-metal seals. When the production tubing is
landed, there is usually a significant weight on the hanger, as it is carrying the upper part of
the production tubing. When the weight is hung off, the handling pipe can be screwed out
and if it is necessary, it is possible to insert a check valve after which the blowout preventer is
removed and the Xmas tree is installed. When the well is in production, large forces may
expand upwards and the weight of the tubing is not enough to keep the tubing in place.
Therefore, all tubing hangers also have anchoring bolts all the way around that are screwed in
after the tubing is landed in the hanger.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Tubing hangers that do not allow the application to insert plugs or check valves into the
tubing hanger’s internal profile, but in our part of the world we usually do have this
possibility. We distinguish between three types of main plugs that can be inserted into the
tubing hanger:
The old-fashioned type with coarse, exterior

left handed threads that is inserted or pulled
out with a rod.
A type with a locking mechanism that is pulled

and inserted with a rod. The latter type is a
landing nipple for plugs.
PS - The tubing hanger is a completion

component which is landed and locked inside
the tubing head spool and provides the
following functions:
 Suspends the upper part of the

completion
 Provides a seal between the tubing

and the annulus
 Installation point for barrier protection

( BPV)
Sub-Surface Safety Valves (SSSV) WEQG01.03

The modern sub-surface safety valve was developed

from the earliest low technology versions produced
in the 1930's. The initial demand was for a downhole
valve that would permit flow during normal
conditions, but would isolate formation pressure
from the wellhead to prevent damage or destruction.
This valve would be installed downhole in the
production string for use in an emergency.
The first safety valve to be developed was a Sub-

Surface Controlled Safety Valve (SSCSV) and was a
poppet type valve with a mushroom shaped
valve/seat system. Compared with today's valves,
this simple poppet type valve had several
disadvantages; restricted flow area, tortuous flow
paths, low differential pressure rating and calibration
difficulties. Despite these limitations the valve
operated successfully and other versions were
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
developed with less tortuous flow paths such as the ball and flapper valve.
From this beginning, the Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SCSSV) was
developed in the late 1950's. This moved the point of control from downhole to surface. This
design provided large flow areas, remote control of opening and closing, and responsiveness
to a wide variety of abnormal surface conditions (fire, line rupture, etc.). Initial demand for
this valve was slow due to its higher cost and the problems associated with successfully
installing the hydraulic control line; hence its usage was low until the late 1960's.
The SCSSV is controlled by control line pressure supplied from a surface control system,
which is ideally suited to manual or automatic operation; the latter pioneered the
sophisticated emergency shut-down systems used today. The versatility of the valve allows it
to be used in specialised applications as well as in conventional systems.
SCSSVs are available with ball or flapper type closure mechanisms although modern designs
utilize the flapper type.
In addition to the type of closure mechanism, SCSSVs can be further subdivided into four
main categories:
 Wireline or tubing retrievable
 Non-equalizing or self-equalizing
 Concentric or rod piston
 Single control line or dual balanced line
A valve may have any combination of these features depending on well conditions and the
completion design
WRSV Applications TRSV Applications

General application: where intervention by General application: where larger flow area is
platforms is unavailable expected
High pressure gas wells High volume oil and gas wells
Extreme hostile environments where well fluids

or temperature tend to shorten the life of Subsea completions
component materials
High velocity wells with abrasive production Multiple zone completions where several flow
32.2 TYPES OF SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES
Fail-safe Sub-Surface Safety Valves are designed to hold pressure from below and can be
pumped through from above when they are closed. They are installed for use in an
emergency to protect personnel, property and the environment in the event of an
uncontrolled well flow ( blow-out) caused by collision, equipment failure, human error, fire,
leakage or sabotage. Whether safety valves are required in a particular operating area
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
depends on the location of the wells, on company operating policy and/or government
legislation.
Safety valves are set below any depth where damage could occur to the valve from surface
impact, explosion or cratering.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.3 SCSSV SETTING DEPTH

Operators may have different criteria concerning setting depth including:
 Set below platform piles or the probable crater depth in the event of a blowout
 Positioned below hydrate formation depth (for self- equalizing)
 Below the mud line
As determined by local regulations
32.3.1 SCSSSV
Wireline Retrievable Surface Controlled Sub Surface Safety Valves are installed in regular
wireline type safety valve landing nipples using a lock mandrel.
32.4 PRESSURE-DIFFERENTIAL SAFETY VALVES
This type of direct-controlled safety valve is a 'normally open' valve that utilises a pressure-
differential to provide the method of valve closure. Normally a spring holds a valve off-seat
until the well flow reaches a predetermined rate.
This rate can be related to the pressure differential generated across an orifice or flow bean.
When this differential is reached or exceeded, a piston moves upwards against a pre-set
spring force closing the valve. Valves of this type are sometimes termed 'storm chokes'.
There are two closing mechanisms available with these valves, i.e.:
 Ball
 Flapper
The valve is held open by a spring force that may be increased by adding spacers or changing
the spring. The relationship between flow rate and differential may be adjusted by changing
the bean size.
The valve when closed will remain in this position until pressure is applied at surface to
equalise across it when the spring will return to the open position.
NOTE - Pulling the valves should not be attempted unless pressures have been equalised
and the valve is open.
These valves are rarely in use today but a derivative, the Injection Valve, which is normally
closed, is widely used in injection wells. This injection valve opens when fluid or gas is injected
and travels to the fully open position when the predetermined minimum injection rate is
reached, (refer to Sub-Section on Injection Valves).
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.5 AMBIENT SAFETY VALVES (PRESSURE OPERATED)

This type of direct-controlled safety valve is a failsafe closed valve which is pre-charged with a
calibrated dome (chamber) pressure prior to running. Ambient controlled valves will open
when the well pressure reaches the set point of the dome calibration. The valve will close
when the flowing pressure of the well, at the point of installation, drops below the
predetermined dome pressure. Ambient type safety valves are also generally referred to as a
'storm chokes'.
This type of valve is not limited by a flow bean which gives it a large internal diameter and,
hence, a large flow area making it suitable for high volume installations possibly producing
abrasive fluids.
Ambient type safety valves are run with an equalising assembly to allow equalisation across
the valve should it close, and a lock mandrel to locate and lock the valve in the landing nipple.
Note: Pressure differential and ambient controlled sub-surface safety valves close on pre-
determined conditions. They do not offer control until these conditions exist. In addition,
valve settings may change if flow beans become cut. Surface controlled safety valves
should be considered in such cases.
32.6 INJECTION VALVE

Injection valves are normally closed valves installed in injection wells. They act like check
valves allowing the passage of the injected fluid or gas but close when injection is ceased.
The closure mechanism is usually, either, a ball or flapper that opens when the differential
pressure from the injected medium equalises below the valve. As the injection rate is
increased to the pre-calculated rate, the differential acts on a choke bean and overcomes a
spring to move the mechanism to the fully open mode.
If the injection rate is insufficient or fluctuating, the mechanism will be damaged and may
possibly flow cut.
The flapper-type valve is the most popular as its operation is less complicated and is less
prone to damage if the injection rate is not high enough.
Note: An equalising sub should be installed between the lock mandrel and the regulator
to facilitate the equalisation of pressure.
32.7 SURFACE CONTROLLED SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVE
The SCSSV is a downhole safety device that can shut in a well in an emergency or provide a
barrier between the reservoir and the surface. As the name suggests, the valve can be
controlled from the surface by hydraulic pressure transmitted from a control panel through a
control line to the safety valve.
The remote operation of this type of valve from the surface can also be integrated with pilots,
emergency shut down (ESD) systems, and surface safety control manifolds. This flexibility of
the surface controlled safety valve design is its greatest advantage.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
In the simplest system an SCSSV is a normally closed valve held open by control line pressure
supplied by a manifold at the surface, the pressure is maintained by hydraulic pumps
controlled by a pressure pilot installed at some strategic point at the wellhead. Damage to
the wellhead or flow lines cause a pressure monitor pilot to exhaust pneumatic pressure from
a low pressure line which in turn causes a relay to block control pressure to a three- way
hydraulic controller resulting in hydraulic pressure loss in the SCSSV control line. When this
pressure is lost, the safety valve automatically closes, shutting off all flow from the tubing.
There are two main categories of SCSSV:
 Wireline Retrievable
 Tubing Retrievable
Statistics have proven that the TRSV valve is more reliable than the WRSV and that the
flapper is more reliable than the ball mechanism, therefore the TRSV flapper valve is the most
reliable of all.
SCSSVs utilise a ball or flapper type closure mechanism.
Both categories are supplied with or without internal equalising features. The equalising
feature allows the pressure to equalise across the valve so it can be re-opened. Valves without
this feature need to be equalised by applying pressure at surface.
The equalising valve has more operating parts and is less reliable than non- equalising valve,
however, with the latter, equalisation pressure is often difficult to provide and may be time
consuming
32.8 WIRELINE RETRIEVABLE SCSSV
Wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valves are located and locked, using
standard wireline methods, in a dedicated safety valve landing nipple (SVLN).
When the safety valve is set in the nipple, the packing seals against the nipple
bore below the port. The packing section of the lock mandrel forms a seal
above the port in the nipple. Control pressure, introduced through the control
line, enters the valve through the port in the housing and allows pressure to be
applied to open the valve.
Because a wireline retrievable SCSSV seats in a landing nipple installed in the

production string, it has a much smaller bore than a tubing retrievable SCSSV
for the same size of tubing. Frequently, wireline retrievable safety valves have
to be pulled prior to wireline operations being carried out below them, which
have strong implications on well safety.
Compared to a tubing retrievable SCSSV, the wireline retrievable SCSSV is

easy to replace in the case of failure. Introducing a planned maintenance
schedule in which valves are regularly pulled and serviced can prevent most
failures. However, during wireline entry operations there is also a safety risk
and care must be maintained at all times.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The components that are required for the installation of a wireline retrievable SCSSV are:
 Hydraulic control line
 Control line protectors
 Hydraulic control manifold
 Wireline retrievable safety valve
 Safety valve landing nipple
 Locking mandrel
 Wireline installation and retrieval tools for the locking mandrel.
32.8.1 RUNNING IN HOLE SCSSV
The valve is held open during RIH using a running tool and running prong. When the valve is
run as part of the completion, a flow tube or straddle is installed across the valve to hold it
open. The straddle is later retrieved using wireline methods.
The control line pressure circuit between the safety valve landing nipple and the surface
manifold is complete when the nipple seal bores are straddled by the elastomers on the valve
body and the lock mandrel
32.9 TUBING RETRIEVABLE SCSSV
Tubing retrievable safety valves operate using the same principle as wireline
SCSSVs except all the components are incorporated in one assembly which is
installed in the completion string. Some later models have rod pistons instead
of concentric piston designs.
They also have both equalising and non-equalising versions and versions that
enable the insertion of a wireline valve inside the TRSV when the operating
mechanism has failed. If the failure is due to a leaking control line then this
contingency measure is ineffective.
To enable the installation of the insert valve, the tubing retrievable valve
needs to be 'locked open' or 'locked out'; the reduced internal bore may
adversely affect production rates but the well can be safely shut in during an
emergency.
The components required for a TRSV safety system are:
 Hydraulic control line
 Control line protectors
 Hydraulic control manifold
 Tubing retrievable safety valve for insert capability:
 Wireline safety valve
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Locking mandrel
 Wireline installation and retrieval tools for the locking mandrel
 Lock-out tool for the tubing retrievable valve.
32.9.1 RUNNING IN HOLE TRSSSVs

TRSSSVs are run held open using control line pressure or a hold open sleeve, or a straddle
(protection sleeve)
32.10 LEAK OFF TESTING (INFLOW TESTING)
Leak off tests are performed immediately after Sub-Surface Safety Valves are installed. A
typical leak off test involves closing the production, kill and swab valves on the Xmas tree and
bleeding off the control line pressure to the Sub Surface Safety Valve. Tubing pressure is bled
off slowly above the valve to zero for a tubing retrievable valve and in 100 psi. (6.9 bar) stages
for a wireline retrievable valve.
The system is closed in again and tubing pressure monitored. If there is a rapid build-up, a
major leak is indicated or improper functioning of the valve; in this case the valve should be
cycled and the test repeated. After a specified shut-in period the tubing head pressure should
be below a maximum allowable pressure as specified by the operator's leak off criteria
although there is an API standard. It is extremely important that pressure data is fully and
accurately recorded.
After initial installation, leak tests should be carried out periodically; this accomplishes three
functions:
 To test the integrity of the seal in the safety valve.
 To test that the lock mandrel in a wireline retrievable valve is still properly locked.
 To cycle the valve to prevent 'freezing' in wells where they have been sitting in either
fully open or fully closed position for extended periods of time.
Only authorised personnel should conduct all the above tests on all Sub-¬Surface Safety
Valves.
32.11 RELIABILITY
Statistics on reliability indicate that Tubing Retrievable downhole safety valves are more
reliable than wireline retrievable valves. Mean times to failures are approximately 6 years for
wireline valves compared to 15 years for tubing retrievable valves. Tubing retrievable valves
are also full bore giving higher flow rates.
32.12 INSERT VALVES
Insert valves are small wireline retrievable valves which can be inserted through a "Locked
Open" failed tubing retrievable valve to provide continued production, although restricted,
with a means of shutting the well in, until a workover campaign is scheduled.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Typical wireline runs include:
 RIH to lock out the flapper valve
 RIH with a communication tool and function the communication system to the open
position. This provides control line pressure to the valve.
 RIH and set the insert valve. The insert valve straddles the control line port to provide
the hydraulic pressure integrity required to function the valve
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.13 ANNULAR SAFETY VALVES
The sub-surface safety valves discussed so far, i.e. tubing retrievable and
wireline retrievable, only provide control of the tubing. In these systems,
no annular flow control exists.
The purpose of an annular safety valve is to seal the annulus between the
tubing and the casing immediately below the wellhead. This protects
surface facilities and personnel in the event that wellhead integrity is
compromised and prevents gas escaping from the annulus in the event of
an emergency
The ASV is usually set just below the Sub Surface Safety Valve, as shallow
as possible to limit the volume of annular gas that would escape in the
event of a wellhead failure. They prevent flow from the annulus in gas lift
completions.
Annulus safety valve systems are usually associated with completions

where artificial lift or secondary recovery methods are employed e.g. gas
venting from an electric submersible pump (ESP), hydraulic pump, or gas
lift installations. Their application is to remove the potential hazard of a
large gas escape in the event there is an incident where the tubing hanger seal is breached.
They prevent flow from the annulus in gas lift installations.
There are a number of designs on the market and the variety of modes of operation is too
wide to be covered in this document, however the basic concepts are the same. With any
annulus system, there must be a sealing device between the tubing and the casing through
which the flow of gas can be closed off. This is generally a packer but may also be a casing
polished bore nipple into which a packing mandrel will seal. In the sealing device there is a
valve mechanism operated by hydraulic pressure similar to an SCSSV. The valve mechanism
opens the communication path from the annulus below to the annulus above the valve and is
fail-safe closed.
The closure mechanism may be a sliding sleeve or flapper device.
32.14 SURFACE CONTROL MANIFOLDS
Surface control manifolds are designed to provide and control the hydraulic pressure required
to hold an SCSSV open. Air powered hydraulic pumps maintain the hydraulic operating
pressure for the safety valve. The hydraulic pressure is controlled through a three-way valve,
controlled by remote pressure pilots and fire sensors. Pilot, sensor or manual activation
removes the hydraulic pressure, closing the safety valve.
Note: Activation can occur from the operation of remote-control pressure sensing pilots,
fusible plugs, plastic line, sand probes, level controllers or emergency shut down (ESD)
systems.
Surface control manifolds usually come complete with a reservoir, pressure control
regulators, relief valves, gauges, and a pump with manual override. Manifolds, in combination
with the various pilot monitors, have many different applications, e.g. controlling multiple
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
wells using individual control, multiple wells using individual pressures or any combination of
these.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Landing Nipples WEQG01.04 Level of

Importance L3.3/L4.4
Landing nipples, also known as wireline or

seating nipples are short sections of thick-
walled tubulars machined internally to provide a
locking profile and at least one packing bore.
They are supplied in ranges to suit most tubing
sizes and weights with API or premium
connections and are available in two basic
types:
 No-Go or Non-Selective
 Selective
The landing nipple is designed to provide a

profile at a specific point in the completion to
locate, lock and seal subsurface flow controls.
Their primary purpose is for receiving flow
control devices.
The flow control devices are locked into the

nipple using lock mandrels with locking dogs in matching profiles. The flow control devices
seal within the nipple bore using elastomeric seals, usually Chevron seals.
32.15 NO-GO OR NON-SELECTIVE
The non-selective nipple is a locating device and receives a locking device that uses a No-Go
for location (positioning) purposes. This requires that the OD of the locking device is slightly
larger than the No-Go diameter of the nipple. The No-Go diameter is usually a small shoulder
located below the packing bore (bottom No-Go) but in some designs, the top of the packing
bore itself is used as the No-Go. Only one No-Go landing nipple of a particular size should be
used in a completion string.
The No-Go restriction determines the largest size of equipment that can run through the
device and provides a positive location for setting. They are widely used in high angle wells
where wireline tool manipulation is difficult and weight indicator sensitivity is reduced.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
When the lock mandrel has located the no-go, it is in the correct position to allow the locking
dogs to be jarred into the locked position.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.16 SELECTIVE
In the selective system, the locking devices are designed with the same key profile as the
nipples and selection of the nipple is determined by the operation of the running tool and the
setting procedure. The selective design is full bore and allows the installation of several
nipples of the same size. In the selective system, the locking devices are designed with the
same key profile as the nipples and selection of the nipple is determined the operation of the
running tool and the setting procedure. The selective design is full bore and allows the
installation of several nipples of the same size.
Uses of landing nipples are to:
 Plug tubing from above, below or from both directions for pressure testing.
 Leak detection.
 Install safety valves, chokes and other flow control devices.
 Install bottom-hole pressure and temperature gauges.
Packer/Tubing Connection WEQG01.05 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.5
There are various methods for connecting the tubing to the production packer. The method
chosen will be determined by a number of different factors.
Stress analysis. – Is tubing movement a design feature.
Type of packer chosen – Retrievable/Permanent.
Probability of work over.
Functionality – Ease and frequency of work-over
Retrievable Packer Accessories WEQG01.06 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.5
32.16.1 Travel Joints (Telescoping Joints/PBR/ELTSR)

A travel joint is used with a retrievable packer to compensate for
tubing movement due to temperature and/or pressure changes during
treating or production.
An important aspect in a completion with a permanent packer is the

tubing/packer seal. As the packer in effect becomes part of the casing
after it is set, the tubing must connect to the packer in a manner so
that it can be released. This connection whether it is a straight stab in,
latched or otherwise, must have a seal to isolate the annulus from well
fluids and pressures. This seal usually consists of a number of seal
elements to cater for tubing movement. Seal elements are classified
into two groups:
 Premium
 Non-premium
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The premium group is used in severe or sour well conditions i.e. H2S, CO2 etc. and are
normally 'V' type-packing stacks containing various packing materials resistant to the
particular environment. The non-premium seals are for sweet service and can be either 'V'
type packing stacks or moulded rubber elements.
Locator Tubing Seal Assemblies tubing seal assemblies and Tubing Seal Extensions, are fitted
with a series of external seals providing an effective seal between the tubing and packer bore.
They also have a No-Go type locator for locating in the packer. Locator seal assemblies are
normally spaced out so that they can accommodate both upward and downward tubing
movement caused by changes in temperature and pressure.
32.16.2 Seal Bore Extensions

A seal bore extension is used to provide additional seal bore length when a longer seal
assembly is run to accommodate greater tubing movement. The seal bore
extension is run below the packer and has the same ID as the packer.
32.16.3 Anchor Tubing Seal Assemblies

Anchor tubing seal assemblies, are used where it is necessary to anchor the
tubing to a permanent packer while retaining the option to unlatch when
required. Anchor latches are normally used where well conditions require
the tubing to be landed in tension or where insufficient weight is available
to prevent seal movement.
32.16.4 Polished Bore Receptacles (PBR)

A PBR is simply a seal receptacle attached to the top of a permanent packer
or liner hanger packer in which the seal assembly lands. The through bore
can be made larger than the packer, to provide a larger flow area through
the seal assembly.
32.16.5 Tubing Seal Receptacles

A TSR is an inverted version of a PBR, a polished OD male member is attached to the top of
the packer and the female (or overshot) is attached to the tubing. The seals are contained in
the female member so that they are recovered when pulling the tubing.
Side Pocket Mandrels WEQG01.07 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.5
The Side Pocket Mandrel was originally designed for gas lift completions to provide a means
of injecting gas from the casing-tubing annulus to the tubing via a gas lift valve. However,
Side Pocket Mandrels can be used as circulating devices during well control activities.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The Side Pocket mandrel is a special

receptacle with a receiving chamber
parallel to the flow chamber and
connects to the tubing above and below
and leaves the bore of the mandrel
open for production or intervention.
The parallel receiving chamber is offset
from the string and is used to house a
number of flow control devices such as:
 Gas lift valves
 Gauges
 Dummy valves
 Chemical injection valves
 Circulation valves
 Differential dump kill valves
32.16.6 Gas Lift Valves

There are many different designs of gas lift valves for various
applications. They range from simple orifice valves to pressure
operated bellows type valves. However, they all contain check
valves to prevent tubing to annulus flow. These check valves
may leak after a period of use and should never be relied on as
barriers in a well control situation. They should be replaced
with dummy valves and the tubing pressure tested to confirm
integrity.
32.16.7 Dummy Valves

These are tubing/annulus isolation valves installed in place of
the circulating valves when circulation is not required, for
pressure testing the tubing from both sides during installation
of the completion, or when well service operations are
required.
The equalisation valve is designed to equalise pressure

between tubing and casing and/or to circulate fluid before
pulling the valve from the SPM.
The valve has two sets of packing that straddle and pack off
the casing ports in the SPM. The tubing and annulus are
isolated from each other until a pulling tool operates the
equalising device. Pressures equalise through a port before the
valve and latch is retrieved
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.16.8 Chemical Injection Valves

Designed to control the flow of chemicals injected into the production fluid at the depth of
the valve. A spring provides the force necessary to maintain the valve in the fail-safe closed
position. Reverse flow check valves, which prevent backflow and circulation from the tubing
to the casing, are included as an integral part of the valve assembly.
Injection chemicals enter the valve from the annulus in an open injection system. (This
requires the annulus to be full of the desired chemical. An alternative method is to run an
injection line from surface to the SPM.)
When the hydraulic pressure of the injected chemicals overcomes the pre-set tension in the
valve spring plus the pressure in the tubing, the valve opens. Chemicals then flow through the
crossover seat in the valve and into the tubing.
32.16.9 Circulating Valves

A circulating valve is recommended to be installed in any SPM whenever a circulating
operation is to be carried out. The circulating valve is designed to enable circulation of fluid
through the SPM without damaging the pocket.
The valve allows fluid to be dispersed from both ends allowing circulation of fluid at a minimal
pressure drop. Some valves permit circulation from the casing into the tubing only and others
to circulate fluid from the tubing into the casing only.
If a circulating valve is not used when circulating, the pocket will flow cut and a workover
would be required to replace the SPM.
32.16.10 Differential Dump Kill Valves

Differential dump/kill valves are designed to provide a means of communication between the
casing annulus and the tubing when an appropriate differential pressure occurs. Below a pre-
set differential pressure, the valve acts as a dummy valve since it uses a moveable piston to
block off the circulating ports in the valve and the side pocket mandrel.
The differential pressure necessary to open the valve will depend on the type and number of
shear screws installed. The valve will only open when the casing annulus pressure is increased
by the differential (the shear screw rating) above the tubing pressure. An increase in tubing
pressure above the casing annulus pressure will not open the valve. After opening, the piston
is locked in the up position and fluids can flow freely in either direction. The hydrostatic
pressure from the column of annulus fluid will kill the well and remedial operations can be
planned.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Sliding Side Door WEQG01.08 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
Sliding Side Doors (SSDs) or Sliding Sleeves were originally designed for zone
selection purposes however they are used as well control devices and can be
installed in the tubing above the packer to provide a means of circulating or
communicating between the tubing and the annulus when the sleeve is moved
to the open position.
SSDs are also used to:
 Bring a well into production after drilling or workover by circulating the

completion fluid out of the tubing and replacing it with a lighter under
balanced fluid.
 Kill a well prior to pulling the tubing in a workover operation.
 Select / isolate zones
The application of SSDs as a circulation device means they must be positioned

as close as possible to the packer, normally within 100 ft.
Sliding Side Door WEQG01.09 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
SSDs are available in versions that open by shifting an inner sleeve, either upwards or
downwards by using the appropriate shifting tool. When there are more than one SSD in a
well, the sleeves may be opened and closed with selective shifting tools without disturbance
of sleeves higher up in the string.
Note: Tubing and annulus pressures must be equalised before an SSD is opened to prevent
wireline tools being blown up or down the tubing. When used as circulation devices they must
be fully open during circulation activities.
Some operators will not install a SSD above the packer because it will introduce additional
potential leak paths and seal failure can lead to a workover although a pack-off can be
installed as a temporary solution. The top sub of the SSD incorporates a nipple profile and the
bottom sub has a polished bore to enable the installation of the pack-off, sometimes also
termed a straddle or isolation sleeve.
Operators who do not include SSD's as a circulation path may prefer to use a tubing punch
when a circulation path is required
Packers WEQG01.10 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.4
A packer is a device used to provide a seal between the tubing and the casing, as well as
providing a sealed tubing/casing annulus. This seal is created in conjunction with the
completion tubulars and isolates the annulus from the casing below the packer. It allows the
flow of reservoir fluids from the producing formation to be contained within the tubing up to
the surface and prevents the production casing from being exposed to well pressure and
corrosion from well effluents or injection fluids.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Packers are usually set just above the top perforations and remain in the well during normal
well production.
Service packers such as those used in well testing and cement squeezing etc. are used
temporarily and retrieved for re-use or milled.
A packer consists of:
 Case hardened slips to bite into the casing wall and hold the packer in position
against pressure and tubing forces.
 Packing elements that seal against the casing.
In general, packers are classified in two groups:
 Retrievable
 Permanent
32.17 RETRIEVABLE PACKERS

These are generally run into the wellbore on the production tubing string. As the name
implies, retrievable packers can be recovered from the well after setting by pulling it with the
completion string.
32.18 PERMANENT PACKERS

These are installed in the wellbore usually independent of the production tubing string. A
permanent packer may be considered as an integral part of the casing.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The tubing can be released from the packer leaving the packer set in the well. Tubing can
subsequently be run back and re-sealed in the packer.
Permanent packers are not attached to the production tubing and can only be removed from
the well by milling operations.
Packer Setting Procedures WEQG01.11 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.5
Mechanical set packers are set by some form of tubing movement, usually a rotation or
upward /downward motion. Others can be weight set- the tubing weight can be used to
compress and expand the sealing element. By a simple up string pull the packer is released. It
is used best in shallow low pressure wells that are straight. It is not designed to withstand
pressure differences unless a hydraulic hold down is incorporated.
 Tension-set packers are set by pulling a tension on the tubing, slacking off releases
the packer. Good for shallow wells with moderate pressure differences. The lower
pressure helps to increase the setting force on the packer. Used in a stimulation well.
 Rotation-set packer- Tubing rotation is used to set the packer to mechanically lock it
in and a left hand turn engages and a right hand turn retrieves it.
 Hydraulic-set packers use fluid pressure to drive the cone behind the slips. Once set
they remain set by the use of either entrapped pressure or a mechanical lock. They
are released by picking up the tubing. They are good for used in deviated/ crooked
holes where tubing movement is restricted or unwanted. The tubing can be hung in
neutral/ tension or compression.
 Inflatable packers - use fluid pressure to inflate a long cylindrical tube of reinforced
rubber to set the packer. Frequently used for open-hole testing in exploration wells
and for cement assurance in production wells. Also used in wells where the packer
must pass through a restriction and then set at a much larger diameter in casing or
open holes. Many variations for specific applications are available including those
capable of withstanding high pressure differentials.
 Permanent packers- Run and set on an electric wireline, drill pipe or tubing. Opposed
slips are positioned to lock it in compression. Once set this packer is resistant to
motion for either direction. Wireline uses an electric current to detonate an explosive
charge to set the packer. A release stud then frees the assembly form the packer.
Tubing can be used by applying rotation or a pull or a combination of both. They are
good in wells that have high pressure differentials or large tubing load variations and
can be set precisely. They can be set at the deepest depth of the well.
 Cement packers - In this case the tubing is cemented in place inside the casing or
open hole
Packer Setting Precautions:
 Casing Cleaned and scraped
 Appropriate sized gauge ring run
 Junk basket run to ensure no debris in the well bore
 CCL to be run
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Packer set between casing collars
Packer Pulling/Unseating Precautions:
 After unseating Let the completion Hang
 Pull completion slowly to prevent swabbing
 Shut well in – do a flow check
 Have TIW/Cross-overs on location
 Punch hole in the packer tail pipe to release trapped gas
Wireline Re-Entry Guide WEQG01.12 Level of Importance L3.4/L5.5
A wireline re-entry guide is used for the safe re-entry of wireline tools from the casing or liner
back into the tubing string. It is attached to the end of the production string or packer tailpipe
assembly and has a chamfered lead in with a full inside diameter.
Wireline re-entry guides are generally available in two forms:
 Bell Guide
 Mule-Shoe
The Bell Guide has a 45° lead in taper to guide wireline tools back into the tubing. This type of
guide has a relatively large outside diameter, and is used in completions where the end of the
tubing does not need to pass through any casing obstacles such as liner laps.
The Mule Shoe guide has the same function as the Bell Guide but features a 45° angle cut on
one side of the guide. The primary purpose of this angle is to guide the tubing past any
obstructions in the wellbore when the tubing is being run. If the tubing hangs up on the liner
lap or on the top of the packer, rotation of the tubing should allow the mule shoe guide to
kick back into the
wellbore.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.19 TUBING
Tubing refers to the pipe used to create a flow
conduit inside the wellbore, between the reservoir
and the wellhead. This flow conduit provides control
of the produced fluid and facilitates wellbore
servicing operations such as wireline and pumping
activities. Typically, tubing is run inside a casing
string or a liner but tubing can also be cemented in
slimhole wells as the production tubing.
One or more strings of tubing may be used in a

completion and this decision is a function of the
number of reservoirs to be produced, whether the fluids will be commingled or produced
separately and whether the reservoirs will be produced concurrently or sequentially.
The purpose of using tubing in a well is to convey the produced fluids from the producing
zone to the surface, or in some cases to convey fluids from the surface to the producing zone.
It should continue to do this effectively, safely and economically for the life of the well, so
care must be taken in its selection, protection and installation.
The tubing must retain the well fluids and keep them out of the annulus to protect the casing
from corrosion and well pressure which may be detrimental to future well operations such as
work-overs.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Tubing connections play a vital part in the function of the tubing. There are two types of
connection available; API and premium connections. API
connections are tapered thread connections and rely on
thread compound to seal whereas the premium thread has
at least one metal-to-metal seal. Premium connections are
generally used in high pressure wells.
Tubulars up to and including 41/2 ins. are classified as

tubing, over 41/2 ins. are classified as casing. In large
capacity wells, casing size tubulars are often installed as the
production conduit.
Tubing selection is governed by several factors:
 Anticipated well peak production rate
 Depth of well
 Casing sizes
 Well product
 Use of wire-line tools and equipment
 Pressures/temperatures
 Tubing/annulus differential pressures
Casing and tubing strings are the main parts of the well
construction. All wells drilled for the purpose of oil or gas
production (or injecting materials into underground
formations) must be cased with material with sufficient
strength and functionality.
Special connections are used to achieve gas-tight sealing

reliability and 100% connection efficiency (joint efficiency is
defined as a ratio of joint tensile strength to pipe body
tensile strength) under more severe well conditions. Severe
conditions include:
 High pressure (typically > 5,000 psi)
 High temperature (typically > 250°F)
 A sour environment
 Gas production
 High-pressure gas lift
 A steam well
 A large dogleg (horizontal well)
When premium tubulars are being run into the well it is normal in modern day wells due to
the high temperatures and gas tight requirement that the joints be torqued.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The purpose of torqueing every joint is to be able to prove the make up by downloading a
thread torque graph ensuring that all joints meets with the current Integrity requirements.
To meet various completion designs, there is a wide range of tubing sizes, wall thickness
(weights) and materials to provide resistance to tubing forces and differing well
environments. The best tubing selection is the cheapest tubing which will withstand the
external, internal and longitudinal forces it will be subjected to, and resist all corrosive fluids
in the well product.
Tubing in the main, is supplied in accordance with API specifications which have a range of
materials to resist most of the potential corrosive well conditions, but, where deeper high
pressure sour reservoirs are being developed, the API range is not suitable. To fill this gap in
the market, steel suppliers provide propriety grades. These grades are usually high chrome
steels up to 24% chrome designed for various high temperature and sour well conditions.
For ease of identification, tubing is colour coded to API specification. Some specialist
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
supplier's steels are not covered by the code and provide their own specific codes.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
32.20 BLAST JOINTS
Fluids entering the tubing from the perforations may display a jetting behaviour. This
fluid-jetting may abrade the tubing string at the point of entry, ultimately causing
tubing failure.
Blast joints are joints of pipe with a wall thickness greater than the tubing. These
joints are installed opposite the casing perforations (non-gravel packed) where
external cutting or abrasive action occurs caused by produced well fluids or sand.
They are heavy-walled tubulars available usually in 10, 15, and 20 ft. lengths. They
should be long enough to extend at least 8 ft. either side of a perforated interval for a
safety margin Blast joints delay failure from erosion at the point of entry and are
similar to flow couplings which are discussed later.
Blast joints are usually manufactured from a heat treated alloy such as 415H.
Tungsten carbide or “stellite” is sometimes used.
32.21 PERFORATED JOINTS
In wells where flowing velocities are high, a restriction in the tubing, such as a
gauge hanger, can cause false pressure and temperature readings. Vibrations in
the tool can cause extensive damage to delicate instruments. To provide an
alternative flow path, a perforated joint is installed above the gauge hanger
nipple and allows unrestricted flow around the gauge. The perforated joint is
normally a tubing joint drilled with sufficient holes to provide a flow area greater
than that in the tubing above.
32.22 FLOW COUPLINGS
Flow couplings, are heavy-walled tubulars installed above or below any completion
component causing a restriction to flow which may cause flow turbulence such as wireline
nipples, SSDs, SCSSV landing nipples etc. and combat internal erosion.
They are manufactured from harder materials and have a thicker wall thickness than the
tubulars they protect so that, if erosion is experienced, the flow coupling will still maintain
pressure integrity over the projected life of the well.
In higher velocity wells, such as high pressure gas wells or injection wells, a flow coupling may
also be placed below restrictions.
PS Flow Couplings and Blast joints serve the same purpose. Blast joints are fitted below the
packer across the formation where flow couplings are fitted above the packer to smooth the
flow
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
33.0 WEQG – RIG UP/DOWN
How to Check Equipment WEQG03.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Before work is performed, check the type of

equipment needed with respect to the
pressure, dimensions,
Temperature, and well fluids (water, gas, oil

or much sand).
The first thing you must do before rigging /

installation is to verify that equipment is
labelled and has all certificates. When rigging
begins, remove all protectors, and threads
and seal surfaces are cleaned and checked.
Flanges are checked and packing rings
replaced.
Checks must include:
 Correct pressure class on all equipment.
 Correct dimensions
 Correct crossovers (flanges) on all equipment
 Packing rings are of the right type and are approved for their intended use
 Correct torque given from the manufacturer is used
Before the well is completed, all valves are tested. The minimum requirements are set by API,
but several companies may operate with more stringent requirements.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
34.0 WEQJ – ANNULUS PRESSURE MONITORING
Monitor Annuli Pressures WEQJ01/01 Level of Importance L3.3/4.5
Definition of an annulus
The area between two concentric circles = “a ring shaped part, figure or space”
The annular voids form the principal barriers between the produced fluids and the
atmosphere.
 By monitoring the annulus pressures we are able to assess the condition and integrity
of the well tubulars.
 Anomalous annulus pressures may give the first indication of down hole problems
although it does not automatically mean there is a leak
 Thermal expansion or ingress of formation fluid could also cause an increase in

annulus pressure, regular sampling of annulus fluids may also be undertaken
 Annulus temperatures should also be considered
Abnormal Annulus Pressures WEQJ02.01 Level of Importance L4.5
This could be the first sign of a leak or can be caused by thermal expansion to the tubing due
to the high flowing temperatures. There are various ways for bring the pressures back to
normal, which would be constant monitoring along with a procedure called lubricate and
bleed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Tubing hanger (Upper annulus barrier)
1. SC-SSSV (Sub-surface barrier)
2. Control line
3. Tubing (Vertical barrier)
4. A annulus (tubing-casing)
5. Gas lift valves (in SPMs)
6. Expansion joint: Tubing Seal Receptacle
7. Anchor Seal Assembly
8. Production packer
9. Packer sealing element (Lower barrier)
10. Tailpipe
11. Wireline Entry Guide
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
35.0 WIRELINE EQUIPMENT
35.1 WEQ – COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
35.2 WIRELINE
Wireline was first used in the oilfield the early 1920s as a means of accurately measuring well
depth. It started as a flat steel measuring line.
Otis was the first company to use a circular wire and to create special wireline units, often
mounted on trailers.
Slickline uses small diameter continuous solid wire for manipulating various tools in live or
dead wells.
Wireline equipment is very portable and rig-up time can be quite fast.
High deviations can cause problems with Slickline, as gravity is required to keep the wire
moving down the wellbore. In highly deviated wells, the wireline toolstring lies against the
side of the tubing and the weight comes off causing the tools to stop moving downwards.
Slickline can be used for a very wide range of jobs such as:
 Running and pulling flow control devices.
 Opening and closing circulation devices.
 Checking the inside of the tubing for debris, waxes, scale, corrosion, etc.
 Cleaning the inside of the tubing and the completion components.
 Running and pulling gas lift or chemical injection equipment.
 Running and pulling DHSVs.
 Bottom hole sampling.
 Running temperature and pressure surveys.
 Depth measurement.
 Fishing for lost objects and debris.
Slickline uses a continuous length of single solid strand wire (like piano wire) whereas braided
line uses a continuous length of stranded wire (like logging cable). This may have one or more
electrical conductor wires inside in which case it is called Electric Line or e-line .or it may be
for heavy duty work.
The principles are exactly the same although the well control mechanisms are slightly
different.
35.3 SLICKLINE
Slickline is a method of mechanical manipulation of devices downhole and is only capable of
pulling or pushing (by jarring action). Rotation is not possible.
There are thousands of different tools that have been designed for use with slickline although
they all operate in much the same way.
The main advantages of Slickline are the relatively low cost compared to other intervention
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Methods such as portability, speed of rig up/down, running/pulling speed and the ability to
work on live wells.
The main disadvantage is that it is very easily damaged due to its thin and flexible nature. It
also has limited use when well deviation is approaching 70o
There are various sizes of Slickline available today; the main ones are listed below.
 0.072"
 0.082"
 0.092"
 0.105"
 0.108"
 0.125"
The last two sizes are probably the most commonly used. The lines themselves can be made
out of a great variety of exotic steels to withstand the harsh downhole environment and are
available in reels of up to 30000 ft.
Modern technology has ensured that the quality and consistency of a spool of Slickline is to a
very high standard. H2S resistance is very good.
Reels of Slickline have a finite life and the wireline service companies check to ensure that the
wire remains up to standard. There is a simple torsion test (by twisting) which is performed to
check the wire. The manufacture and testing of slickline should be to API 9A specification.
Typically a reel of 0.108" wire will have a breaking strength of between 1720 lbf and 2730 lbf.
When used, the wire should not be worked past its elastic limit, which is usually
approximately
50% of the breaking strength. The strength of a particular size of wire will vary according to
the material from which it is made.
35.4 SURFACE EQUIPMENT
A Slickline Package is composed of 3 basic components:
 Power pack
 Winch
 Pressure Control Equipment
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
35.4.1 POWER UNIT
Power units (power packs) come in a variety of types and

sizes to suit the well location and the work to be
performed. They can be very small trailer mounted units
for simple shallow land well jobs that do not require heavy
downhole work or large containerised units with very
sophisticated controls for deep and deviated offshore wells
etc.
Most power units are diesel driven although some offshore

units that regularly work on the same platform are
electrically powered. The unit drives one or two hydraulic
pumps to control the winch.
Most slickline units have their power packs and winches separate, however modern, larger
units tend to be enclosed in one container including a cabin for the operator.
35.4.2 WINCH
The wire is stored on a drum located in front of the

operator on the winch unit. Power from the hydraulic
power pack is applied to the drum usually via a four
speed gearbox. There are controls that can select
forward or reverse and a handbrake for the drum.
There may be more than one drum of wire on a winch
unit but only one drum is in use at a time and
combinations of slick-line and braided line or slick-line
and electric line are common. Many units are capable
of running at wire speeds of up to 3000 ft/min.
The wire is spooled off the drum and is wrapped

around the measuring head to give the operator
depth measurement. Before running in the hole each time, the operator resets the depth
counter a weight indicator displays the weight of the tools and the tool-string as well as any
additional forces generated during jarring etc zero.
35.5 WIRELINE CLASSIFICATION - ELECTRIC LINE
Braided Line with one or more electric conductors in the middle is called Electric Line and is
used exclusively for conveying tools down hole that require or generate an electric signal.
Electric lines have a much-reduced breaking strain compared to braided line without any
conductors. Some electric lines have only one conductor and are called mono-conductor
cables. They are commonly 3/16", 7/32", 5/16", 3/8" or 7/16".
The smaller sizes are used for through tubing well servicing work whilst the larger sizes are
usually used for smaller suites of open-hole logs. Other electric lines have 7 conductors
(logging cables), are used exclusively for open-hole logging and are usually 15/32" or 17/32".
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
These logging cables are normally used on drilling rigs with well control using a full column of
kill fluid. Occasionally cables with 2 conductors are used.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The main uses of electric line are:
 Data gathering
 Perforating
 Chemical cutting
 Setting packers and bridge

plugs
 Determining free point

(stuck point)
Weight Indicator Reading @110° = 811Lbs
811Lbs ÷ 1.14716 (constant at 110°) x 1.41422

(constant at 90°)
811Lbs ÷ 1.14716 = 706.963 Lbs
763.963Lbs x 1.41422 = 1000Lbs
Actual weight reading = 1000 Lbs
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
35.6 SLICKLINE
Slickline is a high-strength mono-filament

steel line and is available in common sizes
of
0.082”, 0.092”, 0.108” and 0.125”. These are

also supplied for various service conditions.
Being slick the OD of the wire is easy to seal
around using a simple packing device called
a stuffing box whereas the cable requires a
grease seal arrangement.
Braided Line
Braided line is available in a variety of sizes

(ODs) and in two basic types, with or
without electric conductor cables.
Braided Line without an electric conductor

in the middle is sometimes called sand line
and is used for heavy-duty wireline. Heavy-
duty fishing winches are nearly always
braided line and do exactly the same as
slick-line. It has a very much greater
breaking strain than slick-line and is
commonly 3/i6 inch, 7/32 inch, 1/4 inch or
5/i6 inch diameter.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
36.0 WWA – COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
Surface Equipment WWA.01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Wireline relies entirely on the lubricator system to provide primary pressure control.
Secondary pressure control is provided by the wireline BOPs and tertiary well control may be
available in the form of another wireline cutting valve, either contained in the Xmas tree or as
a shear/seal valve or BOP installed on top of the Xmas tree.
The various pressure control barrier systems are:
Primary
 Stuffing box and lubricator system.
 Check valve (Internal BOP) if the wireline breaks and is ejected from the lubricator.
 Xmas tree valves when installing into, or removing tools from, the lubricator
Secondary
 Wireline BOP rams/valve which can close and seal around the wire.
 Xmas tree upper master, if the wire is broken and ejected.
 SCSSV, if wire is above it.
The BOP rams can be used for stripping wire out of a well but only when absolutely
necessary. Stripping through the BOPs is only carried out to find the free end of the wire to
enable wireline recovery.
Tertiary
 Wireline cutting valve/BOP.
 Xmas tree valve, if absolutely necessary.
Slick-Line Rig up Configuration WWA01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
36.1 SLICK-LINE LUBRICATOR/SINGLE BOP STACK ARRANGEMENT
Operating Elements
 The stuffing box is adjustable (manually, or more commonly hydraulically) to cater for
packing wear.
 The lubricator is an intrinsic part of the primary well control system along with the
stuffing box.
 If the stuffing box leaks, the wireline BOP wire/blind rams can be closed on the wire to
repair the packing.
 If the rams leak, the wire can be cut with a wire cutting actuator or the upper master
valve, although this may lead to valve damage.
36.2 SLICKLINE LUBRICATOR/DUAL BOP STACK ARRANGEMENT
Operating Elements
 Stuffing box is adjustable (manually, or more commonly hydraulically) to cater for

packing wear.
 Lubricator is an intrinsic part of the primary well control system along with the
stuffing box.
 If the stuffing box leaks, the upper wireline BOP wire/blind rams can be closed on the
wire to repair the packing.
 If the upper rams leak, the lower rams can be used.
 If the wire is broken and expelled from the lubricator, the swab valve will be closed
 If the rams leak, the wire can be cut with a wire cutting actuator or the upper master
valve, although this may lead to valve damage.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Braided Rig up Configuration WWA01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 The grease seal pressure is adjustable for varying well pressures.
 If the grease seal fails, both rams can be closed on the wire. The lower ram is inverted
so that grease can be injected to create a seal.
 If the wire is broken and expelled from the lubricator, two Xmas tree valves must be
closed to provide double isolation.
 If the rams leak, the wire can only be cut with a wire cutting actuator.
36.3 ELECTRIC LINE LUBRICATOR/TRIPLE BOP STACK ARRANGEMENT
Operating Elements
 The grease seal pressure is adjustable for varying well pressures.
 The lubricator is an intrinsic part of the primary well control system along with the
grease seal.
 If the grease seal fails, both the wireline BOP wire rams can be closed on the wire. The
lower ram is inverted so that grease can be injected to create a seal.
 If the wire is broken and expelled from the lubricator, the blind ram plus a
 Xmas tree valves must be closed to provide double isolation (or two tree valves). The
safety check valve would also be closed preventing hydrocarbons or gas into the
atmosphere.
 If the rams leak, the wire can only be cut with a wire cutting actuator.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
37.0 WWA – PRESSURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Surface Equipment WWA01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Not all surface equipment has a pressure control function even though they must withstand
pressure. Examples of this include tool traps and chemical injection equipment. Here are
some central components that are a part of pressure control equipment for slick and for
braided wireline.
Grease control Head WWA01.06 Importance

Level L3.10/L410
Since a braided cable quickly wears out rubber packers and because there
will be leakage between the strands of the cable, a fluid based system is
developed to create a seal around and inside the cable when it is run into
the well. The cable can also rotate freely so that it does not break. We call
this system a grease injection control system. The most important part of
this system is the grease control head. Liquid grease is pumped into the
grease head where it settles around the cable and penetrates into it. This
happens at the same time as the cable is run through small tubes with
little clearance, so that only a thin film is spread between the tube and
cable. The tubes are called “flow tubes” and it is the fluid friction in the
liquid grease that prevents the well bore fluid from leaking out. A head is
built up of several tubes, depending on how large a pressure is to be
contained. One tube holds about 1000 to 1450 psi and one head cannot
be made up of less than 2 tubes. Normally, we use a minimum of three
and often four or five sections of flow tubes.
If problems develop with the seal, we can stop running the line and
tighten a stuffing box for braided cable that is placed at the top of the
grease control head. This can only be used when the wireline is standing
still until the system works again. At the very top of the grease control
head there is usually a wiper; it can be rubber elements that carefully
tighten around the wireline while it is being pulled out of the hole, or it can
be a pneumatic wiper that blows the wiper clean. In the lower part of the
grease control head we most often find some form of a check valve based
on a seat that the wireline runs through. A ball that fits the seat lies
waiting on the side of the wireline.
Safety Check Union WWA01.08 Level of

Importance L3.10/L4.10
If the wireline is cut and blown out of the grease control head, the
ball will be filled up in the seat and stop the flow of well fluids.
This part is not incorporated on older versions of the grease
control head. Instead one can use a separate valve which is
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
designed for this It has a quick release union on the top and bottom. It can also be used in
connection with slick-line operations if is desired.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Flow tubes are available in a range of sizes with small

increments to provide the most efficient seal over the
life of the cable which will reduce in the overall OD of
the cable with usage. The fit of the wire v flow tube
should be as tight a fit as possible to create a better
seal. If the flow tubes are too large for the cable then it
will not create an effective barrier and too much grease
will be used.
2–3 Flow tubes = 0 – 2,000 psi
3 - 4 Flow tubes = 2,000 – 5,000psi
4 -5 Flow Tubes = 5,000 – 10,000psi
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Stuffing box WWA01.07 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
The stuffing box is the most central element in the rig-up for operations with slick line. There
are several different types and manufacturers. We will look at the basic structure and function
of stuffing boxes with mechanical and hydraulic pressure.
In the picture above you can see some common packer types. It is common to use a
combination of hard and soft types, with hard on the top and bottom and soft in the middle.
Be sure that there is the right amount of packers or it may lead to the piston and upper
Bushing/gland not contacting the packing.
This can lead to the packers being blown out and having an uncontrolled hydrocarbon
release. Damage to the stuffing box can also occur.
A stuffing box for wireline operations is not assisted by well pressure. We tighten by
compressing the piston, using hydraulic fluid, downwards forcing the upper gland against the
packing and the lower gland.
There are two ways of doing this, either by a mechanically or hydraulically.
Hydraulically – Using a hydraulic hand pump, pressure is applied to the packing nut, which
can usually be tightened manually if necessary when rigging up. The mechanical packing nut
is composed of a hollow screw that is tightened by hand. There is usually a “snaptite”
coupling installed on the hydraulic packing nut. A hose and a hand pump is connected to this
for remote operation
Check that the return mechanism in the piston works and that the pressure is bled off before
the hose is disconnected and the stuffing box is repacked. Each time the packing is replaced,
the stuffing box must be inspected for damage and wear. Make note of whether there are
spacious or oval holes, and if there are shavings of cable. A stuffing box shall be overhauled
regularly so that we have good packing at all times when we are running wireline into the
hole. A newly packed stuffing box should stay tight without the need to apply hydraulic
pressure.
With wire in the hole the stuffing box is the

primary barrier, if the wire is broken for any
reason then the primary barrier is the “internal
BOP/plunger”
This is used when a wireline operation with slick

line is performed in a well that is under pressure.
It creates a pressure seal between the well
pressure and atmosphere while allowing the
wireline to move freely through it. It is comprised
of a packer chamber that contains a stack of
packers that can be tightened around the
wireline as the packers get worn out. The
stuffing box has a piston with a rubber cone that
is pressed up, creating a seal between the well
pressure and atmosphere that prevents
leakage/blowout if the wireline snaps and comes out.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
37.1 INTERNAL BOP (PLUNGER)

In the lower part of the stuffing box sits a plunger with hole through
which the wireline goes through. If the wireline is cut and blown out
of the hole, well pressure will push the plunger up, and a rubber cone
on the end is compressed by well pressure and seals the hole. This
part is often called the internal BOP or plunger.
37.2 HYDRAULIC STUFFING BOX PACKER
The stuffing box packing nut is operated by hydraulic from a hand pump.
The pump should only be operated when the wire is stationary. When
pressure is applied to the packing nut it pushes the piston down against the
upper packing gland, which in turn compresses the packing against the
lower packing gland, thus sealing the pressure in the well.
37.3 IN SITU TEST SUB
In-situ test subs are installed between the lower lubricator section and the
wireline valve and are designed to significantly reduce operating costs, by
removing the need to pressure test with glycol before every wireline run. After
the initial pressure test of the complete pressure control package, the tools are
changed out via the special TIS acme, secondary quick union connection on the
pressure test sub. The secondary quick union connection has stepped seal bore
diameters complete with o’ ring seals and an injection port, that allows the union
to be externally pressure tested. Due to the small volume of fluid required,
testing of the secondary union can be carried out with a hand.
37.4 TOOL CATCHER
The Tool-catcher is designed to engage the fishing neck of a rope socket. The Tool-
catcher is placed on top of the lubricator just below the Ball Check Valve. The rope
socket is released from the Tool-catcher by hydraulic pressure (typically 1200psi). It
operates by hydraulic pressure moving a piston down onto a set of finger collets,
which open and release the tool-string.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Note: The Tool-catcher only catches the tool-string when hydraulic pressure is not applied to
it. When tools are released from the Tool-catcher it must be returned to the catch position
before any other operation commences.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
37.5 CHEMICAL INJECTION SUB
The Chemical Injection Sub is designed to allow the injection of either a de-
icing agent (i.e. Methanol or Glycol) or a corrosion inhibitor. It is mounted
just below the Stuffing Box or Grease Injection Head. It has replaceable felt
packing which are kept constantly wet by chemical injection and therefore
act as wipers to the wireline passing through it.
37.6 QUICK UNIONS
Quick Unions have Acme type square threads

and seal using an O ring. The connection should
be made up only hand tight and then backed off
part of a turn. It is important that the O ring is
inspected for damage prior to making a
connection.
The lowest section of lubricator is usually of a

larger diameter as it must contain the tool that is
being run or pulled. The upper sections only have
to contain the tool-strings and can therefore be
of smaller diameter.
The bottom section is fitted with a needle valve

for bleeding off any trapped pressure above the
BOP or wellhead before breaking out the lubricator and changing the tool-strings.
Hydrocarbons are usually bled to a closed drain.
Prior to applying any pressure, the lubricator section must be checked to ensure that its rated
pressure is sufficient for the work being performed and that all seals and sealing surfaces are
in good condition.
37.7 LUBRICATOR
The lubricator allows the tool-strings to be inserted into or removed from the
well under pressure and is installed between the BOP's and the stuffing box.
There will probably be three or more sections of lubricator in use. As with all
wireline surface equipment, the sections are usually connected by Quick
Unions. A second needle valve should be fitted to the bottom lubricator section to
provide double barrier protection and so that a pressure gauge can be fitted.
Typically lubricator sections are 8 ft. long and sufficient lubricator must be used
to accommodate tool-strings being recovered from the well including the item
that is being pulled.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Additional lengths of lubricator will be required for fishing operations.
Lubricators are available in different pressure ratings for both standard and "sour" service. It
is usually considered that all lubricators used for pressures over 5000 psi should have the
quick unions welded rather than screwed to the main tube.
Pressure Testing
Lubricators are normally tested to manufacturers test pressure or working pressure at regular
intervals to satisfy certification requirements.
Field Testing
Lubricator sections are usually pressure tested after rigging up on location prior to opening
the well. Various company policies may have different testing requirements for pressure
testing on the well however, it is common practice at most locations to pressure test to a
minimum of expected Closed In Tubing Head Pressure (CITHP).
Maximum Working Pressure (psi) Colour

3,000 Red
5,000 Dark Green
10,000 White
15,000 Yellow
Colour Coding and Pressure Rating of Pressure Control Equipment
The first band indicates if the service is Standard or Sour:
 Standard service has no band.
 Sour service has an orange band.
The second band indicates the temperature of the service:
 Standard service (-30°C to 250°C) has no band.
 Low temperature service (below –30°C) has a blue band.
 High temperature service (above 250°C) has a purple band.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
38.0 WWA – SLICK-LINE/BRAIDED LINE SHEAR SEAL BOP
BOP Principles of Operation/Use WWA02.01/02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The BOP is mounted below the lubricator and, in normal operations; it is usually the
connection above the BOP that is broken to allow the insertion or removal of the tool-string.
This is where the quick test sub is situated.
The BOP is the secondary barrier when there is wire in the hole and they are usually mounted
as close as possible to, or on top of the Xmas tree, for ease of access and to minimise the
number of potential leak paths (connections) below the BOP. Fitting the BOP close to the
Xmas tree also serves to maximise the length of the lubricator.
With the BOP closed and sealing around the wire, equipment above can be depressurised and
repaired.
If tools become stuck in the hole, a means must be found to cut the wire as close to the top of
the toolstring as possible. In this case the wireline BOP's would have be closed as the tree
valves cannot close because of the wire through them.
With the BOP closed and sealing around the wire:
 Close the manual locking stems on the BOP
 Bleed down the lubricator
 Inflow test the BOP
 Break out the lubricator
A cutter can then be attached to the wire ready to be dropped to cut the wire at the rope
socket when the BOP is opened.
38.1 ADDITIONAL BOP'S
If a routine operation turns into a fishing job, additional BOP's may be required as well as
additional lubricator to accommodate the fished tool-string.
38.2 EQUALISING VALVES
BOP's are fitted with equalising valves across the rams. Before opening the rams, pressure
must be equalised to prevent damage.
Occasionally, if wireline work is to be done using both slickline and braided line, both sets of
BOP's will be installed at all times so that there is less work changing from one to the other.
Triple BOP's are available which can be dressed, for example, with slickline rams at the top
and dual braided line rams at the bottom.
Slick-line BOP's hold pressure from below only. Wellbore pressure acts to help keep the BOP
closed and maintains the seal around the cable.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
This is a list over situations where a BOP will be activated:
 If a leak occurs anywhere above the BOP.
 Fishing operations.
 Spooling broken wire back onto the drum
 Dropping cutter bars when fishing
Braided Line BOP Operating Procedure WWA.02.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Using slick-line requires only one BOP ram that will seal around the wire when the ram is
closed. Using braided cable on the other hand requires two rams, where the top ram is normal
and the lower ram is inverted, which allows grease to be pumped in between the rams and
form a seal around the cable when the BOP is shut-in.
Braided cable BOP is designed to seal around a static cable all movement should cease. Dual
rams should be configured with the
lower set of rams inverted and the top
set of rams normal with a grease
injection port in between This allows the
grease to be injected into the cavity
between the two rams and maintain
pressure control. By filling the cavity
with grease at a higher wellhead
pressure the grease fills the spaces and
prevents escape.
A dual BOP should be tested prior to

rigging up on a test stump. The BOP
should be tested after rigging it up by
filling the stack, place a one piece test
rod across both the rams and close them
and apply pressure thru the grease injection port.
If the design incorporates a weep hole then particular attention must be made to monitor and
check that the weep hole does not leak.
If mud or completion fluids be seen coming from the weep hole then the shaft mud seal is
leaking. Operations should cease immediately and the seal replaced.
If hydraulic fluid is leaking from the port then the same action must take place as the mud
seal leak.
If it is not possible to repair leak, given the present ongoing operations then plastic packing
can be used as a temporary solution.
It would be normal for the grease pump to stroke on an intermittent basis, this is due to the
grease seeping from the rams and the pump pressure compensating for the pressure loss. A
dual BOP with an inverted ram holds grease pressure not well pressure.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
38.3 BOP CONVERSION PROCEDURE
 Lower rams must be inverted for using

braided cable or E-Line
 Ram seals and guides must be

inspected or changed for the specific
cable being used
 A grease injection line with a one way

check valve to the injection port on the
dual BOP
 The wireline valve must be pressure

tested on a stump with a one piece test
rod.
 After rigging up the valve should be

function tested
 Snaptite connections to be checked and functioned to ensure the one way check
valve is fitted
Testing Braided/Electric Line BOP WWA02.04 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
PS Only use one piece test rods
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Braded Line Barriers WWA02.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The system for braided line is very similar to slickline. Pressure control is provided by:
Primary
 Grease seal and lubricator system.
 Check valve if the wire breaks and is ejected from the lubricator.
 Xmas tree valves when installing into, or removing tools from, the riser.
Secondary
 Two wireline BOP rams (in conjunction with a grease pump) that can close and seal
around the wire.
 Xmas tree upper master, if the wire is broken and ejected.
 SCSSV, if wire is above it.
Tertiary
 Wireline cutting valve.
 Shear/seal valve or BOP installed directly onto the top of the Xmas tree.
38.4 BOP’S PLACEMENT AND

APPLICATION
On a land well, it is natural to set the BOP

directly on top of the tree. This achieves
the best access and minimizes possible
leaks paths in the rig up. This will often be
different offshore, as we use risers to place
the BOP at the deck level where it is easier
to access it.
If you are placed in a situation where

wireline has to be fished out of the well,
one must ensure that there is enough
lubricator over the BOP that the entire fishing string can be pulled in plus at least one metre.
If fishing with another cable type than the one that was lost, the BOP must be rigged up for
all the types of cable in the well.
It is often an advantage to have a lot of room in the PCE during complex fishing operations.
If possible, rig up from the drill floor and use an extra BOP and shear ram down at the Xmas
tree.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Also, remember to ensure that you have the means to lift off and on the lubricator and BOPs
as required during the operation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
BOP Positioning WWA01.03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
The BOP is used to control well pressure and to operate safely at all times. It seals around the
wire when stationary. It can be single, double, or triple. It is comprised of a shut-in
arrangement of rams and a sealing surface called a ram seal. The shut-in operation can be
mechanical or hydraulic. All BOPs can be closed manually in an emergency but can only be
o
p
e
n
e
d
u
n
d
e
r
hydraulic pressure.
Shear ram WWA02.08

The shear ram is used to cut the wireline

and secure the well if it is not possible to
achieve a seal around the wire. It can also
be used to cut the cable in a controlled
fashion, for example during fishing
operations. In some cases it is the master
valve on the Xmas tree that is defined as
the shear ram (by design). Otherwise, it is
either rigged up as a manual shear ram or
a shear ram integrated in the lowest part
of the BOP. This BOP will cut more than
one strand of wire or cable but will not cut
a tool string.
When used in conjunction with sub-sea tree plugs a modified short tool string should be used
or a sacrificial piece of hollow stem needs to be aligned across the shear seal Bop to affect a
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
cut.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
39.0 RIGGING UP
Equipment requirements WWD01.01

Before a job is to be carried out, check

what type of equipment is needed with
respect to the pressure, dimensions and
well fluids. This is information the
operator shall provide in connection with
the intervention preparation if the
information is unknown to the service
company. The job is then planned with
regards to what should be done and what
downhole equipment is to be used.
Finally, a list of specifications for the
necessary equipment can be set up.
Ensure that all equipment needed is
available.
Equipment Check WWD WWD01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
The first thing that must be done before rigging up is

to ensure that the equipment is labelled and has the
required certificates. When rig-up commences, all
protectors should be removed, all threads, sealing
surfaces cleaned and verified. The O-rings are
checked and replaced if necessary. The BOP should
be function tested, leak tested on the test stump
before the well is shut-in.
Before the well is entered, the PCE must be function

and leak tested as described in the company
procedure.
The whole rig-up is to be tested up to the well’s highest expected shut-in pressure, or a
minimum of CITHP
Before pressure/leak testing of the whole rig-up, the tool string must be pulled to the top of
the lubricator so that we avoid damaging the rope socket at the underside of the stuffing box,
or accidentally damaging the tool-string by surging pressure. Checklists are to be used to
ensure that nothing is forgotten or omitted. If some part of the equipment does not work or
there is a leak, it must be repaired before the job can be restarted.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Critical Isolation WWD01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
 Before well intervention, the well intervention team (WIS) shall assume control of the
Xmas tree and the subsurface safety valve (DHSV) for the well in question.
 Well control shall be assumed when the area authority Production, signs the form for
Take-over of well control to WIS or the tool pusher. All handover between operation
and well intervention team must be followed by an isolation confirmation certificate.
 An Isolation confirmation certificate shall be used for rigging that may reduce the
integrity level of the Xmas tree and removal of hydraulic connections for emergency
shutdown.
 In connection with well intervention, operation of the Xmas tree valves and/or
subsurface safety valves (DHSV) shall be conducted by WIS without requiring a
separate isolation certificate.
39.1 EXCEPTIONS
Valve interface from well intervention to process facility (e.g. wing valve, valves to closed
drain) and production header that require a separate isolation confirmation certificate
When well intervention is complete, WIS shall deliver the Xmas tree and subsurface safety
valve (DHSV) to the area authority production by signing the form for Takeover of well
control.
39.2 WIRELINE BARRIER PHILOSOPHY
The barriers described are barriers when wire is in the hole. If the UMV does not have wire
cutting ability, there should be a cutter valve on top of the tree to act as the tertiary barrier.
If the wire breaks and is blown out of the stuffing box, the swab valve becomes the secondary
barrier and the stuffing box remains the primary barrier. Once the swab valve has been closed
and the lubricator bled down and broken out, the swab valve becomes the primary barrier.
It is important to remember that the barrier classification can change during an operation.
e.g. The barriers available with a tool-string in the hole will be different to the barriers
available when the tools are in the lubricator.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
40.0 WWA - WIRELINE PCE – PRESSURE RETENTION
Every BOP should be labelled with the pressure class it is certified for. When parts or packing
elements are to be replaced, it should be in accordance with the part number for the BOP in
question. When shut-in, common ram type BOP pressure assisted if the pressure from above
the ram is lower than that on well side.
Male and female couplings are usually installed on the hydraulic cylinders so that they cannot
be incorrectly connected. Even so, it is still important to check that the hoses are correctly
connected and that the BOP is function tested after connecting.
A number of different seals are used depending on what the BOP is to be used for. Therefore,
you just be able to distinguish between the different types available
Changing a seal in the BOP WWA07.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
From time to time in the span of an

operation we need to change the
equipment setup. This can, for example,
involve changing the inner seal from slick
to braided wireline, or vice versa, or
changing from one dimension to another.
If you are informed about the equipment
being used and what the next step in the
operation is, you will know what needs to
be changed. While changing packer
elements in the BOP, you should check
for the presence of significant damage to
the equipment. Today, variable seals are most commonly used, which seal around the most
common types of wireline.
Sealing Elements WWA07.03

Check the seals and see if we need to change

them due to damage or wear. Usually, O rings
and packing elements are used until 80 % is
left if there is no damage on them.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Sealing Elements Damage Inspection WWA04.04 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.4
Assess Equipment/Seal Damage WWA07.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
If the equipment or seals are damaged, we must consider the impact this has or can have on
the operation. If the damage is insignificant, work may continue, but if it is big the operation
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
should be halted until parts or the entire module is replaced.
Explosive Decompression WWA07.06 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.3
Explosive decompression (ED), also referred to as rapid gas decompression (RGD), is a failure
mechanism of elastomer seals which is due to the rapid decompression of gaseous media.
When elastomer seals are exposed to high-pressure gas at elevated temperatures for a
prolonged period of time the gas absorbs into the polymer compound. When the external
pressure is reduced, the gas dissolved within the elastomer comes out of solution to form
micro bubbles. As the gas expands, it will permeate out of the seal.
However, if the rate of decompression and expansion is high, the trapped gas within the seal
expands beyond the elastic limit to contain the gas bubbles, will causing fissuring, resulting in
seal failure.
40.1 SECONDARY BARRIERS - APPLICATIONS, PLACEMENT AND STRUCTURE
In relation to IWCF, it is common to regard everything that cuts as a tertiary barrier.
In NORSOK, these valves are regarded as secondary barriers. This can be a hydraulic main
valve or a separately rigged up gate valve that can cut wireline. This can also include a BOP
that is equipped with shear rams to cut a wireline at the same time as it is equipped with
packers that seal the well after the cutting. If we work with ordinary slick line we can use all of
the above mentioned alternatives, but if we have braided cable, greater force is required to
cut. This is achieved with cutting rams in the BOP.
If a situation arises where more than one cable must be cut at the same time, this kind of BOP
has the necessary capacity, to cut no more than 8-10 wirelines at the same time.
It is also worth noting that all the mentioned shear rams are designed to cut wireline, not
tools or tool strings. If heavier operations take place on a well, an appropriate sized shear
valve is rigged up directly on the Xmas tree. This kind of shear valve also has the task of
cutting tools and tool strings that are run in the well.
Testing Requirements WWE01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Whenever a live well is being worked on or being tested, consideration must be given to the
surface handling of produced wellbore fluids. When bleeding off intervention surface pressure
equipment and when circulating a well, there will be gas and/or oil produced. These fluids
must be disposed of in a safe manner.
Gas would generally go to the flare and hydrocarbons to an enclosed tank or drain.
There is no one correct method of handling wellbore fluids since the circumstances of each
job will be different. The venting of surface equipment may require a line to a closed drain on
a platform but can be safely allowed to escape to atmosphere in a desert location. Circulation
may be required to the production facility, test separator and the flare on a platform or just to
a flare pit in a desert location.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The following questions must all be considered.
 How much fluid will be produced?
 Will it be gas or oil?
 Is there any H2S present?
 Is venting from the equipment safe without additional precautions?
 Can the fluids be flared or is there too much water?
 What facilities already exist for handling the fluids?
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Test procedures WWE1.01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
All equipment that is used in operations on the well are to be pressure classified and certified.
Pressure testing and certification occurs at an approved workshop. It is still necessary to test
the equipment each time it is used. This is normally regarded as leak testing, even though it
is most often called pressure testing, something that, according to NORSOK, there is only an
opportunity for if testing on the equipment occurs at maximum work pressure. A low
pressure and high pressure test are used in accordance with applicable procedures.
In most cases, the BOP is tested before rigging up pon a test stump but if it is not, testing
must occur after the equipment is rigged up. The test procedures for wireline operations will
vary somewhat from place to place and country to country. Procedures will be found in the
company based or in API Make sure that you have access to the relevant procedures and that
you follow them. Whatever details are given in the procedure must be adapted to the
equipment rig up. This means that one must consider, for example, whether an inverted BOP
is used. An inverted BOP must always be tested from above.
Testing of the BOP in a pressure control situation is called an inflow test. It will be carried out
approximately as follows:
 Close the BOP.
 Screw the stems in for mechanical protection.
 Bleed off the lubricator.
 Stop bleeding and monitor pressures
 If the pressure does not rise, the lubricator can be removed.
This description of closing and testing the BOP will primarily be used if a leak occurs on
equipment above the BOP and when fishing. In other, more general alarm and emergency
situations, we will primarily prioritize pulling out of hole and possibly getting ready to cut the
wireline so that the Xmas tree and (if necessary) the sub surface safety valve can be closed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
41.0 WWG - SURFACE LEAK OR MALFUNCTION
41.1 PROCEDURE FOR SHUTTING THE WELL IN EMERGENCY
Testing of the BOP in a pressure control situation is called an inflow test. It will be carried out
 Close the BOP.
 Bleed off the lubricator.
 Stop bleeding and monitor pressures
 If the pressure does not rise, the lubricator can be removed.
This description of closing and testing the BOP will primarily be used if a leak occurs on
equipment above the BOP and when fishing. In other, more general alarm and emergency
situations, we will primarily prioritize pulling out of hole and possibly getting ready to cut the
wireline so that the Xmas tree and (if necessary) the sub surface safety valve can be closed.
Emergency procedures:
 Pull out of the well and shut-in if there is time/opportunity. If it is not possible to pull
all the way to the surface, then pull so far back that the wire end will be pulled below
a possible DHSV, before cutting. Shut-in the BOP and secure it if the problem on your
well is leakage.
 If necessary, cut the wire with a shear ram or master valve (or tongs!) before the Xmas
tree’s upper valves and if necessary the sub-surface safety valve are shut-in,
maximally securing the well.
41.2 BRAIDED CABLE CONTINGENCIES
During any abnormal situation, it is the intervention operator at the controls of the unit who
will probably be the first to realise that there is a problem. He is also the person who has
control of the equipment and will be present during the intervention. It is therefore the
intervention equipment operator's responsibility to make the well safe in the event of any
problem occurring.
It is usually necessary to remove the DHSV, if it is wireline retrievable, so that deep set large
diameter tools may be run. If the valve cannot be removed, its control must be isolated from
any shut down system and the pressure in the control line must be monitored.
Similarly, the control for the UMV (or any other tree valve) must be removed from the shut
down system and the valve must be locked open where possible.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Leak at the Stuffing Box WWG01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The first reaction to a leak in the stuffing box would be to stop the wire, using the hydraulic
hand pump apply a little pressure to stop the leak.
If the above is successful Pull out of the hole and replace the packing.
If the leak cannot be controlled by the addition of further hydraulic pressure, close the BOP,
screw in the manual handles, bleed off pressure above, inflow test then open the equipment
and repair the leak. It may be possible to replace the top two packing elements as temporary
measure to get you out of the hole.
Leak in Surface Equipment Above The BOP WWG01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
In the event of such a leak, close the BOP, screw in the manual handles bleed off pressure
above, inflow test then open the equipment and repair the leak.
Maintaining a Grease Seal WWG01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
When using braided line a grease seal must be maintained around the wire. Leaks from the
grease head can occur for a number of reasons:
 Insufficient grease pressure
 Contaminated grease
 Rise in wellhead pressure
 Section of cable that has become too thin
In all such cases, it is necessary to stop the movement of the wire, re-¬establish the grease
seal, and continue with the work.
41.3 REGAIN A LOST SEAL
When the Grease Seal is lost, it is usually caused by pulling out speeds being too high, or
contamination of the grease. To regain the Grease Seal, stop the winch and increase the
Grease Pump pressure and monitor until the Grease Seal has been recovered. If the Seal has
not been recovered, the Pack-Off should be applied and the Grease Return Flow Line Valve
closed in that order. If this process does not regain the Grease Seal then the Wireline Valve
should be closed and grease injected between the Wireline Valve Rams to 1.2 times Wellhead
pressure.
Seal Recovery:
1. Stop winch.
2. Increase the injection pressure and observe returns from the returns line.
3. If the leak persists, pressure up the pack off and close the returns line.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
4. If the leak stabilises bleed the returns line and pack off to zero.
5. Slowly start pulling out of hole while monitoring the pressure and returns.
Note: Inspect the cable for damage. If the cable is good and there is no leak continue with
the operation.
If the above steps cannot recover the Grease Seal, the BOP ( Wireline Valve ) should then be
closed and Grease injected between the rams. When the Grease Seal has been recovered, the
process should be done in the reverse order. Always equalise the Wireline Valve rams before
opening the rams to prevent ram seal damage.
Cable Rupture WWG01.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
One problem that can occur with braided line is that

a single outer strand of wire can get broken in the
hole and cause a birds nest when pulling out. In
severe cases, this can lead to the wire getting stuck
in the bottom of the grease head. The winch
operator should notice this from a dark spiral mark
in the cable being spooled onto the drum where the
strand is missing. The weight indicator reading may
well fluctuate also as the broken strand balls up in
the lubricator.
In most cases, if the broken strand is noticed in time, the BOP's can be carefully closed around
the wire whilst checking that there is no unusual resistance to closing. This could indicate that
the birds nest is across the face of the BOP. After bleeding off above the BOP, the lubricator
can be lifted and the damaged strand of wire can be temporarily spliced back in to the main
cable to allow it to pass through the grease head.
41.4 CABLE RUPTURE PROCEDURE
1. Stop the cable, close the Wireline Valve and inject

grease between the rams until a Grease Seal has
been confirmed.
2. Open Needle Valve on Lubricator to bleed off

pressure above BOP’s. Ensure that the Wireline
Valve is holding before removing Lubricator.
3. Raise the Lubricator a few feet and attach a line

clamp to the wireline above the BOP’s.
4. Slack off the cable from the winch and check the
clamp is holding. Pull the cable down through the
Grease Head and inspect the damage on the cable.
5. There will be a ball of stranded cable, which will
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
have to be cut off and repaired
6. After the cable has been repaired, pick up the tension on the cable and remove the
line clamp. Lower the lubricator onto the Wireline Valve and close the needle valve on
the lubricator.
7. Inject grease through the Grease Head and equalize pressure across the Wireline
Valve before opening the rams.
8. Once the rams are open, slowly move the cable out of the hole. Monitor tension and
watch the cable coming out of the Grease Head to check that the
In gas wells it may prove more difficult to re-establish the grease seal because the flowing gas
can more easily strip the grease out of the flow tubes and the cooling effect of the gas as it
expands can thicken the grease. Hydrate formation can also be a problem at this time.
Similarly, if the BOP's have to be closed, the top (normal) ram must be closed, the bottom
(inverted) ram is then closed and the grease injected between them to establish a seal. The
BOP's are designed to maintain a seal with the cable stationary only.
Hydraulic Master Valve Control Line Leak WWG01.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
In the event that a maser valve loses total hydraulic pressure with wire or cable in the hole will
result in that wire being cut with possible valve damage. Efforts should be made to maintain
increased pump pressure to allow the wire to be pulled from the well in time to shut the well
in. Some hydraulic master valves have a lock out facility to affect temporary repairs.
DHSV Control Line Leak WWG01.06 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
In the event that a maser valve loses total hydraulic pressure with wire or cable in the hole
will result in that wire being cut with possible valve damage. Efforts should be made to
maintain increased pump pressure to allow the wire to be pulled from the well in time to shut
the well in without accidentally severing the wire.
Hydraulic BOP Control Panel WWG01.07 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
In the event of power pack failure during the job, apply the hand brake and clamp the wire to
the lubricator before commencing repairs.
Hydraulic stuffing boxes and BOP's are either hand pump operated, powered from a
standalone unit or, if using engine driven hydraulics, will have a small accumulator to allow
them to continue to work.
Wire Pulled Out Of Rope Socket WWG01.08 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
If for some reason (such as running in to an obstruction whilst POOH too quickly or running
into the stuffing box) the wire is pulled out of the rope socket when near the surface, there is
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
a chance of the wire being blown out of the top of the stuffing box. In this case the blow out
plug (plunger) inside the stuffing box is designed to stop the wellbore fluids from blowing out.
Power Pack Failure WWG01.07 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
In the event of power pack failure during the job, apply the hand brake and clamp the wire to
the lubricator before commencing repairs.
Hydraulic stuffing boxes and BOP's are either hand pump operated, powered from a
standalone unit or, if using engine driven hydraulics, will have a small accumulator to allow
them to continue to work.
41.5 HYDRATE PLUGGING

Well control problems can be caused by hydrates plugging equipment and stopping the wire
from being run or pulled. They may also prevent equipment such as BOP's from operating
properly and functioning.
Fishing WWG.01.08 Level of Importance L3.5/L410
If the wire breaks downhole, this will cause operational problems rather than well control
problems. This will however probably lead to fishing operations.
In order to avoid well control problems during fishing operations, extra surface equipment will
probably be required. This is because there will be a fishing toolstring and the original lost
toolstring to be contained in the lubricator, which will have to be much longer. It is also
possible that a heavier duty (bigger OD) wireline will be used to fish the lost wire and
toolstring. In this case, extra BOP's may be needed to take account of two different wire
sizes.
41.6 SWABBING
Swabbing can be used to reduce the hydrostatic pressure on the formation in order to allow
the well to flow. This is done under controlled conditions using special equipment.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Accidental swabbing can occur during open hole operations when the top of the tubing is
open and during wireline operations when large OD tools are being run or pulled and the
clearance around the tool is small.
Accidental swabbing causes well control problems by allowing overbalanced fluids to flow to
surface thereby reducing hydrostatic pressure on the formation and possibly allowing the
well to flow.
Accidental swabbing is also a problem when running/pulling completions due to the small
clearances between the completion components and the well bore.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
42.0 WWK - CRITICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
Gauge Cutters WWK01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L5.5
Most often a gauge ring will be the first tool ran on a slickline operation. A gauge ring that is
just undersized will allow the operator to ensure clear tubing down to the deepest projected
working depth; for example 2 7/8" tubing containing 2.313" profiles would call for a gauge ring
between 2.25" - 2.30". A gauge ring can also be used to remove light paraffin that may have
built up in the tubing. Often a variety of different sized gauges and/or scratchers will be run to
remove paraffin little by little. Gauge cutter can be used for drift run.
Safety Valve Integrity WWK01.02 Level of Importance L3.4/L5.5
It is usually necessary to remove the DHSV, if it is wireline retrievable, so that deep set large
diameter tools may be run. If the valve cannot be removed, its control must be isolated from
any shut down system and the pressure in the control line must be monitored. Similarly, the
control for the UMV (or any other tree valve) must be removed from the shut-down system
and the valve must be locked open where possible.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
43.0 WCA – COIL TUBING
43.1 COIL TUBING HISTORY
Pluto
(Pipe-Lines Under The Ocean) was a world war 2 operation by British scientists, oil companies
and armed forces to construct undersea Fuel pipelines under the English Channel between
England and France.
The scheme was developed by AC Hartley, chief engineer with the Anglo- Iranian Oil
Company, after Admiral Louis Mountbatten initiated the concept.
Allied forces on the European continent required a tremendous amount of fuel; pipelines
were considered necessary to relieve dependence on oil tankers, which could be slowed by
bad weather, were susceptible to German U Boats and were also needed in the Pacific War
The development of coiled tubing as we know it to-day dates back to the early 1960’s and it
has become an integral component of many well service and work over applications still
account for more than 75% of CT use.
Technical advancement have increased the utilization of CT in both drilling and completion
applications.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The ability to perform remedial work on a live well was the key driver associated with the
development of CT.
The development of coiled tubing as we know it to-day dates back to the early 1960’s and it
has become an integral component of many well service and work over applications still
account for more than 75% of CT use.
Technical advancement have increased the utilization of CT in both drilling and completion
applications.
The ability to perform remedial work on a live well was the key driver associated with the
development of CT.
To accomplish this feat, three technical challenges has to be overcome:
 A continuous conduit capable of being inserted into the well bore (CT string).
 A means of running and retrieving the CT string into or out of the well bore while
under pressure (injector head).
 A devise capable of providing a dynamic seal around the tubing string (stripper/pack
off devices).
The main Coil Tubing functions:
 Work Over
 Production and Completion Services
 Logging / E-line Operations
 Stimulation
 Drilling
 Testing
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The main components of a coiled tubing unit are usually modular, lightweight skid mounted
designs, for ease of lifting and positioning on the well sites. Truck mounted versions are also
manufactured for land wells accessible by road.
There are five basic skid units that make up a standard modular coiled tubing package, these
are:
 Power Pack
 Control Cabin
 Coiled Tubing Reel
 Injector Head with Goose Neck
 Wellhead Pressure Control System
While the initial development of Coiled Tubing

was spurred by the desire to work on live
wellbores, speed and economy have emerged
as key advantages for application of Coiled
Tubing.
In addition, the relatively small footprint and short rig-up time make Coiled Tubing even more
attractive for drilling and workover applications.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
43.2 SURFACE EQUIPMENT
A Coiled Tubing unit is made up of 5 basic components: the power pack, the control cabin,
the tubing reel, the injector head and the BOP's.
In addition to the basic components a spare reel of tubing is often taken on the job, especially
offshore, and for work being carried out on a semi- submersible, a special lifting frame is used
to allow the unit to be attached to the compensator. For work on wells with no derrick, a
hydraulic support frame can be used to support the weight of the injector and gooseneck
instead of requiring a crane throughout the job.
43.3 POWER UNIT
This large, usually diesel driven, power pack drives many hydraulic pumps that control all the
functions on the unit. It provides the primary power supply for the pressure control
equipment with accumulators on the skid. There is usually a secondary power source for
charging the BOP accumulators. This is often an air pump. The accumulators have an
operating pressure of 3000 psi. and the recharge pump is usually set to kick in when the
pressure falls to 2700 psi. (90%). All accumulators are pre-charged with Nitrogen.
43.4 CONTROL CABIN

The cabin can usually be raised hydraulically so that the operator can see over the reel in front
of him and watch the pipe spooling over the gooseneck.
The Coiled Tubing operator will have the following controls in front of him:
 Reel and spooler controls.
 All BOP's.
 The injector head.
 Recording instruments.
 Depth counter and weight indicator.
43.5 TUBING REEL
The Coiled Tubing reel normally stores the entire tubing string. Capacity ranges from typically
5000 ft. to 22000 ft. The weight of a reel increases dramatically with length, diameter and
pipe weight. In the worst cases, with very small offshore platform cranes, the pipe has been
spooled from the full reel on the supply boat to an empty reel on the platform deck. In certain
circumstances it is also possible to join two reels together with a connector to make a longer
tubing string.
The reel is supported on an axle and is rotated by a hydraulic motor driven chain drive. This
drive system ensures that some tension is kept on the pipe between the gooseneck and the
reel. This is done by adjusting the hydraulic pressure on the reel motor.
The reel drive system is NOT used to run pipe into or pull out of the well.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
To control the spooling process and ensure that the pipe is correctly coiled on to the reel, a
winding mechanism (the level wind) is synchronized with the rotation of the reel by a chain
drive. This level wind assembly is part of the spooling arm that also contains the depth
counters, ovality checker, etc.
The inner end of the tubing is connected to a high pressure rotating joint on the inside of the
drum and then to a 2 inch valve. This allows fluid to be pumped down the coil whilst running
in or pulling out. Attached to the side of the reel, there is a ball launcher. This is required so
that a ball can be dropped (pumped) down the pipe to operate any one of various downhole
tools. The ball (plug) launcher can also be used for launching displacement plugs that would
be pumped before and after a batch of cement. The first plug would bump against the coiled
tubing end fitting and continued pumping would shear the central core out of the plug. There
is usually a spray system fitted on the skid that allows the pipe to be sprayed with oil based
corrosion inhibitor when pulling out of the hole.
43.6 INJECTOR HEAD
The injector pushes or pulls the pipe in or out of the well. It does this by using hydraulic
motors that drive chains with attached contoured blocks to grip the pipe and so push it in or
out of the well.
There are different sizes of injector with the ability to pull up to 120000 lbs. for the larger pipe
sizes. The chains/blocks are specific to each pipe diameter. There are usually two speeds
(gears) which allow up to 125 ft/min. and up to 250 ft/min. The operator has precise control of
the injection force and the injection speed. An over-large injection force can result in damage
to or breaking of the coil if an obstruction is encountered in the well. The controls are always
set to the minimum necessary to run or pull the pipe. The inside chain tensioners are
hydraulic cylinders that push on to "skates" on the backs of the chains and force them against
the pipe. The outside chain tensioners are hydraulic cylinders that keep the chains tight.
The load cell for the weight indicator and a reservoir for lubricant for the pipe are mounted on
the injector. The gooseneck is attached to the top of the injector to guide the pipe coming
from the reel into the top of the injector.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
44.0 PRESSURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Deployment System WCA01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
During standard operations, the distance from the swab valve on the Xmas tree to the
stripper determines the maximum length of BHA that can be used during a Coiled Tubing job.
For certain kinds of work, particularly perforating, it is necessary to have a much longer BHA.
Before the use of deployment systems, operators used the DHSV as the only barrier when
running up to 1500m. of TCP guns.
The deployment system looks like a multi-ram BOP and is located below the quad or combi in
the stack. Individual sections of the BHA are run (often on wireline) and are then held in the
deployment system. The deployment system seals around the outside of the BHA in much
the same way as a BOP. The next section of BHA is run and attached to the previous section.
In some cases this is done by the deployment system screwing the sections together and in
others, the sections latch together. In this way, very long BHA's can be run until it is time to
connect the coiled tubing to the top section. The injector is then attached and the BHA can be
run in to the well in the normal way. To remove the BHA, the procedure is reversed.
Advantages
 A productivity index double that predicted
 Perforating string insertion and retrieval without killing the well Features
 Gun-system length records for CT and CIRP deployments
 Entire 2870-ft interval perforated underbalanced in one run
 Case study: Record perforated interval underbalanced using coiled tubing Perforating
 Special connectors between the gun sections provided sealed ballistic transfer.
Check Valves WCA01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
44.1 NONE
The only time that check valves would not be used is in a dead well situation. The only type of
operation that requires no check valves is reverse circulation.
PS If Reverse circulation is to be carried out the check valves need to be removed
44.2 FLAPPER CHECK VALVE

Flapper type check valves are of full bore design. This enables the transmission of launching
balls to function other downhole tools. The flap in the valve does not lie flat against the inside
of the valve body, and this aids the flap to close if circulation is reversed. The flap has an
elastomeric seat to enhance the sealing capability.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Large Internal Diameter
Can Drop Balls & Darts thru them
Double Flapper Type
Additional Well Control Devices WCA01.03

E is special configuration when using a pump out check valve

for operational reasons. Due to the check valve being
expendable by pumping down a dropped ball another check
valve cannot be installed above it. For this reason primary
internal well control is only single check valve. If expended
the secondary well control system is a wireline check valve
installed in the landing nipple.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Coil Tubing Strippers WCA01.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The stripper, sometimes referred to as the pack-off or stuffing box, provides the primary
operational seal between the pressurized wellbore fluids and the environment. This device is
always attached to the bottom of the injector and may be a single or tandem device. It is the
primary barrier when Coiled Tubing is in the hole and allows the pipe to be run in or out whilst
maintaining a seal around the pipe.
Also called the stuffing box or tubing stripper, there are three basic kinds.
 Conventional
 Side Door
 Radial
The Radial stripper is not

widely used unless with the
very big pipe sizes (27/8 inch
and 3V2 inch).
The principle of all three is the

same. Operator controlled
hydraulic pressure acts on a
piston that pushes directly or
indirectly on the insert (packer or
element) which makes the seal around
the pipe. The life of a stripper insert is dependent on many things such as: Wellhead pressure
 Stripper pack off pressure
 External condition of pipe
 Lubrication
If the inserts wear then they can be replaced with or without pipe in the hole. In order to
change the insert with pipe in the hole, it is necessary to close the slip and pipe rams (in the
BOP's below the stripper) and bleed off pressure above the pipe rams.
The conventional stripper can be the most difficult to change the insert in, because it must be
removed/inserted through the top of the stripper which is attached to the bottom of the
injector. Access here is limited.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The side door and the radial are designed to have the element replaced through the side of
the stripper.
The use of tandem strippers is quite common as it provides a back up to the primary barrier
(top stripper) in the event of the packing being worn.
Rather than having to stop and replace the insert in the first stripper, it can be depressurised
and the second (lower) stripper can be energised with the job continued without a break
however, this would mean that only one barrier is available.
Minimum Barrier Requirements WCA01.05 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
44.3 SHEAR/BLIND RAM OR SEAL RAM
The shear/blind ram shall be capable of shearing the highest-grade of work-string, as well as
sealing off the wellbore with lateral and face seals.
The shear/seal ram shall be capable of shearing the highest grad of as follows as well as
sealing off the Wellbore with lateral and face seals.
The ram design needs to clear sheared work-string from the seal area as a part of the
shearing and closing operation, to enable circulation rate through the work-string left in the
well.
The shear blades shall be designed to prevent small pipe or cable to be caught.
On high pressure or gas wells there should be an extra shear capability situated on the tree to
facilitate a cut on the coil if stuck at the bottom of the well. To be able to shut the well in, in
this situation tension would be pulled on the coil then shear the coil to allow it to pass
through the tree.
Coil Tubing Limits WCA01.07 Level of Importance L2.2/L3.5/L4.5
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Points of Potential Failure are:
 Reel Drive Brake
 Reel Drive System
 Turbine Counter
Three factors that affect thee coil tubing Integrity:
 The radius of the gooseneck
 Traction
 Continuous Cycling of the coil tubing
Three factors that affect the longevity of the coil tubing:
 The radius of the gooseneck
 Amount of bending cycles
 Footage ru
Comparison between model predictions for the point at which first cracks will begin and the
actual test data for the point of failure from the fatigue tests. The model predictions for
actual failures are also shown.
From the predicted crack initiation data:
 For a 1.25 ins. OD pipe and 0.87 ins. wall thickness, the pipe life increases by nearly
300% when the pressure is decreased from 5,000 psi. to 3,000 psi.
 Increasing the gooseneck radius from 50 ins. to 72 ins. for 1.25 ins. OD pipe and 0.87
ins. wall thickness, increases the pipe life by 54%
 Increasing the wall thickness from 0.87 ins. to 0.109 ins. for 1.25 ins. OD pipe with
5,000 psi., increases the pipe life by 127%
 Decreasing the pipe diameter from 1.5 ins. to 1.25 ins. for 5,000 psi., increases the
pipe life by 171%.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
45.0 WCA – BLOW OUT PREVENTERS
Operating Principle WCA.02.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
When we activate, the

backup barrier, it is
usually because the
primary barrier has
failed. The placement
will therefore be just
under the stripper, but
there will usually be a
quick coupling in
between. The backup
barrier is often just
called a BOP and is
usually a ram type. In
special cases it can also be an annular BOP, but this is not common. Annular BOP’s are
discussed under the chapter “Primary barriers.” Coiled tubing BOP’s are usually a block type
BOP. It is of course possible to use individual valves in the same way as in snubbing, but it is
no longer common to do so. A block type BOP can be made for two, three or four sets of
different types of rams. Common for all of these is that we arrange them so that there is a
pipe ram at the bottom. This valve is our back up barrier.
The quadruple BOP came first and was a big improvement in comparison to the single BOP’s,
but it was built with the same set up as using four single BOP’s. Eventually, some
combinations of these different rams were made so that it was possible to use triple and
combi-BOP’s, but these rams belong under “Secondary barriers” and will be further discussed
there.
A pipe ram is a ram with a replaceable seal in the front. The seal can be exchanged for
different sizes in order to fit the particular pipe diameter. When the backup barrier - the pipe
ram - is activated, it is also common to activate the slip ram to keep the pipe fixed and
prevent it from moving up or down. The slip ram is usually placed right over the pipe ram. It
is most common to place the pipe ram at the bottom of the
BOP, but it is possible to make changes to this when necessary. One possibility is to have the
pipe ram and slip ram switch places. When the backup barrier is activated, it must be secured
mechanically by screwing in the locking screw and then testing. The test is an inflow test
where pressure is bled off topside and then observed for a pressure increase.
45.1 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

A single BOP is built up with two double-acting hydraulic cylinders that operate, i.e. slide in
and out, the actual ram that is installed. There are normally double seals between the
hydraulic system and well pressure. To see how far in the rams are, there will often be an
indicator pin installed on the hydraulic piston. A mechanic device is always installed, which is
the locking screw on the BOP that prevents the ram and piston from accidentally closing.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
While rigging up the BOP, it is connected to all hydraulic hoses and then function tested. Leak
testing of the pipe ram will later be performed with coiled tubing run through the BOP. It is
common that pressure is then pumped up through the coiled tubing.
COMBI (combination)
BOP is a dual BOP that does exactly the same as the quad but has only two rams.
The upper ram is the blind/shear and the lower ram is the pipe/slip. There is a kill line
connection between the two rams and there are equalizing valves across each ram.
If it is required to cut the pipe, the combi is operated in the same way as the quad.
In order to make the cutting of the pipe more certain, it is best to have the pipe in tension
rather than compression.
The advantages of a combi over a quad are:
 Shorter.
 Less ram operations in an emergency i.e. quicker operation
 Does not require the pipe to be raised to close the blinds and so requires only a
minimum number of operating steps in an emergency
 Requires less hydraulic fluid to perform the same functions (some power packs do not
have enough accumulator capacity to operate all functions of a quad with the engine
stopped).
Disadvantages are:
 It offers less flexibility in operation.
 Pipe end will be more heavily crimped on cutting and that can make kill pumping
difficult.
Advantages of using a combi bop are:
 It is compact when there is a height restriction.
 It only has two rams therefore it is easy to shut it down in an emergency.
 Least amount of leak paths
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Pipe & Slip Rams
Triple Combi BOP
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
45.2 TRIPLE BOP'S
Triple BOP's are sometimes used and may be called triple combi BOP's. They can be set up in
various ways to suit the job in hand.
They can be fitted with all standard ram configurations and can have hydraulic booster
actuators fitted if required. They are often fitted with combination rams hence the name
triple combi BOP.
Ram configuration (top to bottom):
 Blind /shear
 Slips
 Pipe
45.3 QUAD BOP
It is used to control the well pressure and allow for safe operation at all times. Here you can
see a quad BOP. It means that all the necessary functions are separated from each other. We
also have triple and combi-BOPs where some functions are combined with each other.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Shear Seal BOP WCA02.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The shear seal BOP is preferably

arranged directly on the X-mas tree and
should be able cut everything that can be
run into the well and afterwards maintain
a seal against the well pressure. The
shear seal can be operated even if power
from the installation fails. The valve has
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
an accumulator bank to operate the rams in an emergency. Everything that cuts and seals is a
tertiary barrier.
45.4 ACCUMULATOR
BOTTLES
A standard accumulator bottle

has an 11 gallon capacity, it is
pre-charged with nitrogen and
holds, when pre-charged to
3000 psi, 1.7 gallons of N2 and
8.33 gallons of hydraulic oil.
Accumulator bottles are
connected in series with the
hydraulic system of the Coil
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Tubing Unit and are continuously charged by the system and kicks in if the supply fails or
drops below 2700 psi from 3000 psi. The accumulators must store enough fluid and energy to
be able to function to close – open – close – open all the BOP rams.
46.0 WCA - RAM TYPE PREVENTERS
Ram Type BOPs WCA04.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
There are several different makes and types of ram type BOP. They are all basically of the
same style and are single, double, triple or quadruple.
Coiled Tubing BOP's are controlled from a panel in the control cabin. The hydraulic pressure
required to operate them is between 1500 and 3000 psi. They are usually either 3" or 4"
nominal bore, but are available in smaller sizes for very small tubing and bigger sizes for the
largest coiled tubing.
Single BOP's used as shear seals (or safety heads) tend to be large bore with bigger hydraulic
ram assemblies to ensure they will cut anything required. Most BOP's are rated at 10000 psi.
The stripper is the primary barrier when coil is in the hole. Pipe rams are secondary barriers
and safety heads (where used) are tertiary barriers.
If an annular BOP is used it is a secondary barrier. If a second (tandem) stripper is used, it is a

secondary barrier or back up to the primary barrier. Only one barrier is classified as the
primary barrier although there may be multiple secondary barriers and multiple tertiary
barriers.
46.1 QUAD BOP
The quad (quadruple) BOP is a solid block BOP with four rams. For normal Coiled Tubing
work, these rams always have the following functions (from the top down)
 Blind Rams, seals the wellbore when the CT is out of the BOP
 Shear Rams, used to cut the pipe (only)
 Slip Rams, supports the CT weight hanging below
 Pipe Rams, seal around the hanging pipe.
Pipe Cutting Procedure
 Close the slip rams to hold
 Close the pipe rams to seal
 Close the shear rams (cutters) and cut the pipe
 Pull the remaining pipe above the blinds
 Close the blinds
If required pump through the kill connection and down the pipe.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Modern designs of cutters do not completely crimp the pipe where it is cut which allows fluid
to be pumped down the coil in hole.
46.2 ANNULAR BOP
 Annular BOPS are sometimes used in CT rig ups

and would typically be run below the standard
quad, combi or triple BOP. WHY? To seal round
the BHA, especially during deployment
operations.
 Can also be run below a single stripper packer as

a backup in preference to a dual stripper. This
would provide a barrier to change the stripper
element while in-hole but would not affect BHA
length above swab valve.
46.3 RISER
In most cases risers will be rigged up. All connections

between the valve tree and BOP are flanged. There can
be so-called quick couplings over the BOP: It is
important that the riser has the correct diameter and
service for the operation in question. It must withstand
the pressure and all well fluids that can be produced.
BOP Seal Defects WCA04.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Generally, we can say that there are three reasons for replacing packer elements in BOP’s:
 The first is if there are changes in the dimension of the pipe that is run from one run
to the next. In that case, it will be necessary to change the elements for the
dimension to be run first. It may also be the case that several pipe dimensions are
used on the same run. There will then usually be several BOP’s set up so that all
dimensions are covered. One method of doing this is by using an annular in addition
to regular ram BOP’s.
 The second reason for replacing seals is general wear and tear.
 The third reason for replacing seals is damage to the rubber. This may occur if for
example the BOP are closed around a tool or tool string with sharp edges. There may
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
also be gas leakage that cuts tracks in the rubber, or gas bubbles that penetrate into
the rubber.
Assess Seal Damage WCA04.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Usually, ram seals are used until at least 80% of the seal surface is left in comparison to new
elements. If damage or defect that can cause leaks to occur, the packing elements must be
replaced. If the BOP has been activated with a pipe through it the BOP must be dismantled
and the packer that was used must be replaced. It is important to equalize the pressure over
and under the valves before a closed valve is opened. If not, it is highly likely that the sealing
elements will be damaged.
Non Shearable Components WCA04.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
All equipment used in well operations must be pressure classified and certified. Only
approved workshop can carry out pressure testing and certification.
Shear rams must be designed to cut the string in question. Unless it is classified as a Safety
Head then this BOP will only cut the tubing and not the BHA.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
47.0 WCD – RIGGING UP
Check Specific Rig Up Requirements WCD01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
First you have to verify that all the equipment is marked and has all certificates in place prior
to rigging up. When rigging up begins, all protectors are removed and threads and seal
surfaces are cleaned and confirmed. Flanges are checked and ring gaskets are replaced.
Before the well is opened the system is function and pressure tested as described in the
procedures. To save time, the procedure should be designed so that several sections of the
system are tested simultaneously. The procedures for leakage testing vary somewhat
depending on where you are working.
In an IWCF context, the whole rig-up should be tested to the well’s highest expected shut-in
pressure, while in a NORSOK context the requirements are that a low pressure leak test and
high pressure leak test are to be utilized.
Usually the tests are performed from as lower most point in the rig up. Otherwise, it is
common to pump pressure in through the coiled tubing as this will also be tested. Checklists
should be used to ensure that nothing is forgotten or left out. If a part of the equipment does
not work or there are leaks, it must be repaired before the job can be started.
Check Equipment Compatibility WCD01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Before a job is performed, check the type of equipment that is needed with respect to
pressure, dimensions and service rating. Logistics and area with sufficient space for the
equipment are also important
This is information that the operating company shall provide to the service company in order
to fullfill the equipment requirement. A list with specifications for necessary equipment can
be set up. Ensure that all equipment that is available complete with all the necessary
requirements.
Coil Tubing Stripping Elements WCD01.03 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
47.1 CONVENTIONAL
The picture here shows a conventional stripper. The packer elements and
liners must be changed from the top. This makes the operation difficult
since the injector is mounted on top of the stripper. For both side door
strippers and radial strippers, the elements are changed on the side of the
stripper. On a conventional stripper, hydraulics are applied from the
underside of the piston, forcing the piston upwards. The piston then pushes
on the liner which compresses the packer against the upper liner. When the
packer is compressed, the hydraulic pressure can be reduced; this is because
the well pressure works on the same side.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
47.2 RADIAL STRIPPER
A radial stripper operates hydraulically and has a radial

movement. The packer elements can also be changed
with coiled tubing in the well on this stripper. This
stripper is shorter than a side door stripper and uses less
vertical height. Radial strippers are not well assisted in
closing, in other words it is only hydraulic pressure from
the pump that compresses the packer.
47.3 SIDE DOOR STRIPPER
47.3.1 Activation of Side Door Stripper
Hydraulics are used to move the piston downwards to close the packer which seals around
the coiled tubing. This is the opposite of the conventional as well pressure does not assist the
stripper to close A “Tubing Lubrication port” can be used to lubricate the coiled tubing, so
that the friction through the packer element is reduced.
47.3.2 Changing packers on a side door stripper
 Hydraulics are used to move the piston that acts

on the stripping elements. Hydraulic fluid
holding the packer elements in place is bled off
and the piston is pumped back.
 When the packer system is pumped to the

“completely open” position, we pump the
retracting piston to the open position. When
the piston is in the open position, the side door
can be opened and the packer replaced. When
the new packer is in place, the operation just
described can be
Defective Stripping Elements WCD01.04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
If the equipment is damaged, we must consider the impact this has or can have. If the
damage is insignificant, work may continue, but if the damage is significant the operation
should be halted until parts or the entire module is replaced. When the BOP is activated,
there will always be some risk of causing damage, not only to the elements but also to the
rams and other parts of the BOP. It is important to inspect the parts for damage and assess
the extent of damage and its consequences.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Function & Position of Valves WCD01.05 Level of Importance L3.5/L.5
The equipment we have looked at so far is exterior pressure control equipment. In addition to
this, we also have internal equipment. With this we are first and foremost thinking about the
check valves that are installed as a part of the bottom-hole assembly. There are five different
kinds that are used, namely the flapper type, ball type and dome type. Usually, two valves
are used in tandem. The most common type used today is the flapper type. There are
different types of these, but the principle behind them is widely the same, and the advantage
is that it is possible to pump a ball or darts through the valves. The ball is used to activate
equipment, for example releasing the string if it is stuck.
Release Joints
47.4 BOSS RELEASE JOINT
 Always Locate directly below Check Valves
 Pumping a 7/8” diameter ball for 2- 7/8” OD Motor-head Assembly.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Adjustable & Fixed Chokes WCD01.06 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
During circulation operations or during well killing, there is often a requirement to use a
choke in order to maintain correct pressure control of the well. By correct use of a choke, the
wellhead pressure can be adjusted so that bottom hole pressure can be held constant. By
altering the size of the choke (i.e. the size of the hole through which the fluid flows), the rate
the fluid leaves the well can be controlled. Most chokes are of a right angled design and are
usually installed on the flow wing of the Xmas tree in a producing well so that the well flow
can be controlled. The choke size is normally given in multiples of V64" (e.g. 128/64 inch).
There are several different types of choke made and it is important that well servicing
personnel understand the differences between them.
The different types of choke can be broken down into two main kinds:
 Fixed chokes
 Adjustable chokes
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
47.5 FIXED CHOKE
In a fixed choke, the orifice through which the fluid flows (the choke bean) must be removed
manually and replaced with one of a different size in order to alter the choke size. This can
only be done with no flow through the choke and the pressure bled off. Fixed chokes are
often installed on established wells where the flow requirements to the production plant are
well known.
47.6 ADJUSTABLE CHOKE
In an adjustable choke, the size of the orifice through which the fluid flows can be adjusted
when the choke is in service. The most common type of adjustable choke uses a tapered
needle and seat.
NOTE - If a flowing well has to be shut in with or without tools in the boreit is a good
procedure to close the adjustable choke.
47.7 C
H
O
K
E
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
T
h
e
c
hoke manifold shall, both for snubbing and coiled tubing as a minimum include two chokes,
manual or remote controlled. In the case of manually operated chokes, the circulating
pressure and the choke manifold pressure should be displayed on or close to the manifold.
All pressure indicators gauges should be through hydraulic pressure de-boosters with remote
output.
The manifold should also be fitted with a connection facility for an optional pressure gauge
with low increment readings. Lines and hoses between the BOP stack and the choke manifold
system shall, together with their connections and valves on the high pressure side of the
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
choke manifold, as a minimum have the same working pressure rating as the BOP stack. All
valves should be gate valves
Double Barrier Protection When Changing Stripping Elements WCD01.07

It is important when considering changing a stripping element with coil in the hole to ensure a
two barrier facility. This is achieved by rigging up two stripping elements. The top stripping
packer would be the primary while lower packer would be redundant. When necessary the
lower stripping packer and the coil BOP would be shut in the event of the top stripping ram
leak.
1. Stop injecting & pumping
2. Engage injector brake
3. Close the lower stripping BOP if fitted.
4. Close pipe rams and bleed off above
5. Replace packer and test
6. Equalize pressure across pipe rams
7. Open pipe rams
8. Release injector brake
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
48.0 WCE - TESTING
Test Requirements WCE01.01/03/04 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Requirements
All equipment used for operations on wells must be pressure classified and certified. Pressure
testing and certification takes place at an approved workshop. It is still necessary to test the
device each time it is used. This is usually considered as leak testing, even though it is often
called pressure testing,
48.1 COIL TUBING STRIPPER TEST
 Pressure Test the Stripper from Below
 Pump water through the coil from the cabin

until returns are seen from the top of the
stripper.
 Energise the stripper
 Apply Test Pressure in 500 PSI Increments
 Monitor Pressure in the control cabin.
48.2 QUAD RAM TEST
 Should be performed immediately after the

stripper Test
 With Pressure Still Applied to the stripper
 Close the Pipe Rams.
 Bleed off trapped Pressure above the Pipe

rams thru the Kill circulation/Port
 Monitor the pressures in the control cabin.
Testing of the BOP in a pressure control situation is

called an inflow test. It will be done approximately as
follows:
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Shut-in the BOP.
 Bleed off pressure above the BOP.
 Stop the bleeding and check if the pressure above the BOP rises
 If the pressure does not rise the test is ok.
48.3 CHECK VALVE PRESSURE TEST
 Pressure up through the coil and slowly bleed

pressure
 Bleed of pressure from the coil back to 1000 \psi

and measure the leak off rate in the control cabin
 When pressure testing the shear seal rams they are

generally tested from below by pumping through
the kill wing.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
49.0 WCF - BARRIER PRINCIPLES
Mechanical Barriers WCF01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Internationally it is still common to separate the barriers on surface equipment into three
groups:
 Primary barriers.
 Secondary barriers.
 Tertiary barriers.
On surface equipment for coiled tubing operations we can briefly say that the stripper is the
primary barrier, pipe ram BOP is the secondary barrier, and everything that cuts is the tertiary
barrier.
When we activate, the backup barrier, it is usually because the primary barrier has failed. The
placement will therefore be below the stripper, but there will usually be a quick union in
between. The backup barrier is often just called a BOP and is usually a ram type. In special
cases it can also be an annular BOP, but this is not common. Annular BOP’s are discussed
under the chapter “Primary barriers.” Coiled tubing BOP’s are usually a block type BOP. It is
of course possible to use individual rams in the same way as in snubbing, but it is no longer
common to do so. A block type BOP can be made for two, three or four sets of different types
of rams. Common for all of these is that we arrange them so that there is a pipe ram at the
bottom. This valve is our back up barrier.
The quad BOP came first and was a big improvement in comparison to the single BOP’s, but
it was built with the same set up as using four single BOP’s. Eventually, some combinations
of these different rams were made so that it was possible to use triple and combi-BOP’s, but
these rams belong under “Secondary barriers” and will be further discussed there.
A pipe ram is a ram with a replaceable seal in the front. The seal can be exchanged for
different sizes in order to fit the particular pipe diameter. When the backup barrier - the pipe
ram - is activated, it is also common to activate the slip ram to keep the pipe fixed and
prevent it from moving up or down. The slip ram is usually placed right over the pipe ram. It
is most common to place the pipe ram at the bottom of the BOP, but it is possible to make
changes to this when necessary. One possibility is to have the pipe ram and slip ram switch
places. When the backup barrier is activated, it must be secured mechanically by screwing in
the locking screw and then testing. The test is an inflow test where pressure is bled off
topside and then observed for a pressure increase.
49.1 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION
A single BOP is built up with two double-acting hydraulic cylinders that operate, i.e. slide in
and out, the actual ram that is installed. There are normally double seals between the
hydraulic system and well pressure. To see how far in the rams are, there will often be an
indicator pin installed on the hydraulic piston.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
A mechanical safety is always installed, which is the locking screw on the BOP that prevents
the ram from accidentally opening after the BOP is shut-in.
Ram Quad Ram Configuration:
 Blind Ram
 Shear Ram
 Kill Port
 Slip Ram
 Pipe Ram
Barrier Operation WCF01.03 Level of Important L3.5/L4.10
It is still common to separate the barriers on surface equipment into three groups: by
classifying them as Primary, secondary and tertiary barriers. On surface equipment for coiled
tubing operations we can say that the stripper is the primary barrier, pipe rams are the
secondary barrier, and everything that cuts is the tertiary barrier.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
50.0 WCG -CONTINGENCY PROCEDURES
All tubing that is run into the hole as work strings are exposed to large amounts of stress and
wear of different kinds. This applies to drilling, coiled tubing and snubbing. The result can be
holes in the tubing, deformation, and breakage.
Holes in the pipe usually result from wear as a result of turbulent flows combined with
particles or gas in the fluid current, or as a result of acid that has stood still and been given the
chance to erode the metal on a limited area. This is called “pin hole” and is most common in
coiled tubing.
A “pin hole” is not easy to discover, but if it is discovered the operation must be stopped and
the pipe pulled out of hole in order to repair or replace the pipe. If we are in the middle of a
pump operation we must evaluate whether pumping can or must be completed. When
pumping acid, the acid must be pumped out before we can pull out. If the hole that is
discovered is relatively close to the stripper and there is room to run the tubing farther down
so that the hole comes into the well, it is recommended that this be done if we are pumping
acid or other dangerous substances.
Wear from fluid flow becomes larger the smaller the pipe that we use becomes, and the
larger the rate we are pumping or producing at. Prolonged pumping will also increase the risk
for holes.
Once a leak occurs at surface, there’s basically three options:
 Run the leak back into the well
 Pull the tubing out of the well
 Stop operations and repair the coiled tubing
But, the action to take depends on other factors such as:
 The position of the leak?
 How severe is the leak?
 Is it getting worse?
 Is a corrosive/toxic fluid being pumped?
 Will stopping the pump collapse the tubing?
So, there are several possible actions to every complication.
When a complication develops the main objectives are:
 To protect the crew
 To control the well
 To protect the equipment
This typically means that the well must be shut back in and in many cases, the well killed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Problems developing during a coiled tubing operation can be categorized:
 Pumps
 Lines/manifolds
 Coiled tubing at surface
 Coiled tubing in the well
 Injector
 Reel
 BOP/wellhead and riser equipment
 Power packs
 Controls
Power Pack - Failures WCG.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Actions to be performed:
 Apply reel brake. Secure with chains.
 Close the slip and pipe rams. Lock rams manually.
 Monitor differential pressure and pump slowly if required.
 Operation is now temporarily controlled enabling options to be considered for further

action.
Pump Unit Failure WCG.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Actions to be performed:
 Change over to backup pump system, if available.
 If no backup pump available, close the inlet valve on the reel.
 Pull CT out of hole (if major repair required), monitoring the CT-tubing annulus
pressure.
 Consider cutting pipe with shear ram rather than risk collapsed pipe and hydrocarbon
lea
 Operation is now temporarily controlled enabling options to be considered for further

action
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Stripping Packer Element Leak WCG01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Actions to be taken
The Stripper/packer should be energized sufficiently with hydraulic

pressure, so that it will contain any well bore fluids, but not restrict
the running of the coiled tubing. Should the element start leaking
and it cannot be energized to stem the leak, the following should be
implemented:
 Stop the Coiled tubing
 Close the pipe rams
 Energize the back-up stripper if fitted
 Inform the company representative
 Bleed down the pressure
 Inflow test.
 Change the stripping Elements
Leak Between the Top of Tree & Stripper WCG01.03 Level

of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Actions to take
 Stop the coiled tubing
 Depending on the severity of the leak, a decision should be

taken as to close the shear seal.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Leak Between the Xmas Tree & Coil Tubing BOP WCG01
Actions to take
In this case it would not be practical to pull the coil, nor to kill the
well with gas leaking at surface.
So, the most logical thing to do would be to ensure the CT will

drop past the Xmas tree and then cut the coiled tubing, pick up
and also close the blind ram.
Then close the well in using one of the tree’s valves, vent off any
possible pressure above the tree and repair the leak.
Naturally, there’ll be a fishing job afterwards.
A severe Leak between the Tree and the Safety Head

WCG01.03
Actions to take
 Depending on the BHA depth
 Pick Up 10 feet Shear the coil
 Close the Surface valves
 Inflow test
Tubing Pin Hole leak (Water) WCG01.05

Actions to take
The tubing develops a leak at the surface. In this situation the

procedure is quite simple:
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Wait for the pressure in the tubing to bleed down
 If the pressure drops and the check valves are holding
 POOH spooling the pinhole onto the reel
Tubing Pin Hole leak (Corrosive) WCG01.05

Actions to take
The tubing develops a leak at the surface. In this situation the

procedure is quite simple:
 Run the leak back into the pressure control below the
stripper
 Do a risk assessment to plan the way forward
General Muster Alarm WCG01.07 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The Well Service Supervisor and individuals listed on the Exception list shall remain at the unit
to ensure the well is secure during the emergency.
All other personnel shall report according to muster plan.
The Control Room shall be updated with well status and how many people are at the location.
Listen to PA announcements and act accordingly.
 Stop the Coil tubing
 Stop pumping fluids
 Close the tubing rams
 Close the slip rams
 Await further instructions
 A decision should be made to close the shear/seal on top of the wellhead
If evacuating: Close shear seal BOP and allow pipe to drop. Close Tree and DHSV. Close
manual locks on shear seal if safe to do so.
Tubing Ruptures WCG01.08 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The tubing ruptures as it comes over the gooseneck and separates. Initially this can be a
potentially hazardous, and serious situation. The seriousness is dependent on the tubing's
internal pressure, the wellhead pressure, and the type of medium within the tubing:
 Stop the coiled tubing.
 Inform the company representative.
 Let the pressure in the tubing bleed down
 If the pressure drops and the check valves are holding.
 Pull rupture to deck level and splice tubing.
 If it appears that the check valves are not holding.
 The shear seal should be closed and the well secured.
 Prepare to fish coiled tubing.
Collapsed Tubing WCG01.08 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.10
The tubing collapses downhole. Depending on the position of the collapsed tubing the fluid in
the coil and if the pump pressure has gone up or down the procedure may change.
50.1 TUBING RUPTURES

The tubing ruptures as it comes over the gooseneck and separates. Initially this can be a
potentially hazardous, and serious situation. The seriousness is dependent on the tubing's
internal pressure, the wellhead pressure, and the type of medium within the tubing:
 Stop the coiled tubing.
 Inform the company representative.
 Let the pressure in the tubing bleed down
 If the pressure drops and the check valves are holding.
 Pull rupture to deck level and splice tubing.
 If it appears that the check valves are not holding.
 The shear seal should be closed and the well secured.
 Prepare to fish coiled tubing.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
50.2 TUBING COLLAPSE
Stop the coil tubing if it has not already stopped due to weight restriction (tubing may not
pass stripper)
 Try and keep tubing full if possible.
 Inform company man
 Establish where collapse has occurred if possible.
 There will be a need to consider killing the well.
 Once well is dead try and pull coil through stripper, if tubing will not pass stripper.
 At this point it maybe decided to close shear seal on top of wellhead and fish coil.
 It may be necessary to take stripper rubbers and brass out of stripper to allow tubing
to pass.
Shutting in and testing of the BOP will primarily be used if there is a leak in the equipment
above that BOP or when fishing coiled tubing or wireline. Generally if an alarm or emergency
situations, arise, we will first and foremost prioritize pulling out of the hole and optionally
preparing for cutting the coiled tubing so that the Xmas tree, and if necessary the subsurface
safety valve, can be closed safely.
50.3 REEL VALVE
The valve on the reel can be regarded as a backup barrier element. It is positioned inside the
swivel, which can be vulnerable to wear and thus leakage. If we lose our primary internal
barrier element and at the same time get a leak in the swivel, we can pull out of the hole and
repair. It is not common to have other internal barriers in CT than the check valves that sit in
the bottom-hole assembly and the shut-off valve on the reel. If these do not hold, we should
cut the string and then activate the secondary barrier. The shear ram is simultaneous both for
external and internal (secondary) barrier.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
50.4 ANNULAR BOP

It has become more common to use an annular BOP in jobs that are not routine. This valve
comes in addition to a CT BOP and can be placed anywhere in the pressure control system.
The main advantage that an ABOP has in comparison to a ram-valve is that it can seal around
different sizes of coiled tubing or components in the BHA. All ABOP valves can also shut-in on
an open hole. Use of an ABOP will normally be necessary when very long BHA’s are run into
the well with the help of a “Deployment system.” Another possibility is to use the ABOP
valve as back up to a single stripper
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Annular BOPs are available in the same pressure classes as ram BOPs.
Annular BOP
50.5 CHECK VALVES
We have looked at equipment that

secures the coiled tubing operation on
the surface, and which together with the
coiled tubing creates one or more
barriers. In addition, we will now look at
equipment that prevents well fluid from
coming up through the coiled tubing.
Several different methods for connecting
the coiled tubing to the BHA are used.
The choice of connection is dependent
on the operation that is to be performed
Check valves are connected on a tubing

end connector and prevents well fluid
from flowing into the coiled tubing. The check valve
will be a part of the primary barrier. The check valve
assembly normally consists of two check valves.
The equipment is designed to be able to be used
together with ball operated equipment that is
placed in the BHA below the check valves. A ball
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
can, in other words, be pumped through the check valves to operate a BORT (Ball Operated
Release Tool), or other equipment.
We have looked at equipment that secures the coiled tubing operation on the surface, and
which together with the coiled tubing creates one or more barriers. In addition, we will now
look at equipment that prevents well fluid from coming up through the coiled tubing. Several
different methods for connecting the coiled tubing to the BHA are used. The choice of
connection is dependent on the operation that is to be performed.
The different connections are:
 Crimp On
 Slip Type
 Pinned Type
 Dimple
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
51.0 SNUBBING
Snubbing/Hydraulic Workover Units (HWO) are used for Snubbing operations or dead well
intervention. Snubbing is the process of stripping pipe into a well which has a surface pressure
high enough to eject the pipe if no restraining force is applied; this condition is termed Pipe
Light.
Stripping is the term used for moving pipe through a closed BOP into or out of the well. In
practice, snubbing has become the term for all operations conducted using Snubbing units
and HWO equipment.
HWO units are often used instead of conventional drilling or workover rigs for dead well
intervention operations, they are cheaper and easier to mobilise than a rig.
Snubbing is performed by introducing an internally plugged pipe into a live well using BOP's
to obtain an external seal around the pipe. The pipe is filled with fluid during RIH to prevent
pipe collapse. The top of the pipe is run open ended.
Snubbing is used for a variety of operations when it is not possible to kill the well, including
but not limited to:-
 Pulling and running completion strings
 Running concentric completions inside existing production strings (sometimes called

insert strings or velocity strings)
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Milling and washing below production tailpipe
 Through-tubing gravel packs
 Cleaning out proppants after frac jobs
 Fishing stuck or lost tools, DHSVs, coiled tubing
 Spotting and pumping acid and cement
 Clearing obstructions from tubing, casing, drill pipe Well control problems on drilling
and workover operations
 Perforating and re-perforating - particularly using very long TCP guns
 Running and pulling wireline and other mechanical tools - particularly in highly
deviated wells
 Wells that cannot be killed because of heavy cross-flow between zones or other
downhole problems that cause inability to hold a full column of fluid
Snubbing operations use BOP's singly or in pairs for primary well control depending on the
wellhead pressure, well conditions, pipe used and the nature of work being undertaken.
On high pressure wells, provision may be made for backup and BOP's would be provided for
each size of pipe if a tapered workstring is to be used. Snubbing unit configurations are very
flexible and are tailored to the individual requirements for each job.
The snubbing unit jack is positioned above all the pressure containment devices, so the BOP's
must be rated for the particular job in hand (5,000 psi, 10,000 psi, 15,000 psi etc.). There is no
such thing as a standard unit.
51.1 HYDRAULIC WORK OVER
Hydraulic Workover operations are conducted in the same manner as snubbing operations
although fewer BOP's are used since the primary well control uses kill fluid and/or mechanical
plugs.
In all operational aspects, the snubbing unit performing HWO operations is a portable
workover rig and normal well control procedures apply.
A typical rig up would include:-
 Blind/Shear rams
 Pipe rams
 Annular BOP
HWO operations are conducted for a variety of reasons such as at remote locations where a
conventional derrick is impossible to obtain, expensive or difficult to rig up or transport
HWO operations can include:
 Full workovers
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Well clean-out
 Squeeze-off
 Re-perforating
 Deepening etc., in the production zone
 Running or pulling ESP completions and control lines that cannot be done on a live
well as the closure of any BOP's would damage them
The first snubbing units were designed in the 1920s by Mr. H. Otis to enable a drilling rig to
"snub" pipe into a well under pressure Rig Assist units are rigged up on the rig floor and are
only for use in "pipe light" conditions. When sufficient pipe weight has been gained, the rig
assist is rigged down and the job continued with the rig stripping the rest of the pipe into the
well.
The rig assist unit is operated by 2 cables attached to the travelling block of the host drilling
rig with each end of the cables passing around pulleys on the base platform (or stationary
head) of the unit and attached to the travelling snubbers (slips). The travelling snubbers are
kept in position by repositioning cables that pass around sheaves attached to the derrick
structure and which have counterweights attached to them. These weights are sufficient to
hold the travelling snubbers aloft and to maintain some tension on the main snub cables.
The stationary head is attached to the BOP stack of the drilling rig that may have extra BOP's
for snubbing use.
Rig assist units have been built to enable rigs to trip pipe during underbalanced drilling
operations. They look like small, remotely operated, short stroke units and are installed
below the rig floor on top of the rig's BOP stack. They are only used for the first or last few
stands of drill pipe when the upward force from the well pressure is greater than the force
from the pipe weight (light pipe). This force is trying to blow the pipe out of the well.
During the 1950s, hydraulically operated snubbing units were designed and consisted of two
basic types -
 The Long Stroke unit
 The Short Stroke unit
The operating principles of the two types are broadly the same in that one or more hydraulic
cylinders move a plate upon which there are one or two sets of slips (travelling slips). There is
also a pair of fixed slips (stationary slips). It is possible to work the pipe into or out of the well
using first one set and then the other.
The Long Stroke unit consists of a frame (either attached to a skid, carrier or trailer) which
contains all the working parts of the unit itself. At its base, it is attached to the BOP stack and
within the frame there is typically one 18 ft. stroke hydraulic cylinder. Using a system of
cables and sheaves, this is multiplied to give 36 ft. of stroke on the travelling head.
Typical capacities of the units are 120,000 lbs. lift with 60,000 lbs. snub.
Advantages of the Long Stroke
 Faster rig up and tripping times
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Minimum crane requirements
 Ability to rack pipe in singles or doubles on some units
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Disadvantages
 Individual component lifts are heavier
 Lower lift and snub capacity
Running completions after the rig has drilled and cemented casing and moved are now
common in certain areas. Similarly, perforating new wells without a drilling rig is routinely
done by some operators. Other more recent developments are:-
 Work in highly deviated and horizontal wells beyond the scope of coiled tubing
 Running and pulling very long TCP gun assemblies up to 1500m without the need for
drilling large rat holes (particularly in horizontal wells where Coiled Tubing has
problems)
 Well/platform abandonment on platforms with no derricks or derricks that would

require large amounts of money to refurbish and re-certify for use
 Under-balanced and slim hole multilateral drilling using small drill pipe
Snubbing units are rigged up directly onto the Xmas tree for through-tubing work, or onto
the wellhead, after removal of the Xmas tree, if completion components are to be pulled or
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
run. They can be rigged up on drill pipe if required.
Snubbing Rig up
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
52.0 SNUBBING EQUIPMENT
52.1 HYDRAULIC JACK
The jack is an assembly of hydraulic cylinders and

slip bowls that enable pipe to be moved in or out of
the well. The workbasket is located at the top of the
assembly. The power tong arm, tongs, gin pole and
counterbalance winch are attached to the
workbasket.
The travelling head that carries slip bowls and the

rotary is located on the top cylinders. The hydraulic
circuits can be set up to provide different speeds and
power levels for the travelling head. The hydraulic
fluid can be directed into all 4 cylinders or into only
2. On some units it is possible to select which two
opposing legs whereas on others, there is no choice.
This is called 4-leg and 2-leg operation. It is also
possible to select whether the hydraulic fluid being
returned from the un-pressurised side of the cylinders is directed back to the tank or added to
the fluid going to do the work in the pressurised side. This is called regeneration and is
equivalent to high and low gearing.
There are 4 operating modes:-
 2 leg high (with regeneration) Fastest but lowest power
 2 leg low
 4 leg high (with regeneration)
 4 leg low Slowest with highest power
It is normal to start the job in 2 legs high and, as the pipe weight increases, change into the
other modes as required. It is a very simple job of turning a valve or two in the one mode to
The stroke of a jack depends on the make, but most in the North Sea have a 10 ft. working
stroke.
52.2 GUIDE TUBES
The higher the well pressure, the greater the force pushing up on the pipe being snubbed into
or out of the well. Since the pipe coming up through the window and the jack is only
restrained at a distance from the stripper bowl, there is a problem with potential buckling of
the pipe out of the side of the window or jack. For this reason, in higher pressure wells, guide
tubes are placed in the window and in the jack. These restrain the pipe and stop it being
buckled out of the side. The guide tubes can be easily inserted or removed and the one
through the jack is in two pieces. One piece is sitting in the jack, hanging from a level with the
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
top of the legs, and the other (inner) piece is hanging from the travelling head and sliding up
and down inside the lower section.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
52.3 ACCESS WINDOW (WORK WINDOW)
The window is a large heavily constructed

item consisting of two plates with solid steel
legs spacing them apart. There are usually 4
legs and a window is always rated to the full
load capacity of the unit. Traditionally 4 ft., 6
ft., 10 ft. or occasionally 15 ft. long, the
window are used to enable large OD items of
BHA, completions, etc. to be run or pulled
without having to pass them through the
slightly restricted ID of the slip bowls. With a
hole through the top and bottom plates of
usually 111/16 inch or 135/8 inch, they are
bolted directly to the top of the stripper rubber and the jack is bolted to the top of the
window. If rigged up on a Xmas tree and using a small diameter washout string, a window
may not be required. For many jobs, such as running completions they are a much safer
option than working a large OD component down through the slip bowls, having first split
them open. Some windows are equipped with a beam at the top to enable a torque turn
equipped back up tong to be hung in the window for making up the completion assemblies.
52.4 SLIPS
The slips are attached to the travelling head and

consist of one bowl for pipe heavy and one bowl for
pipe light. Almost always hydraulically operated, the
two bowls are the same with the pipe light bowl facing
down. Similarly, the stationary slips are attached near
the bottom of the jack, but do not move. In high
pressure wells, it is normal to use an extra set of
stationary snubbers for safety. The slips are always
used in pairs, they cannot be mixed:
 Pipe Heavy = Stationary and traveling heavies
 Pipe Light = Stationary and travelling snubbers
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
52.5 SLIP OPERATING SEQUENCE (LIGHT PIPE RUNNING IN)
52.6 ROTARY TABLE
The rotary table is attached to the travelling head making it possible to rotate the pipe while
moving in or out of the well. Most rotary capacities are about 6000 ft-lb. maximum. This is
usually more than a work string tool joint can safely take.
Because the rotary is on top of the head, it can be a maximum of 10 to 12 ft. above the top of
the cylinders at full stroke. Therefore, current rotary capacities are about the maximum that
the design can achieve. Much higher capacity rotary's' are now installed in the windows of the
latest North Sea short stroke units. This however greatly reduces the capacity to rotate whilst
running in/pulling out
52.7 WORK BASKET
The workbasket is attached to the top of the jack and provides the workstation for the crew
to operate the controls for all the snubbing unit functions.
A standpipe is attached up the outside of the unit and terminates at this level. A circulating
hose and swivel with a connection to the pipe being run is attached to the standpipe. By
attaching the circulating hose to a joint of pipe either in the hole or about to be run in the
hole, it is possible to circulate whilst pulling up a joint of pipe or running it.
There are two weight indicators at the operators console, one for heavy pipe and one for light
pipe. These weight indicators read the hydraulic pressure in the jack circuits and so do not
show any readings when the weight of the pipe is in the stationary slips.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
52.8 COUNTER BALANCE

The winches for raising and lowering pipe are called counterbalance winches because they
are hydraulically balanced to hold the weight of any particular object being lifted. With an
individual load rating of between 1500 lbs. and 2000 lbs. usually, they are controlled from the
BOP console by means of a separate hydraulic valve. Through this system, the force applied
to each hydraulic winch is controlled so that when it is enough to just lift the joint of pipe, the
remaining hydraulic fluid diverting back to tank. A good operator can set the valve such that
the joint of pipe will be stationary, with the pin end in his hand, but he is able to raise or lower
it by as much as he wants just by pulling up or pushing down on the joint with his hand.
52.9 POWER PACK
Most power packs are powered by diesel engines driving multiple hydraulic pumps. All
functions of the unit are supplied from the one power pack. The primary power for the BOP
control panel is from this main power pack. The surface equipment can be shut in in the event
of a power pack failure by using suitably sized accumulators, to close – open – close all the
BOPs in the rig up.
52.10 POWER TONGS
Tongs are normal hung from the tong arm attached to the side of the work basket. If small
tubing is being run through an existing completion, the tongs will be powered from the main
power pack. Some units have the ability to hang tongs in the window for making up
completion assemblies.
52.11 OTHER EQUIPMENT
All snubbing units have the facility for using hand operated slips on the base plate of the
window. These are used when it is necessary to 'hang' the pipe below the slip bowls so that
both bowls can be opened or the pipe broken out or made up in the window e.g. when
making up large OD items of BHA, completion assemblies, changing stripper rubbers, etc.
On some units, it is common practice to rig up a hanger flange in the stack just below the
stripper bowl or sometimes the annular and is used for exactly the same purpose as the hand
slip bowl. It is much slower in use as it requires each of the dogs to be screwed in by hand. It
can be very useful when shutting down for the night on a 12 hr/day operation if there is a
worry about the pipe moving through the slip bowls when the unit is unattended. Care must
always be taken with a small hanger flange to ensure that the forces acting on the pipe can be
held by the dogs. In a small hanger flange, there might only be 4 or 6 dogs.
Because of the nature of the pipe upsets and the BOP's, it is not normal practice for a
snubbing unit to hang the pipe in the BOP's. Also, a large proportion of a job can be spent
with either negative weight or limited positive weight in the string.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
53.0 WSA - PRESSURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Snubbing Blow Out Preventers WSA02.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
53.1 STRIPPER BOWL
The stripper rubber is located in the stripper bowl and is used as a pack-off during stripping
operations with most pipe, except collared pipe and is used to avoid ram-to-ram stripping.
The stripper bowl is located below the access window and is used for the following:-
 Primary well control with low wellhead pressure work (the primary barrier)
 Pipe cleaning when pulling out
 Prevents debris from dropping into the wellbore during tripping
Stripper bowls are available with single and dual elements. Dual element bowls are rare. They
are rated to an absolute maximum of 3000 psi. in practice the stripper rubber cannot be relied
on as the primary well containment device at pressures above 2500 psi.
The use of the stripper bowl allows for the continuous handling of pipe with a tapered upset
or no upset. It is normal to have to change the stripper rubber(s) during a job.
Wear on the rubbers is affected by:-
 Wellhead pressure
 Lubrication at the rubber
 External pipe roughness
It is normal practice when using stripping rams to also use a stripper bowl to provide:-
 Barrier for egress of hydrocarbons
 Primary barrier for HWO (2500 psi or less )
 Pipe wiper
 Debris barrier
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
53.2 ANNULAR BOP
The annular (bag) is also a stripping device and is capable of sealing around any shape and
size of pipe.
If deploying a long BHA's with varying diameters, it may not be possible to operate the
stripper rubber or stripper rams due to the lack of distance between the wellhead and the
strippers. In this situation, use of an annular BOP may be required.
The annular BOP is identical to a standard BOP used in drilling operations although normally
of a smaller size. A typical BOP would be a Shaffer or Cameron 11" 10M or 71/i6 inch 10M. The
pressure rating is specified according to the wellhead pressure.
The annular BOP is used when normal ram-type BOP's cannot seal around a large diameter,
such as a side pocket mandrel, blast joint etc. slip joint. The Annular is a secondary barrier.
There are many different makes and types and it should be noted that not all will close and
seal on open hole. When stripping a BHA through an annular BOP it is necessary to have a
BHA schematic and to monitor the operating pressure.
During snubbing operations, it is normal practice to have a 1 gal accumulator in the closing
line hydraulic circuit to allow tool joints to be stripped through the annular, maintaining a
steady hydraulic pressure on the closing line and preventing it from over- pressurizing.
53.3 STRIPPING BOP'S
Stripping rams allow for controlled movement of

tubulars in wells with surface pressure. By means of
alternately opening and closing the two stripping
rams, tool joints can be stripped in and out of the hole
while maintaining full control of the annulus.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Stripping BOP's are standard ram-type BOP's as used in drilling operations with special
elements to enable them to seal on moving pipe. A typical BOP stack for snubbing operations
might be anything from 2.9/16" 20000 psi. to 13.5/8" 5000 psi.
As with all ram type BOP's, they are designed to hold pressure from below only and the
pressure across the inner seals must be equalized before attempting to open them.
A ram type BOP may be dressed as a stripping BOP or as a pipe ram (safety ram). They can
also be dressed with variable rams, slip rams, blind rams or shear rams for continuous
stripping.
53.4 STRIPPING RAM SEALS
These BOP's the primary well control barriers when wellhead pressure is above 2500 to 3000
psi.
The pressure rating and size are determined by the wellhead pressure and work to be
undertaken. They are always used in pairs to enable a tool joint to be "worked" through while
still retaining a seal around the pipe. It is normal practice to have to change stripping ram
inner seals with their inserts during the course of a job.
The life of the inserts is affected by:
 Pipe external condition
 Well pressure
 Speed of running of the pipe
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
53.5 SAFETY RAM (PIPE RAM)
These are normal drilling type rams that can be

dressed as slip rams or variable bore rams. It is
necessary to have one BOP in the stack dressed
for each size of pipe in use. For jobs involving
tapered strings of pipe, pulling very long fish,
etc., two or more safeties will be required. Often
called the safety BOP's(safeties), they are
normally only used when changing elements in
the stripping rams, annular or stripper bowl, or
when the pipe is stationary for a period of time. The safeties are normally placed in the stack
immediately below the stripping rams. Safeties are secondary barriers and shears are tertiary
barriers. The purpose of the safety ram is to maintain well control in the event of failure of or
maintenance to the primary closing device. Safety rams are not designed for stripping
through.
Worn Elastomers/Temporary Suspension WSA02.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
53.6 BLIND/SHEAR RAM
The blind/shear rams are designed to shear the

workstring and maintain a seal. Blind/shear rams are
not designed to cut the bottomhole assembly.
Where separate blind and shear rams are used, the

choice of where to place them is often dictated by
well conditions or operator preference. For many
snubbing jobs, the shear is placed below the blind
since the pipe may well be trying to push out of the well bore at the time it is required to be
cut.
Conventional shear rams may not always cut the work-string completely (for example if it is
required to cut a BHA with a fish inside) and it may be necessary to RIH one or two joints
before operating normal shear rams
53.7 ANNULAR SEAL CHANGE

In the case of a leaking annular, it would be necessary to pull back out of the hole, close the
blind rams and rig the jack off the well before being able to open the bonnet of the annular.
The annular should always start a new job with a fresh rubber and it is indeed a rare
occurrence to have to change it during a job. If an annular rubber had to be changed during a
job, it would be normal practice to come out of the hole, if at all possible, rather than open
the annular with pipe in the hole.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
53.8 STRIPPING RUBBER ELEMENT CHANGE
This is a routine operation, but opens up the topmost containment device.
 Close the annular and lower stripping ram and check they are holding
 Unscrew the retaining nut and pull out the rubber(s) with a tool joint
 Hang off the pipe and close the safety ram
 Bleed off below the annular through the bleed-off line
 Break the joint in the window
 Install the new rubber by placing it on the box and screwing in the pin
 Make up the joint and take the weight of the string
 Open the safety ram and run in to seat the rubber
 Tighten the retaining nut
 Open the BOP's and RIH
53.9 STRIPPING RAM INSERT CHANGE
This can be considered as being in one of two categories:
 BOP elements changed out as normal routine due to wear
 Leaks around elements occurring unexpectedly
In the case of routine replacement due to wear (the stripping rams are susceptible to this), the
inner seals can be changed by closing the safety rams, bleeding off above them and opening
the stripping ram bonnets to change the inner seals. It would be normal practice to change
the seals in both sets of stripping BOP's at the same time.
In the case of unexpected leaks, all the BOP's above the safeties can be repaired by closing
the safeties, checking they are holding and then working on the stack. If possible, it is good
practice to have two barriers by closing two BOPS' below the one that must be worked on.
53.10 TEMPORARY SHUT DOWN
On some jobs, only 12-hour operations are planned and the routine at night is usually as
follows:
 Install closed stabbing valve having filled tubing
 Close safety rams and manually lock
 Tighten dogs on hanger flange
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Shear Seal (Safety Head) WSA02.03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
The safety head will cut the work-string /BHA and maintain a seal. It is a tertiary barrier. The
shear/seal is flanged as close to the xmas tree as possible to ensure that the work-string falls
below the tree after it has been cut.
Shear/Seal BOP's (Safety heads) are used on jobs where it is necessary to cut more than just
the work string. Most shear/blind or shear rams will only cut the work-string and not BHA,
fish, wire, etc. Shear Seal BOP's have extra-large hydraulic cylinders and pistons to give a
greater force to the cutting action. Like a shear/blind, they will seal off the hole after cutting.
They are usually standard BOP's with different bonnet assemblies to give greater hydraulic
force.
PCE Equipment Rig Up WSA02.04 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.4
Applications of a snubbing Unit
 Sand washing
 Well unloading
 Fishing
 Washing perforations or Acidising
 Cementing
 Running and pulling tubing strings/re-completing
 Drilling or milling
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Snubbing units are very portable, can perform just about any activity, and can rig up/down in
a fraction of the time it takes a conventional rig or workover unit.
Most work over units work on dead - no pressure wells. Snubbing units can perform
operations on both “dead” and “live” wells
53.11 SNUBBING
Is performed on a live well and uses B.O.P. and other mechanical devices as its means of well
control.
 Annular BOP
 Upper/Lower Stripping BOP
 Pipe BOP/Safety
 Shear/Seal BOP
 Safety Head
53.12 HYDRAULIC WORK-OVER
Is performed using the equipment in a work over function on a dead or plugged well. A typical
rig up would only include
 Stripping Rubber
 Blind Shear Rams
 Pipe Rams
 Annular BOP
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
54.0 WSA – RAM TYPE PREVENTERS
BOP Pressure Rating & Installation WSA04.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
A ram type BOP is constructed so that if it is closed and sealing, it is possible to bleed off
pressure above it, well pressure will act on an area of the ram and assist the closing force. This
will be the case for all pipe rams, pipe/slip rams, blind rams and shear/blind and shear/seal
r
a
m
s
a
s
d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e
d
under “Secondary Barriers”.
Ram Equipment Change WSA04.03 Level of Importance L3.4/L4.4
As snubbing operations are conducted with tubulars that are screwed together, therefore it is
possible to have more than one external diameters of work string. In theory, you can do this
as often as you like, as long as you have the correct equipment on the rig up.
If you are going to run a tapered string then it is good practice to have more than one safety
BOP in the rig up, at least one for each size diameter pipe that is to be run in the hole, as a
back up to the primary barrier.
In practice, this is quite labor intensive because it requires changing the ram on the stripper
ram BOP’s for each new diameter. Therefore, it is only under special circumstances that this is
done. An example can be using small ID tubulars at the bottom of the work string to get
through a restriction in the well. We call this running a tapered string.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Assess Damage to Pressure Control Equipment WSA04.05

When the BOP’s are activated, there will always be some risk of causing damage, not only the
elements but also the control systems and other parts of the BOP. It is important to inspect
the parts for damage and assess the extent of damage and its consequences.
 Slack or oversized
 Cuts, wounds or cracked rubber
 Flattened or worn surfaces
Non Shearables WSA04.06 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
When running non-shearable items, there shall be minimum one pipe ram or annular
preventer able to seal the actual size of the non shearable item. Other activities should be
coordinated in order to minimize the overall risk level on the installation while running non-
shearable items through the BOP.
BOP Element Change WSA04.04L Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
55.0 WSA – SEALS & SEALING ELEMENTS
The stripper element is composed of a rubber

mixture that can have many different
reinforcements embedded into it. The most
common is a reinforcement ring of brass on top
to prevent the element from being pushed out
of the house. It can also have a reinforcement
downwards in the sleeve in order to balance
wear on the equipment. A stripper bowl is not
equipped with any form of hydraulic connection
or a closing piston. It is the well pressure that
pushes the packers together around the pipe
and seals. The stripper bowl is therefore
considered to be closed by well assistance, and Stripper Bowl
it is the only one that is solely closed by well
pressure.
The stripper bowl on a snubbing rig always sits on top of the pressure control equipment. A
stripper bowl consists of a housing and a mounted seal packer- the actual stripper element.
The stripper element is not split and it is pushed into the house with a large amount of force
with the help of the snubbing jack.
Afterwards, the top flange is mounted on the
housing. A requirement for being able to use
the stripper is that there is no pressure higher
than 3000 psi (210 bar). Another requirement
for being able to use the stripper is that the
snubbing string does not have 90 degree
shoulders on joints. Time wise, it is an
advantage to use the stripper bowl instead of
stripping with the stripper ram BOP’s.
Therefore, it pays off to make this possible.
One can often reduce the pressure in the well
by pumping in a heavy fluid on the top, and
you can choose a work string with regular,
beveled edges on the joints.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
55.1 ANNULAR BOP
An annular BOP can be used to strip in shorter lengths with varying outside diameters where
a stripper cannot be used. Or, it can be installed as an extra safety precaution if this is
desirable, in which case it will be defined as a secondary barrier. An annular BOP is not
applied to common stripping as it is expensive and complicated. As mentioned, the annular
BOP is primarily used to strip in the bottomhole assembly and any components with a
dimension than differs from that of the snubbing string it is used with. There are several
brands of annular BOP’s. In principle, the same equipment is used both in drilling, coiled
tubing and snubbing, but the dimensions will vary. The smaller dimensions will generally be
able to shut-in on open hole - in other words, where there is no pipe through the valve- but it
will usually not withstand very high pressures. Larger dimensions cannot close on open hole.
Annular BOP’s are also commonly called annular preventers.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
55.2 STRIPPER RAM BOP
If the pressure is higher than 3000 psi, or there are other reasons why we cannot use a stripper
bowl to seal tightly around the work string, we use a stripper ram BOP. A stripper ram BOP is
in principle a conventional BOP as described in the section “Mechanical construction and
function”, but it is used here as a seal around a pipe which is in motion. Naturally, this causes
great wear on seals, as well as a greater probability that a leak will eventually occur. To
compensate for this there is usually a separate, renewable wear element that seals around
the work string. To replace the worn items the well must be isolated with a regular safety
BOP that is located below. It is inflow tested and the string is secured against movement
before the stripper ram is open to replace the element. When stripping with a stripper ram we
must use two BOP’s that alternate sealing tightly around the pipe. The point of this is that we
cannot strip the tool joints through the BOP; but instead have to bleed them through
equalizing loop. We call this stripping ram to ram. Ram to ram stripping requires that we have
the ability to quickly allow pressure in between the BOP’s to equalize pressure, and to bleed
off the same pressure afterwards.
The following is how this is performed when running into the well:
 The tool joint is run down to the lower stripper.
 The upper stripper is closed.
 Pressure is released and equalizes over the lower stripper.
 The lower stripper is opened.
 The tool joint is run through the lower stripper.
 The lower stripper is closed.
 The pressure is bled off between the upper and lower stripper.
 The upper stripper is opened.
In order for the stripping operation to go quickly and efficiently, it is controlled from the work
basket. This assumes that there are hydraulically operated valves for the pressure
equalization loop and bleed off line. There will also be installed choke valves with fixed sized
orifices, as well as manual valves as “back up” to the hydraulic ones. A stripper ram BOP is,
like other ram type BOP’s, well pressure assisted.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Installation/Operation of Sealing Elements WSA05.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
We will now look at a single BOP and show how it is constructed. A single BOP is built up with
two double-acting hydraulic cylinders which operate, i.e. slide out and in, the respective ram
that is mounted. There are usually double seals between the hydraulic system and the well
pressure. Between these there is a weep hole to the atmosphere, so that if one of the seals
fails this can be observed. We can see which seal is leaking by the fluid type. To see how far in
the rams are, there will often be an indicator rod mounted on the hydraulic piston. There is
always a mechanical protection mounted, the locking stem on the BOP. These are screwed in
by hand or hydraulically operated and prevents the ram and piston from being moved
towards the open position after the BOP is closed.
If mud is seen coming from the weep hole it means that the primary ram piston shaft seal is
leaking. If hydraulic fluid is leaking from the hole it means that the hydraulic chamber seals
are leaking.
The procedure for this is to shut down the operation replace the seals and retest.
Defects – Packing Element Change WSA05.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
When the BOP’s are activated, there will always be some risk of causing damage, not only the
elements but also the control systems and other parts of the BOP. It is important to inspect
the parts for damage and assess the extent of damage and its consequences.
 Cracked or damaged seal elements
 Explosive decompression
 Temperatures
 Deformed Seals
 Suitable for service
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
There are three reasons why BOP

ram elements in BOP’s are
replaced. The first is if there is a
change in the dimension of the
pipe being run from one “round” to
the next. The second reason for
changing is general wear. It is
common to say that one can use
the elements until there is 80% of
the rubber remaining in
comparison to a new element. If
the wear is greater, the elements
are replaced. The third reason for
replacing the elements is damage to the rubber. This can occur if, for example, the BOP is
closed around a tool or tool string with sharp edges. It may also be the result of a gas leak,
which cuts tracks in the rubber, or gas bubbles penetrating into the rubber.
Double Barrier Philosophy WSA05.04 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
occurrence to have to change it during a job. Close both the safety BOPs and inflow test
remove the annular flange, change the element.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
56.0 WSA – VALVES
Function, Positioning and Use WSA06.01/02/03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
There are two main types that are commonly used:-
 Back Pressure Valves
 Pump down plug and landing nipple
56.1 BACK PRESSURE VALVE

Since the pipe is open at all times to surface, two check valves or back pressure valves (BPV's)
are always placed at the bottom of the string, above the BHA. They allow fluid to be pumped
down the string but stop flow up the pipe when pumping is stopped. Both ball and seat check
valves and flapper valves are used. Flapper type check valves have the advantage of allowing
balls to be pumped through them for operating tools in the BHA.
Since the flow area through these valves is fairly small, if there is any scale in the tubing it is
quite easy for debris to plug them off. Two operations should be performed to minimise the
risk of this happening:-
 Tubing is to be inspected and rattled immediately prior to going out.
 When filling up the string, pump one or two barrels through the valves every 10 or 20
joints, to prevent collapse of the pipe.
This is to ensure they are still open and to clear out any build¬-up of debris.
The check valves are the primary internal barriers.
In jobs involving large amounts of pumping it is not uncommon for both back pressure valves
(BPV's) to be washed out. A small wireline type landing nipple is always placed above the
BPV's so that in the event of a leakage through the BPV's, a plug can be seated in the nipple
prior to pulling out with the pipe. It is normal to pump the pipe full of water prior to pumping
the plug so as to minimise pollution from hydrocarbons or corrosive brines.
56.2 PUMP DOWN PLUG AND NIPPLE

A very wide variety of BHA devices can be used as a means of internal primary well control
including:-
 Pump out plugs or pump out BPV's
 Sliding Side Doors or Sliding Sleeves coupled with positive plugs. This is mostly to
allow reverse circulation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
56.3 GRAY INSIDE BOP

This wide variety of devices can allow tools to be operated in the BHA by dropping balls
(including release joints) and allows the string to be run-in in the normal manner with twin
BPV's, later converted to reverse circulate. After reversing, it is necessary to re-install a device
to allow the string to be pulled out with full internal well control.
As well as these items on the bottom of the string, full opening safety valves (TIW valves),
inside BOP's or stabbing valves must always be available encase.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
56.4 SNUBBING BACK PRESSURE VALVES (BPVS')
The BPV's are primary internal barriers and prevent hydrocarbons from
entering the work-string and to maintain pressure control. There are usually
two in series. Which are flappers to enable balls and darts to be pumped
through them.
Check valves are located at the top of the bottom-hole assembly. It is common
to use two check valves in sequence, but this is considered to be one barrier
element as we have no control over them individually. The BHA depends on
what kind of operation is to be done, and can have for example circulation
equipment, motors and bits.
There are several types of check valves that can be used to establish a barrier.
The dome type is no longer commonly used, not because it works particularly
badly but because today there are better options. The ball valve is less
susceptible to wear and plugging and is therefore still commonly used if you
only take into account the need to establish a barrier.
The flapper type of valve is not better than a ball valve when it comes to
sealing, but it has the large advantage that it is possible to pump balls and
darts through it. These are used to operate equipment located below the
valves in the bottom-hole assembly.
56.5 NIPPLE PROFILE
A nipple profile is installed in the BHA above the

BPV's and is a secondary internal barrier after a plug
has been set to maintain pressure control if the
BPV's fail.
As well as these items on the bottom of the string,

full opening safety valves (TIW valves), inside BOP's
or stabbing valves must always be available in the
workbasket. These can be used in the event of a
tubing/BHA break or leak in the tubing string to
immediately close off
any flow from the well.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
56.6 STABBING VALVE
The stabbing valve is normally a plug valve with a tubing thread

connection below and a 2" Weco threaded connection for pumping above.
Advantages:
 Light
 Easy to stab onto flowing pipe
 Inbuilt pumping connection Disadvantages:
 Small through bore
 Wireline cannot be used through it
56.7 FULL OPENING SAFETY VALVE
The full opening safety valve is much bigger than a stabbing valve
Advantages:
 Larger bore
 Easy to stab onto flowing pipe
 Allows wireline to be rigged up on top of valve
Disadvantages:
 Heavy
 Requires additional X-over for top connection for pumping
56.8 INSIDE BOP
The inside BOP was originally designed for stripping operations on a rig floor and has pipe
connections at both ends.
Advantages:
 Can be RIH
Disadvantages:
 Heavy
 Very difficult to stab onto flowing pipe
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Alternative Internal Well Control Devices WSA06.03 Level

of Importance L2.2/L3.5/L4.5
E is special configuration when using a pump out check valve for

operational reasons. Due to the check valve being expendable
by pumping down a dropped ball another check valve cannot be
installed above it. For this reason primary internal well control is
only single check valve. If expended the secondary well control
system is a wireline check valve installed in the landing nipple.
Fixed & Adjustable Chokes WSA06.04

Generally, the intention is to circulate fluid in the well when

performing snubbing operations. Therefore, a temporary system
of pipes must be rigged up on the surface. This system must be
dimensioned for the amount of fluid to be circulated and the
pressures that they will be exposed to, and also be made of the
correct type of steel.
For the system to work as intended, both shut-in valves and choke valves must be rigged up
in connection to the pipes. After the choke valves, the liquid flow must be able to be directed
to either the burners or the test separator on board. To ensure safety, lines must also be
rigged up to the BOP so that it can be circulated and killed after any cutting of the snubbing
string.
The choke can be of different

types, but the traditional type is
an adjustable “cone and seat”
valve. This kind of valve
becomes worn out, and it is
therefore often necessary to
replace the worn parts during
an operation. This can be
arranged by using two valves
that are rigged on two parallel
lines so that we can switch
between them.
Fixed size chokes are used for

bleeding pressure, adjustable
chokes are used to control
pressure or flow.
The requirements for pumping and circulating facilities are different for each job, but all
operations require some form of pump to conduct the following type of operation:
 A complete mixing and killing facility on an offshore satellite.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 A hook up on an offshore platform direct to existing facilities.
 A remote land job requiring basic pressure testing and pumping facilities only.
On the choke, kill and bleed off lines the main pressure control is via hydraulically operated
valves controlled from the workbasket, with a manual valve as a backup to each. The manual
valve must be on the inboard side of the hydraulic valve and remains unused in the open
position throughout the job. It is only required when work needs to be done on the hydraulic
valve.
 The kill line is connected to the kill wing of the tree.
 On some dead well operations, trip tank and fill-up line connections are made to the
top of the stack below the window for use while tripping.
 For all snubbing jobs, a fluid pump (usually a cement or frac pump) is required.
 Pressure testing,
 Filling the pipe.
 Displacing the pipe before pulling out to remove hydrocarbons and brines (which can
be dangerous for the crew).
 Through tubing pumping operations.
 Well Kill.
56.9 OPERATIONS
Snubbing is performed on live wells and uses BOP's and other mechanical devices for well
control. In this respect, the principles are exactly the same as with Coiled Tubing.
A typical scenario might be as follows:
The unit is rigged up on a large offshore platform beside a derrick doing a normal workover. It
is required to wash out scale in the perforations and rat hole. The SIWHP prior to the well
scaling up was 2850 psi.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
The unit has been rigged up on top of the Xmas tree with, (from bottom to top) 1 blind/shear
ram, 1 pipe ram, 2 stripping rams, 1 annular BOP and a single element stripper bowl. The riser
between the Xmas tree and the BOP's is long enough to accommodate the BHA comprising a
mill/under reamer/mud motors and BPV's.
The choke and kill lines are connected to the rig circulating system and cement pump via a
choke manifold.
Whilst running in with the clean out string, the wellhead pressure is low enough to use the
stripper bowl. The two BPV's in the work-string prevent flow back up through the tubing.
Once below the tailpipe, the rig cement pump is used for circulation, under reaming down
with returns taken to a degasser and separator before returning to the pits. Well control is
initially achieved by use of the annular and stripper bowl with the stripping BOP's and stripper
rubber being used when the rat-hole is reached.
Having finished washing out, it is discovered that the BPV's are both leaking so the pump
down plug is dropped and seated. With full wellhead pressure restored, the pipe is pulled
using the stripping rams for well control.
The BOP's are controlled from the workbasket, a set on the BOP skid and a third remote
panel has also been set up beside the rig remote panel due to the concurrent nature of the
work.
Due to the comparative complexity of the equipment and the requirement for an in-depth
knowledge of the operation of the equipment on a live well, it is normal practise to have a
snubbing supervisor (the equivalent of a toolpusher) on each snubbing crew.
It is his responsibility to ensure the safe and correct procedures are followed at all times and
particularly when using stripping BOP's, crossing the balance point, etc.
After the unit is rigged up on the well, all features are function tested. The stack is then
pressure tested including all connections, lines, valves and manifolds. To test the rams it is
necessary to pick up one or more joints of pipe and run them into the stack so that the BOP's
etc. can be tested. These joints will have the check valves (BPV's) on the bottom, which also
tests the BPV's, and must be restrained from being pumped back out of the well as there will
be considerable force generated beneath the closed check valves.
56.10 OPENING THE WELL
Introducing the tool string into the wellhead is one of the most delicate phases of a snubbing
operation. It is at this time that the string is at its lightest and upward forces are trying to
eject or buckle the pipe.
Great care must be taken to ensure that the inverted, or snubbing, slips have taken a proper
"bite" on the pipe, with the use of a clamp or dog collar below the slips is often required.
When introducing the pipe into the well, the stripper rubber is first inserted and secured. The
BHA is then made up onto the first joint and pushed through the rubber. The ram(s) can then
be closed and the well opened up after equalising across the closed tree valves.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
It is normal practise to use one stripping BOP or the annular to centralise the BHA and stop it
hanging up in the stack and tree.
57.0 WSD – RIGGING UP PROCEDURE
Specific Rig-Up Checks WSD01.01 Level of Importance L3.3/L4.5
The first thing you must do before rigging is to verify that the equipment is labelled and that
all certificates are in order. When rigging begins, all protectors are removed, and threads and
sealing surfaces are cleaned and checked. Flanges are inspected and sealing rings are
replaced.
Before the well is opened, perform system function and leak test as described in the
procedures. To save time, the procedures should be designed so that we can test several
parts of the system simultaneously. The procedures for leak testing will vary depending on
where you work.
In an IWCF context, one can say that the whole rig up should be tested at the well’s highest
estimated shut-in pressure
Usually, the tests are performed from as low a point in the rig up as possible. Otherwise, it is
common to install a bottom-hole assembly and at least one pipe, since the check valves are
also tested.
Checklists are to be used to ensure that nothing is forgotten or left out. If any part of the
equipment does not work or there are leaks, this must be repaired before the job can be
started. Testing is carried out after the first joint is hanging in the slips we should test from
the lower most point in the stack and both the stationary and travelling slips must be
engaged
Adapter/Connector & Flange Compatibility WSD01.02 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Before a job is performed, check the type of equipment needed with respect to pressure,
dimensions and well fluids.
This is the information the operator should provide with in connection with the ordering of
the job if the conditions are not known for the service company. The job is then planned with
regard to what is to be done and what surface and downhole equipment shall be used.
Finally, a list of specifications for the necessary equipment can be set up.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
58.0 WSE – TESTING
Testing Requirements WSE01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
All equipment used for operations on wells shall be pressure rated and certified. Pressure
testing and certification takes place at an approved workshop. It is still necessary to test the
device each time it is used. This is then usually considered to be leak testing, even though it is
often called pressure testing. A low-pressure test and a high pressure test are used in
accordance with the API procedures
Correct test Procedures WSE01.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Testing procedures for snubbing operations will vary from place to place and from company
to company. If you work on the Norwegian continental shelf, the NORSOK standard is
followed. Make sure that you have access to the relevant procedures and that you follow
them. Generally speaking, you can say that if a shear/ seal is rigged up it must be tested from
kill wing valve on the Xmas tree or on the lowest possible level in the rig-up. From this point
we can also test the shear/blind. We also test the stripper, stripper ram and the safety BOP,
and take a “body test” on the rig up. The check valves in the bottom-hole assembly are
simultaneously tested. Whatever details are given in the procedure must be adapted to the
equipment that is rigged up.
1. The Xmas tree valves should be tested for operation and leaks before the
operations commence.
2. Pressure test all items possible before rigging up.
3. Install the BHA on pipe into the Xmas tree with the two valves (usually the master
valves) closed.
4. Close the pipe rams in sequence and apply test pressure through the tree wing valve,
or other suitable port, testing the BHA check valves and each ram in turn. Use the
snubbers to hold the pipe in the BOPs.
5. Test annular or stripping BOPs in the same manner.
6. When all pressure testing and function testing has been completed with the
stripper or lower stripper ram closed, equalise the pressure in the BOP stack with the
well pressure below the tree.
7. Slowly open the tree valves and observe for any leaks.
8. Begin snubbing pipe monitoring the strippers
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Pressure Test with In-situ Tubing WSE01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
Testing of the BOP in a pressure control situation is called an inflow test. It will be carried
 Close the BOP.
 Screw pins in / activate hydraulic-mechanical locking for mechanical protection.
 Bleed off pressure above the BOP.
 Inflow test and monitor for pressure build up
 If the pressure does not rise the test is acceptable.
The described closure and testing of the BOP will primarily be used if there is a leak in the
equipment above the BOP and when fishing pipe, coiled tubing or cable.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
59.0 WSF – BARRIER PRINCIPLES
Mechanical Barriers WSF01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
We will now take a closer look at the secondary barriers when running snubbing.
In an IWCF context, it is customary to regard all things that cut as tertiary barriers. This means
that both shear/blind and shear/seal valves come under this category.
In a typical rig up, we usually find a configuration with a shear/blind or a shear and a blind
below the safety BOP. This is the secondary barrier that will cut the pipe and seal the well.
In order to seal around the string, we must have a pipe ram below these. When running pipe
without normal joint upsets we also use a slip ram this way, you can, after cutting, circulate
down the severed string and take the returns under the pipe ram. Here we can see the
similarities with a triple or quad coil BOP. This kind of layout also provides an additional back-
up barrier element. If we do not have a shear/blind ram, but rather use a separate shear and
blind, it is more complex action to activate cutting, as it involves two separate sets of rams to
function, respectively, the cutting then sealing. After cutting the pipe it is pulled up before
closing the blind ram.
Principle of Grouping Barriers WSF01.03 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
If a well is killed with a heavy fluid, it will be a primary barrier if it is being observed. In such a
situation, there will have to be a closeable, mechanical secondary barrier available.
We must also distinguish between barrier elements and barrier envelopes. This means that
many adjoining elements become an envelope.
Internationally (IWCF), it is still customary to divide the barriers into three groups: primary,
secondary and tertiary barriers. On surface equipment for snubbing operations we can say
that the stripper, stripper ram and annular are primary barriers, safety BOP’s are secondary,
and everything that cuts and seals are tertiary.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
60.0 WSG – CONTINGENCY PROCEDURES
Power Unit/Hydraulic Failure WSG01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Conduct maintenance procedures and ensure the engine is fully serviced with oil and fuel.
Immediately set the Heavy slips on the pipe in the hole or the snubbing stationary if in the
pipe light mode then close the safety rams on the tubing.
Hydraulic Failure – Hose Burst WSG01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Conduct proper checks on all hose connections, valves and pumps.
Function test all hydraulic moving parts
Ensure that there is sufficient oil in the reservoir.
Replace hose or fitting, function test continue
Slip Bowl failure WSG01.02 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Ensure when running pipe that the correct pressures are maintained for opening and closing
the slips.
Ensure that slip inserts are free from grease, pipe dope and scale when running or pulling
pipe.
Close the back-up slip, secure with a clamp prior to changing the worn slip insert.
Annular Element failure WSG01.03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
occurrence to have to change it during a job. If an annular rubber had to be changed during a
job, it would be normal practice to come out of the hole, if at all possible, rather than open
the annular with pipe in the hole.
Severe External Leak in the BOP Stack WSG01.04 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Cut the pipe with the safety Head, confirm by closing the swab valve while counting the turns,
close the master valve.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Fluid Egressing from the Work String WSG01.05 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Sometimes you can incur pin hole leaks when running old tubing into a well which can be a
problem. These are generally detected visually when joints are passing thru the stripping
rubber as well as egressing fluids from the pipe. Surface leaks are generally cured by backing
out the offending joint and installing the TIW valve to stop the leak.
If this is not successful:
 Rig up TIW valve and drop plug and seat.
 Confirm tubing leak.
 Slug pipe with heavy fluid pull wet pipe.
If not successful:
 Multi wire line set bridge plugs could be installed above the hole.
 Depending on hole size the well may have to be killed as a last resort
Stripping BOP Failure WSG01.06 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
Ensure that the correct pump pressure is maintained for the rams being used. Ensure the
equalizing and bleed off valves are functioning properly (BOP will not open if there is the
presence of trapped pressure between the rams)
 Close the safety rams on the pipe and manually lock.
 Bleed off pressure
 Open rams and change out worn stripping inserts
 Ensure rams are greased properly with the correct lubricant.
60.1 BPV FAILURE
 Ensure that all valves are maintained.
 Check springs, ball and seat are not worn or corroded.
 Ensure that tool Joints are made up to the correct torque value.
 Pipe dope or scale falling on top of the BPV.
 When fluid is seen coming from the open pipe install the TIW valve and close it.
 Insert pump down plug into the TIW
 Attach circulating head, pen TIW.
 Pump plug into the landing nipple.
 Inflow test
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Pull wet pipe.
61.0 WSH – SHUT IN PROCEDURES
Shut In the Well WSH01.01 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10
In other more general alarm and emergency situations, we will first and foremost give priority
to pulling out of the hole and if necessary preparing for cutting the snubbing string so that the
X-mas tree and subsurface safety valve can be closed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
62.0 WSI – OPERATING PROCEDURES
Calculate Pipe Forces WSI01.01 Level of Importance L3.5/L4.5
To prevent pipe from buckling, snub force calculations should be performed.
Snubbing force is calculated by taking wellbore pressure and applying it against the cross
sectional area of the largest tool or pipe that the. BOP may be closed around. Generally,
most people calculate this snub force using the OD of the pipe
Also, the friction must be added when moving pipe through this BOP.
Estimated Forcelbs =
(Tubing OD2 X *0.7854 X Surface Pressurepsi) + Friction Through BOPlbs
Assume in this snubbing example that there is 8,500 psi of surface pressure and 1,000 psi of
friction necessary to move 2 7/8” pipe through the BOPs.
The formula would be:
Force = (2.875 x 0.7854 x 8,500psi) + 1,000 psi
(8.266 0.7854 x 8,500) + 1,000
55,182.99 + 1,000 = 56,183 lb
Snubbing Unit required = 120 K
Hydraulic Snubbing/Work-Over Units Capabilities

Rotating
Stroke Lifting Snubbing Work
Bore Size Head
Unit Length Capacity Capacity Window
(in) Torque
(ft) (Lbs) (Lbs) (ft)
(ft-Lbs)
10 – 40
120K 4 1/16” Long 120,000 60,000 2,000 6 – 10
Stroke
150K 7 1/16” 10 150,000 75,000 3,500 6 – 10
225K 11” 10 225,000 113,000 4,000 6 – 10
340K Up to 14” 10 340,000 175,000 20,000 6 – 10
460K Up to 14” 10 460,000 230,000 20,000 6 – 10
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
600K Up to 14” 10 600,000 300,000 20,000 6 – 10
Please calculate the estimated snubbing force required on this well.
 Casing 5 ½” OD; 4.995” ID
 Tubing 2 3/8” OD; 4.7 lbs/ft
 Well Pressure 5,000 psi
 BOP Frictional Force = 3,000 lbs
Estimated Force lbs =
(2.375² x 0.7854 x 5,000) + 3,000 lbs
(5.64 x 0.7854 x 5,000) + 3,000
22,148 + 3,000
= 25,148 lbs force
Needs to be overcome in order to move pipe in the well.
62.1 BALANCE POINT
The Balance between Pipe Heavy/Pipe Light has to be calculated so that the changeover
between using Slips and Heavies, and Snubbers can be safely made.
The depth of the Balance Point is effected by:
 Wellhead Pressure
 Fluid Contents of Pipe
 Pipe Weight/foot
The largest Snubbing Force acting on the Pipe String is when the first joint is going in the
Hole.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
62.2 CALCULATION OF THE BALANCE POINT (PIPE DRY)
When the forces acting upwards and the forces acting downwards are equal, the balance
point will have been reached.
The following calculation can be used as an approximation for calculating the depth of the
balance point. It does not consider friction forces etc.
Known data
 Well head pressure 500psi
 Tubing OD 2.375ins
 Tubing Wt 4.7lbs/ft
 Tubing contents 0.375 lbs/ft
 Pipe joint 31feet p = 22 -7
To calculate balance point
Calculate the sum of the forces acting upwards =
Area of the tubing x well head pressure x 500
= 2.375 x 2.375 x .7854 = 4.43 sq ins x 500 = 2215psi snub force
Calculate the sum of the forces acting downward =
weight of pipe + weight of the contents of the pipe =
4.7lbs/ft+ 0.375lbs/ft = 5.075 lbs/ft Length of pipe (ft) to reach balance point = snub force 0 ÷
pipe weight U = 2215 -5.075 = 436 ft
= 436 feet ÷ 31feet (length of joint)
= 14 joints
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
63.0 SNUBBING TERMINOLOGY
 Annular BOP: A Bop with a full opening elastomer element that has the ability to seal on
virtually any shape, as well as seal on itself in and emergency situation.
 Balance Point: This term refers to the condition during a trip in or out of the hole where the
pipe weight and the lift force exerted by the well acting on the cross-sectional area of the
pipe being tripped is at or near equal.
 BHA: Bottom hole assembly. Describes the production or workover tools used for
completion or workover operations. (i.e. packers, bridge plugs, fishing tools, etc.).
 BOP stack: A series of blow out preventers stacked together using an equalizing and bleed
of spool. Stack normally consists of an annular; equalize spool and a set of stripping rams. In
snubbing operations the BOP stack is considered a secondary BOP. When working in
conjunction with a workover, service or drilling rig the rig supplies the primary BOP’s.
 Counter Balance Winches: A winch that can hydraulically counter balance the weight it is
picking up. This give the winch the ability to automatically feed off should the load placed
upon it become greater than the actual weight being held via the hydraulics. Typically the
snubbing unit will have two of these winches.
 Equalize line: High pressure line pipe, chick sans (swivels) and valves for use during a
snubbing operation to equalize or bleed off pressures within different chambers in a
snubbing BOP stack.
 Equalize spool: A ported spool for use in a snubbing operations allowing the operator the
ability to equalize or bleed off certain sections of the BOP stack.
 Gas well snubbing: Workover or completion work on a gas well which is either live or
underbalanced with a rig assist or self-contained snubbing unit. Many gas well formations
are fluid sensitive making a snubbing operation ideal for maximum production of the well.
Eliminates the need for expensive kill fluids.
 Guide Tube: Any arrangement of support system that prevents columnar buckling of the
pipe being snubbed. Typical arrangements can be telescopic or static depending on the
design of the snubbing unit structure.
 Hydraulic Workover Unit: A unit that competes directly with conventional work over rigs.
By utilizing hydraulic cylinders instead of a traditional draw-works arrangement, the unit
maintains a small footprint allowing rig up in tight areas such as on offshore platforms.
 Knockout plug: Same as a TEP
 Live well completions: A well condition where tubulars and tools are pulled or inserted into
a well with the use of a rig assist snubbing unit or self-contained snubbing unit. The well has
surface pressure from the down hole formations. Wells can be either gas or oil.
 Live well workovers: Describes the condition of a gas or oil well is in when tubulars are
snubbed in or out of well. There is pressure at surface in these wells making them ideal
candidates for snubbing operations.
 Lower snubbing basket: The work floor area which allows access to the snubbing crew to
the BOP stack components and stationary snubbing and heavy slips.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Passive Rotary: A turn-table integrally mounted in the snubbing unit traveling plate which
allows the rotation of the string with the slips closed on the pipe in either the snub mode or
pipe heavy mode. This rotary must be driven with an external force be it by hand or with a
power swivel rigged above the unit.
 Pipe Heavy: In regards to snubbing, this is a pipe condition in which the tubing has
sufficient string weight to overcome the forces acting on its cross-sectional area. Once the
weight is sufficient, it overcomes the force applied by the pressure in the well and will fall
under its own weight into the well.
 Pipe Light: In regards to snubbing this is a term which describes the condition when the
well bore forces acting on the cross-sectional area of the pipe being snubbed are greater
than string weight and if tubing was not controlled with a snubbing unit would eject itself
from the well.
 Power-Pack: This is the prime mover that provides the force needed to turn hydraulic
pumps which allow the operation of the snubbing jack and BOP systems. Diesel engines are
the most common form, although electric drives are also utilized in special circumstances.
 Powered Rotary: A turn-table integrally mounted in the snubbing unit traveling plate which
allows the rotation of the string with the slips closed on the pipe in either the snub mode or
pipe heavy mode. This rotary is driven with hydraulic motors allowing the unit to perform
string rotation without external support equipment.
 Power Tongs: Hydraulically actuated equipment used in the snubbing operation to make or
break connections in the tubing string.
 QRC: Cameron stripping BOP. QRC stands for quick ram change
 Rig assist snubbing: A mobile snubbing unit either truck mounted or skid mounted that
works in conjunction with a workover, service or drilling rig for workover or completions
work on a live well or underbalanced well. Unit is capable of running or pulling tubulars and
tools under pressure.
 Scalloped spool: A spacer spool modified for snubbing to allow well bore pressures to
equalize or bleed off around the tubing hanger when landing or pulling the hanger.
 Self contained snubbing: A snubbing unit which stands alone by itself with no need of a
service, workover or drilling rig. A self-contained unit is capable of workover or completion
work on a live well or underbalanced well or in direct.
 Snubbing: A procedure in which tubing is ran or pulled from a well which is in an
underbalanced or live well condition. Snubbing units have specialized pressure control
devices which permit them to deliver drilling, completion and workover services while there
is pressure in the wellbore. Snubbing units eliminate the need to neutralize well pressure
prior to servicing and therefore avoid the formation damage which neutralizing pressure
can have on a well’s ability to produce.
 Snubbing Assistant: This person’s position is primarily focused on taking direction from the
Snubbing operator, and entails routine maintenance, pipe handling and power tong
operation.
 Snubbing jack: The structure of the unit designed to withstand engineered ratings for both
the pipe weight and the force applied by the unit’s hydraulic cylinders. The hydraulically
operated equipment which enables crews to work on underbalanced or live well.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Snubbing Operator: Equivalent to a driller position, the snubbing operator physically

operates the snubbing unit and takes direction from the Snubbing Supervisor. The operator
is responsible for managing the daily activities of the rest of the snubbing crew, and
ensuring that the equipment is functioning as designed.
 Snubbing slips: A set of hydraulically actuated slips which can be run either inverted or
right side up to control the movements of pipe in conjunction with a snubbing jack to insert
or extract tubulars under live well or underbalanced conditions.
 Snubbing Supervisor: Equivalent to a rig manager or tool push, the snubbing supervisor is
responsible for all aspects of the snubbing unit and its operations. He/She is the direct
liaison to the oil company representative he/she is working for. All members of the
snubbing crew are subordinate to the snubbing supervisor. Typically the supervisor will have
in excess of 10 year’s experience in snubbing operations.
 Snubbing unit: A hydraulically actuated unit with slips, BOP stack and hydraulic jack for
inserting or pulling tubing and BHA’s from underbalanced or live well conditions.
 Staging tubing: Is the process of moving tubing into or out of a live or underbalanced well
by using different sections of the BOP stack to insert or extract tubing connections or larger
diameter tool assemblies. I.e. annular and a set of stripping pipe rams or two sets of
stripping rams. The preventers are closed and opened in sequence allowing for tubing
connections or larger diameter tools to be staged in with at least one preventer being
closed to contain well bore pressures.
 Stand alone snubbing (see self-contained unit): Use of a snubbing unit by itself without
the aid of a service, workover or drilling rig. Unit is capable of workover or completion work
on a live well or underbalanced well.
 Stationary heavy slips: Typically a set of slips which are mounted on a BOP stack which will
control the movement of heavy pipe.
 Stationary snubbing slips: A set of snubbing slips that are typically mounted on top of a
BOP stack which will hold pipe that is in a pipe light or neutral state.
 Stripping: During snubbing operations this is the procedure where you move pipe thru a
closed preventer (pipe rams or annular) on a live or underbalanced well containing pressure
from the well bore with a closed preventer.
 Stripping on: The procedure in which a snubbing unit is rigged onto a service, workover or
drilling rig which is holding the pipe heavy tubing string with their tubing slips and not with
a tubing hanger landed.
 Stripping Ram: A hydraulically operated Ram style BOP used during snubbing and
stripping operations. Typically the ram front insert is a sacrificial material that is easily
replaced for extended stripping. Materials for the inserts can be custom ordered for the
application at hand.
 TEP: A type of tubing plug developed for snubbing to control well bore pressures inside the
tubing. Only viable for snubbing in operations. The plug is a machined collar with a
removable disc and o ring. Once the tubing string has been snubbed in the disc can be
knocked out by equalizing the tubing string and flowing the casing. Once an overbalanced
condition has been achieved inside the tubing string the disc will fall out. Disc may also be
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
removed by sand line or wire line tapping down on the disc once tubing string has been
equalized with casing pressures.
 Traveling heavy slips: Slips which are attached to the top of a snubbing units jack plate and
control the movement of heavy pipe.
 Traveling plate: The plate which connects the rods from the hydraulic cylinders together on
a snubbing unit where the traveling and heavy slips are attached. There are many cylinder
configurations and stroke lengths possible depending on job requirements.
 Traveling snubbing slips: A set of slips mounted upside down on a snubbing jacks traveling
plate which controls the movement of tubing in or out of a well. Slips will hold tubing only
when tubing is in the pipe light state.
 Underbalanced: A term to describe the pressure conditions in a well. Formation pressure is
greater than the hydrostatic pressure of fluid, mud etc… exerted on the formation causing
pressure to migrate to surface in a well. A well in an underbalanced state is a prime
candidate for snubbing.
 Underbalanced completions: The condition of a well when completion services such as
snubbing are performed. Formation pressure is greater than the hydrostatic pressure inside
the well bore causing pressure to be at surface in the well. Under balanced completions are
prime candidates for snubbing. Typically wells have been perforated before snubbing unit
arrives and the unit snubs in a production string to allow the well to be produced.
 Underbalanced drilling: This term describes the condition of the well when drilling
operations are ongoing. Snubbing units are used to snub out drill strings, i.e. bit changes
and then snub in the drill string again or run productions strings.
 Underbalanced workovers: The well is live with pressure to surface when workover
operations are performed. Rig assist snubbing or self-contained snubbing units are used for
the running or pulling of tubulars and BHA’s. Typically the snubbing unit pulls pipe from the
well, the original zone is worked over, abandoned, or a new zone perforated and the
snubbing unit snubs the production string back into the well.
 Upper snubbing basket: The work floor area on a snubbing unit which the snubbing crew
stands and operates the snubbing jack.
 Well control: In regards to snubbing, well control is the operation of containing well bore
pressure with the use of a blowout preventer stack and tubing pressure by the use of a
plugging system
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
64.0 SNUBBING RULES OF THUMB
Force = Pressure X Area
Area = .7854 X Diameter X Diameter
1. It takes one foot of tubing (nominal tubing sizes) to overcome each psi of wellbore
pressure.
e.g. If well has 500 psi (3447 kpa) of surface pressure it will take 500 feet (152 m) of
nominal size tubing to be inserted for the lift on the tubing to be overcome and the
pipe to achieve a pipe neutral state.
(These calculations do not take into account buoyancy or friction forces working
against tubing string. Also this rule thumb works for nominal weight tubing, not
heavyweight tubing or drillpipe.)
2. To calculate snub force: Snub force = Diameter X Diameter X Pressure X .7854
e.g. Wellbore pressure: 1000 psi (6894 kpa)
Tubing size: 2 3/8 J55 EUE (60.3mm)
Lift force = 2.375 X 2.375 X 1000 X .7854
Lift force = 4430 psi (30,544 kpa)
3. To calculate amount of pipe to snub: Lift force ÷ Pipe Mass
Wellbore pressure: 1000 psi (6894 kpa)
Tubing size: 2 3/8 – 4.6 lbs/ft (60.3mm – 6.99 kg/m)
Lift force = 2.375 X 2.375 X 1000 X .7854
Lift force = 4430 psi (30,544 kpa)
Pipe to snub = Lift force ÷ Pipe mass
= 4430 ÷ 4.6 lbs / foot
= 963 feet (294m)
Thus 963 feet (294m) of tubing needs to be snubbed into the well to become pipe
neutral.
An average joint is approximately 31 feet (9.56m) long so you would need 31 joints to
become pipe neutral.
(These calculations do not take into account buoyancy or friction forces working
against tubing string)
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
4. Lift force on a standard tubing hanger:
A tubing hanger has a diameter of 6.8125 (173.03 mm)
Tubing hanger area = .7854 X 6.8125 X 6.8125 (.7854 X 173.03 X 173.03)
= 36.54 square inches (23,514 mm squared)
If the wellbore pressure is 1000 psi (6894kpa) under the tubing hanger there will be a
lift force of 36450 lbs (16212 dAn) against the tubing hanger.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
65.0 FORMULAE
Pressure Gradient psi/ft Mud/Brine Weight ppg x 0.052
Mud/Brine Weight ppg Pressure Gradient psi/ft ÷ 0.052
Mud/Brine Weight ppg x 0.052 x True Vertical

Hydrostatic Pressure psi
Depth ft
Hydrostatic Pressure (in string & sump) psi +

Formation Pressure psi
Shut In Tubing Head Pressure psi
Equivalent Mud Weight ppg Pressure psi ÷ True vertical Depth ft ÷ 0.052
Pump Output bbls/min Pump Output bbls/stk x Pump Speed spm
Pump Output bbls/min ÷ Annulus Volume

Annulus Velocity ft/min
bbls/ft
P1 V1  P2 V2
P1 V1
P2 
Boyle’s Law V2
V1 P1
V2 
P2
D2
Conversion of pipe diameter to bbls/ft  bbls / ft
1,029.42
D2  d 2
Conversion of annular area to bbls/ft bbls / ft
1.029.42
Constant 0.052
Gradient of the Well Psi per foot (BHP ÷ TVD)
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
66.0 SOME USEFUL CALCULATIONS & FORMULAS
66.1 METRIC-NEW TYPE IMPERIAL-OLD TYPE
Hydrostatic-applied & total, Area/volume capacity & displacement, Pipe stretch & slack-off,
Convert pressure to force/temp change to length/force, calculate buoyancy effects.
To work out tensile strength-min breaking strain / area of wire. EG. 150lbs / (D2 x 0.7854”).
To find tensile strength multiply by 80,000. (Or look up strengths & dimensions in cementing
book). Yield strength of tubing = OD2 – ID2 x 0.7854 x grade of steel.
Density of steel = 65.42lbs/gallon Volume = x-sectional area x length.
2.67 is the constant.
eg. For hollow bar (tubing) (OD2 – ID2) x 2.67 = lbs/ft.
For solid bar D2 x 2.67 = weight in lbs/ft.
To convert lbs/gal into inches; multiply by 12 = lbs/ft.
Area of circle=0.7854xD2.
Vol of cylinder=0.7854xD2xH.
Casing capacity-BBL per linear ft x length of casing (0.009714”xD2xlength).
Gradient of water=0.433.
Tubing capacity-ID of pipe changes due to weight of tubing NOT OD of pipe.
144 square inches in square foot.
Gradient=wt/gallon x constant.
Force=mass x area. (F = M x A).
66.2 TO FIND THE SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF FLUIDS
Find the sg of 9.6lbs/gal mud = divide lbs/gal of water into lbs/gal mud = 9.6 into
8.33 =1.152sg.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
66.3 TO FIND GRADIENT OF FLUIDS
eg 73lbs cubic ft method 1 = 73 divided by cubic feet of water = 76 divided by 62.4 =1.1698sg.
1.1698xsg of water =1.1698 x 0.433=0.506 gradient.
Method 2 = 73 divided by 144. (144 is square of cubic inches (12”x 12”).
 To find gradient if in lbs/ft divided by 144.
 To find SG divide by 62.4.
 To convert API to SG= 141.5 divided (131.5=36)=141.5divided167.5=0.85SG.
 To convert SG to Gradient=0.85x0.433=0.366gradient.
 To find hydrostatic head in lbs/gal: 0.052 (0.433/8.33)
 To find hydrostatic head in lbs/ft3: 0.007 (0.433/62.4)
 To find hydrostatic head in API: [141.5/131.5+API] x 0.433
 To find hydrostatic head=gradient x depth, 0.052 x ft. Gradient divided by depth gives
the constant 0.052.
 TVD x (0.052) x lbs/gal= hydrostatic head.
 If constant is in lbs/cubic foot, eg. 79lbs/cubic foot divided by 62.4=sg x

gradient=gradient x TVD = psi. (If in lbs/cubic ft use 0.007-this is the constant.)
66.4 GAS CALCULATIONS
Cubic foot of air is 14.7psi.
To find hydrostatic of gas use correction factor-
Find depth (9000’) & gravity (0.70) of gas. Trace 0.70 on Halliburton card, x by 9000’=
hydrostatic pressure.
Hydrostatic head= correction factor x surface pressure (total hydrostatic pressure).
*If you bleed off the surface pressure you get the hydrostatic head*
To find the cross-sectional area= (OD2 - ID2) x 0.7854 = inches squared, in2.
To find wt\lbs per ft of stem = D2x8 divided by 3.
To find force acting upon/pushing out wire @ st/box = area of wire x pressure.
eg. Area of .108 wire = 0.0090 x (pressure).
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
66.5 VOLUME /CAPACITY OF CYLINDER
A x H = V (Area x Height = Volume).
eg. Vol of 7” casing 12000’ long.
Area of 7” casing x 12000’ height.
D2= 7x7= 49 x BBL per 1000’.
49 x 12. = 588BBL in 12000’ of 7” casing.
66.6 VOLUME OF CUBE/TANK
Height x Length x Depth = ft3. Volume in bbl = f3 / 5.6146.
66.7 TO FIND VOLUME IN BARRELS
OD2 x 0.7854 = in2. in2 x 12 = in3. in3 / 9702 = bbl.
9702 is the constant used to convert inches cubed to barrels.
66.8 TO FIND CAPACITY OF WELLBORE
Use 0.0009714 Is reached by:-
(1bbl / 5.6146 cubic feet) = (0.1781)
(0.1781bbls in a cubic feet ÷144 square inches) = (0.0012368)
(0.0012368x0.7854) = (0.0009714)
66.9 TO CONVERT CUBIC CAPACITY TO CUBIC INCHES
7x7(Vol of casing) x0.7854 (to convert to cubic inches)
(38.48) X (144,000) (12,000((height)) x12 to convert to cubic inches)
=5441120.400 cubic inches.
To convert to gallons:-5441120.400 / 231(231 inches per gallon) = 23987.5342 gallons.
To convert to barrels:-23987.5342 / 42 = 571.13 barrels.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
66.10 TO FIND VOLUME OF ANNULUS

(ID2-OD2) x 0.7854 x height/length.
To give answer in barres = (ID2 – OD2) x 0.0009714 x length/height.
(7” 23lbs/ft casing OD) – 5 ½” ID tubing x 10,000’ Height
(6.366 x 6.366 x 0.7854) – (5.5 x 5.5 x 0.7854) x 10,000= 80700 x 12(12 to convert to cubic)
31.83-23.76x10, 000x12
8.07x120, 000
=968400 cubic inches.
To convert to gallons: / by 231.
To convert to barrels: / by answer in gallons by 42.
To convert an answer from feet to inches divide by 12, for the opposite multiply by 12.
66.11 BUOYANCY FACTOR
65.4-lbs/gallons divided by 65.4
Hydrostatic = PPG x 0.052 x TVD
Bbls required to pressure up = Applied pressure x volumes in barrels x 0.000003
ID2 divided by 1029.4 = lbs/ft x depth = capacity
ID2 x 0.0009714 x depth = volume in barrels
66.12 CALCULATIONS
Co-efficient of thermal expansion for steel per unit length per degrees Farenheight =
0.0000069.
Calculate the thermal expansion of 18500ft of tubing:-
Ambient temp – 80 deg f
W/head temp – 65 deg f
B/hole temp – 235 deg f
= w/head + b/hole / 2 to find average = 65 + 235/2 = 300/2 =150deg f
= 300deg f – ambient = 150 – 80 = 70 deg f
= temp – efficient x length
= 70 x 0.0000069 x 18500 = 8.94ft of thermal expansion
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Force = Area x Pressure. F = A x P (force is always pounds).
 Pressure = Force Area. P=F/A
 Area = Force/Pressure. A=F/P
 Force = Mass x Area.
66.13 CONVERSION FACTORS
= 33.94 feet of water

= 29.92 inches of mercury
Atmosphere
= 760 millimetres of mercury
= 14.70 pounds per square inch
Bar
= 100 Kilo Pascal’s
= 5.6146 cubic feet
Barrel = 42 gallons (US)
= 35 gallons (Imperial)
Barrel of water @ 60oF = 0.1588 metric ton
Barrel (36° API) = 0.1342 metric ton
= 0.0936 cubic feet per minute
Barrel per hour = 0.700 gallon per minute
= 2.695 cubic inches per second
Barrel per day (bpd) = 0.2917 gallon per minute
= 0.2520 kilogram calorie
British Thermal Unit
= 0.2928 watt hour
BTU per minute = 0.02356 horse power
Centimetre = 0.3937 inch
Centimetre of mercury = 0.1934 pound per square inch
Cubic centimetre = 0.06102 cubic inch
= 0.1781 barrel
= 7.4805 gallons (US)
Cubic foot
= 0.02832 cubic metre
= 0.9091 sacks cement (set)
= 10.686 barrels per hour
Cubic foot per minute = 28.800 cubic inches per second
= 7.481 gallons per minute
Cubic inch = 16.387 cubic centimetres
= 6.2897 barrels (US)
Cubic metre = 35.314 cubic feet
= 264.20 gallon (US)
= 4.8089 barrels
Cubic yard = 46,656 cubic inches
= 0.7646 cubic metre
= 30.48 centimetres
Feet
= 0.3048 meters
Feet of water @ 60oF = 0.4331 pound per square inch
Feet per second = 0.68182 mile per hour
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Foot pound = 0.001286 British Thermal Unit

Foot pound per second = 0.001818 horse power
= 0.2318 barrel
= 0.1337 cubic feet
Gallon (US) = 231.00 cubic inches
= 3.785 litres
= 0.003785 cubic metres
= 1.2009 gallons (US)
Gallon (Imperial)
= 277.274 cubic inches
= 1.429 barrels per hour
Gallon per minute
= 34.286 barrels per day
Gram = 0.03527 ounce
= 42.44 BTUs per minute
= 33,000 feet/pounds per minute
Horsepower = 550 feet/pounds per second
= 1.014 horsepower (metric)
= 0.7457 kilowatt
Horsepower hour = 2,547 British Thermal Units
Inch = 2.540 centimetres
= 1.134 feet of water
Inch of mercury
= 0.4912 pound per square inch
Inch of water @ 60°F = 0.0361 pound per square inch
Kilogram = 2.2046 pounds
Kilogram calorie = 3.968 British Thermal Units
Kilogram per square centimetre
= Kg/cm2 x 98.1 gives Pascals (KPa)
= 3,281 feet
Kilometre
= 0.6214 mile
Kilo Pascal = 0.145 pounds per square inch
Kilowatt = 1.341 horse power
= 0.2462 gallon
Litre
= 1.0567 quarts
Mega Pascal = 145.03 pound per square inch
= 3.281 feet
Metre
= 39.37 inches
= 0.05835 grain per gallon
Part per million
= 8.345 pounds per million gallons
Pascal = 0.000145 pound per square inch
= 7,000 grains
Pound
= 0.4536 kilogram
= 2.309 feet of water @ 60°F
= 2.0353 inches of mercury
= 51.697 millimetres of mercury
= 0.703 kilograms per square centimetre
Pound per square inch
= 0.0689 bar
= 0.006895 mega Pascal (MPa)
= 6.895 kilo Pascal (KPa)
= 6895 Pascal (Pa)
Pressure =psi x 6.895 gives Kilo Pascals (KPa)
Sack cement (Set) = 1.1 cubic feet
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
Square centimetre = 0.1550 square inch

Square foot = 0.929 square metre
Square inch = 6.452 square centimetres
Square kilometre = 0.3861 square mile
Square metre = 10.76 square feet
Square mile = 2.590 square kilometres
Temp Centigrade = 5/9 (Temp °F 32)
Temp Fahrenheit = 9/5 (Temp °C) + 32
Temp Absolute (Kelvin) = Temp °C + 273
Temp Absolute (Rankine) = Temp °F + 460
Ton (long) = 2,240 pounds
Ton (metric) = 2,205 pounds
Ton (short or net) = 2,000 pounds
Ton (metric) = 1.102 tons (short or net)
= 1,000 kilograms
Ton (metric) = 6.297 barrels of water @ 60°F
= 7.454 barrels (36° API)
Ton (short or net) = 0.907 ton (metric)
Watt per hour = 3.415 BTUs
Yard = 0.9144 metre
66.14 COMMONLY USED WELL CONTROL TERMS
 Abnormal Pressure: Pore pressure in excess of that pressure resulting from the hydrostatic
pressure exerted by a vertical column of water salinity normal for the geographic area.
 Accumulator: A vessel containing both hydraulic fluid and gas stored under pressure as a
source of fluid power to operate opening and closing of blowout preventer rams and
annular preventer elements. Accumulators supply energy for connectors and valves
remotely controlled.
 Accumulator Bank Isolator Valve: The opening and closing device located upstream of the
accumulators in the accumulator piping which stops flow of fluids and pressure in the
piping.
 Accumulator Relief Valve: The automatic device located in the accumulator piping that
opens when the pre-set pressure limit has been reached so as to release the excess pressure
and protect the accumulators.
 Air Regulator: The adjusting devices to vary the amount of air pressure entering as to the
amount to be discharged down the piping lines.
 Ambient Temperature: The temperature of the entire encompassing atmosphere within a

given area.
 Ampere: The unit used for measuring the quantity of an electric current flow. One ampere
represents a flow of one coulomb per second.
 Annular Preventer: A device which can seal around any object in the wellbore or upon
itself. Compression of a reinforced elastomer packing element by hydraulic pressure effects
the seal.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Annular Regulator: The device located in the annular manifold header to enable
adjustment of pressure levels, which will flow past to control the amount of closure of the
annular preventer.
 Annulus: The annular space between two tubulars (i.e. tubing or drill string and the
production casing).
 Annulus Friction Pressure: Circulating pressure loss inherent in annulus between the drill
string and casing or open hole.
 Back Pressure (Casing, Choke Pressure): Pressure existing at the surface on the casing side
of the drill pipe/annulus flow system.
 Bleeding: Controlled release of fluids from a closed and pressurised system in order to
reduce the pressure.
 Blind Rams (Blank, Master): Rams whose ends are not intended to seal against any drill
pipe, tubing or casing. They seal against each other to effectively close the hole.
 Blind/Shear Rams: Blind rams with a built-in cutting edge that will shear tubulars that may
be in the hole, thus allowing the blind rams to seal the hole. Used primarily in subsea
systems.
 Blow-out: An uncontrolled flow of gas, oil, or other well fluids into the atmosphere.
 Blow-out Preventer: Equipment installed at the wellhead to prevent damage at the surface
while restoring primary well control. The BOP allows the well to be sealed to confine the
well fluids and prevent the escape of pressure.
 Blowout Preventer Drill: A training procedure to determine that rig crews are completely
familiar with correct operating practices to be followed in the use of blowout prevention
equipment. A dry run of blowout preventive action.
 Blowout Preventer Operating Control System: The assembly of pumps, valves, lines,
accumulators and other items necessary to open and close the blowout preventer
equipment.
 Blowout Preventer Stack: The assembly of well control equipment including preventers,
spools, valves and nipples connected to the top of the wellhead or Xmas tree.
 Blowout Preventer Test Tool: A tool to allow pressure testing of drilling or workover
blowout preventer stacks and accessory equipment by sealing the wellbore immediately
below the stack.
 Bleed Off Valve: An opening and closing device for removal of pressurised fluid.
 Bottom-hole Pressure: Depending on the context, either a pressure exerted by a column of

fluid contained in the wellbore or the formation pressure at the depth of interest.
 Bottoms-up: Is the term describing the time at which fluid that was at the bottom of the
well now reaches the surface.
 Bull-heading: A term to denote pumping well fluids back into a formation in a well kill
operation.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Casing Head/Spool: The part of the wellhead to which drilling or workover blowout
preventer stack is connected.
 Casing Pressure: See Back-Pressure.
 Casing Seat Test: A procedure whereby the formation immediately below the casing shoe
is subjected to a pressure equal to the pressure expected to be exerted later by a higher
drilling fluid density or by the sum of a higher drilling fluid density and back pressure
created by a kick.
 Check Valve: A valve that permits flow in only one direction.
 Choke: A diameter orifice (fixed or variable) installed in a line through which high pressure
well fluids can be restricted or released at a controlled rate.
 Circuit Breaker: An electrical switching device able to carry an electrical current and
automatically break the current to interrupt the electrical circuit if adverse conditions such
as shorts or overloads occur.
 Circulating Head: A device attached to the top of drill pipe or tubing to allow pumping into
the well without use of the Kelly.
 Clamp Connection: A pressure sealing device used to join two items without using
conventional bolted flange joints. The two items to be sealed are prepared with clamp hubs.
A clamp containing two to four bolts holds these hubs together.
 Closing Unit: The assembly of pumps, valves, lines, accumulators and other items
necessary to open and close the blowout preventer equipment.
 Closing Ratio: The ratio of the wellhead pressure to the pressure required to close the
blowout preventer.
 Control Panel Remote: A panel containing a series of controls that will operate the valves
on the control manifold from a remote point.
 Corrosion Inhibitor: Any substance which slows or prevents the chemical reactions of
corrosion.
 Cut Fluid: Well control fluid, which has been reduced in density or unit weight as a result of
entrainment of less dense formation fluids or air.
 Displacement: The volume of steel in the tubulars and devices inserted and/or withdrawn
from the wellbore.
 Fluid Weight Recorder: An instrument in the fluid system that continuously measures fluid
density.
 Tubing Safety Valve: An essentially full-opening valve located on the rig floor with threads
to match the tubing in use. This valve is used to close off the tubing to prevent flow.
 Drill Stem Test (DST): A test conducted to determine production flow rate and/or
formation pressure prior to completing the well.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD): Sum of pressure exerted by hydrostatic head of

fluid, drilled solids, and friction pressure losses in the annulus divided by depth of interest
and by 0.052, if ECD is to be expressed in pounds per gallon (lbs/gal).
 Feed-in (Influx, Inflow): Flow of fluids from the formation into the wellbore.
 Filter: A device whose function is the retention of insoluble contaminants from a fluid.
 Flow Meter: A device that indicates either flow rate, total flow, or a combination of both,
that travels through a conductor such as pipe or tubing.
 Flow Rate: The volume, mass, or weight of a fluid passing through any conductor, such as
pipe or tubing, per unit of time.
 Flow Target: A bull plug or blind flange at the end of a T to prevent erosion at a point where
change in flow direction occurs.
 Fluid: A substance that flows and yields to any force tending to change its shape. Liquids
and gases are fluids.
 Fluid Density: The unit weight of fluid; e.g., pounds per gallon (lbs/gal).
 Formation Breakdown: An event occurring when bottom-hole pressure is of sufficient

magnitude that the formation accepts fluid from the hole.
 Formation Integrity: The ability of the formation to withstand applied pressure.
 Formation Integrity Test: Application of pressure by superimposing a surface pressure on a

fluid column in order to determine ability of a subsurface zone to withstand a certain
hydrostatic pressure.
 Formation Pressure (Pore Pressure): Pressure exerted by fluids within the pores of the
formation (See Pore Pressure).
 Flow-line Sensor: A device to monitor rate of fluid flow from the annulus.
 Fracture Gradient: The pressure gradient (psi/ft) at which the formation accepts whole fluid
from the wellbore.
 Function: The term given to the duty of operating a control device.
 Gate Valve: A valve that employs a sliding gate to open or close the flow passage. The valve
may or may not be full-opening.
 Gauge: An instrument for measuring fluid pressure that usually registers the difference
between atmospheric pressure and the pressure of the fluid by indicating the effect of such
pressure on a measuring element (as a column of liquid, a bourdon tube, a weighted piston,
a diaphragm, or other pressure-sensitive devices).
 Gland: The metal item that energises stuffing box packing from force applied manually or
hydraulically.
 H2S: Periodic abbreviation for hydrogen sulphide gas.
 Hard Close In: To close in a well by closing a blowout preventer with the choke and/or
choke line valve closed.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Heavies: A title used in snubbing operations to describe slips.
 Hydrostatic: Relating to the pressure that fluids exert due to their weight.
 Hydrostatic Head: The true vertical length of fluid column, normally in feet.
 Hydrostatic Pressure: The pressure that exists at any point in the wellbore due to the
weight of the vertical column of fluid above.
 Inflow: See Feed-in.
 Influx: See Feed-in.
 Initial Circulating Pressure: Pressure required to circulate initially at the selected kill rate
while holding back pressure at the closed-in value; numerically equal to kill rate circulating
pressure plus closed-in pressure.
 Inside Blowout Preventer: A device that can be installed in the drill string that acts as a
check valve allowing drilling fluid to be circulated down the string but prevents back flow.
 Inspection Port: The plugged openings on the sides of the fluid reservoir of a device which
can be opened to view the interior fluid level and return lines from the relief, bleeder,
control valves, and regulators.
 Kick: Intrusion of formation fluids into a wellbore containing kill or drilling fluid.
 Kill Fluid Density: The unit weight e.g. pounds per gallon (lbs/gal), selected for the fluid to
be used to contain formation pressure.
 Kill Line: A high-pressure fluid line connecting the mud pump and the wellhead. This line
allows fluids to be pumped into the well or annulus with the blowout preventer closed to
control a threatened blowout.
 Kill Rate: A predetermined fluid circulating rate, expressed in fluid volume per unit time,
which is to be used to kill the well.
 Kill Rate Circulating Pressure: Pump pressure required to circulate kill rate volume.
 Leak-off Test: Application of pressure by superimposing a surface pressure on a fluid

column in order to determine the pressure at which the exposed formation accepts whole
fluid.
 Lights: A name used in snubbing operations to describe snubbers or inverted slips.
 Lost Circulation (Lost Returns): The loss of whole well control fluid to the wellbore.
 Lost Returns: See Lost Circulation.
 Lubrication: Alternately pumping a relatively small volume of fluid into a closed wellbore
system and waiting for the fluid to fall toward the bottom of the well.
 Lubricator: The pressure containing tubulars mounted above the Xmas tree for installing
wireline or coiled tubing tool-strings in live wellbores.
 Manifold Header: The piping system that serves to divide a flow through several possible
outlets.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Meter: An instrument, operated by an electrical signal that indicates a measurement of

pressure.
 Micron: A millionth of a metre or about 0.0004”. The measuring unit of the porosity of filter
elements.
 Minimum Internal Yield Pressure: The lowest pressure at which permanent deformation
will occur in metals.
 Needle Valve: A shut-off two-way valve that incorporates a needle point to allow fine
adjustments in flow.
 Normal Pressure: Formation pressure equal to the pressure exerted by a vertical column of
water with salinity normal for the geographic area.
 Opening Ratio: The ration of the well pressure to the pressure required to open the
blowout preventer.
 Overbalance: The amount by which pressure exerted by the hydrostatic head of fluid in the
wellbore exceeds formation pressure.
 Overburden: The pressure on a formation due to the weight of the earth material above
that formation. For practical purposes this pressure can be estimated at 1psi/ft of depth.
 Packing: Rubber elements used in wireline stuffing boxes to seal around slick wirelines.
 Pack-off or Stripper Rubber: A device with an elastomer packing element that depends on
pressure below the packing to effect a seal in the annulus. Used primarily to run or pull pipe
under low or moderate pressures.
 Pipe Rams: Rams whose ends are contoured to seal around pipe to close the annular space.
Separate rams are necessary for each size (outside diameter) pipe in use.
 Plug Valve: A valve whose mechanism consists of a plug with a hole through it on the same
axis as the direction of fluid flow. Turning the plug 180° opens or closes the valve. The valve
may or may not be full-opening.
 Pore Pressure: Pressure exerted by the fluids within the pore space of a formation.
 Potable: A liquid that is suitable for drinking.
 Pressure Gradient, Normal: The normal pressure divided by true vertical depth.
 Pressure Integrity Test (PIT): Application of pressure by superimposing a surface pressure

on a fluid column in order to determine the pressure at which the well can withstand before
a well intervention. This test is less than formation fracture pressure to prevent formation
damage.
 Pressure Transmitter: Device that sends a pressure signal to be converted and calibrated to
register the equal pressure reading on a gauge. The air output pressure in proportion to the
hydraulic input pressure.
 Primary Pressure Control: The primary well control system or device on the wellhead.
 Pump: A device that increases the pressure of a fluid and moves it to a higher level using
compression force from a chamber and piston that is driven by a power source.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Ram: The closing and sealing component on a blowout preventer. One of three types -
blind, pipe, or shear - may be installed in several preventers, mounted in a stack on top of
the wellbore. Blind rams, when closed, form a seal on a hole that has no drill pipe in it; pipe
rams, when closed, seal around the pipe; shear rams cut through drill pipe and then form a
seal.
 Recorder: A device that records outputs of pressure, temperature continually on a chart to

provide continuous reading.
 Regulator: A device that varies and controls the pressure of a liquid or gas that passes
through its chamber.
 Replacement: The process whereby a volume of fluid equal to the volume of steel in
tubulars and tools withdrawn from the wellbore is returned to the wellbore.
 Reservoir: The container for storage of a liquid. The reservoir houses hydraulic fluid at
atmospheric pressure as the supply for fluid power.
 Rupture Disc: A device whose breaking strength (the point at which it physically bursts)
works to relieve pressure in a system.
 Safety Factor: A margin added to a figure or value purely for safety.
 Secondary Barrier: Is the second line of defence from an uncontrolled well flow. It is usually
brought into use when the primary barrier has failed or requires repair.
 Shear Rams: Blowout preventer rams with a built in cutting edge that will shear tubulars
that may be in the hole.
 Shear/Seal BOP: The name used for a device used as a tertiary barrier on well
interventions, which has the ability to cut wire or pipe and seal.
 Snubbing: The process of installing pipe into a well where the well pressure is greater than
that of the weight of pipe in the hole. It has also come to mean any of the live well
interventions carried out by a hydraulic workover unit.
 Snubbers: Term used to describe inverted slips used when the snubbing unit is in pipe light
mode.
 Soft Close In: To close in a well by closing a blowout preventer with the choke and choke
line valve open, then closing the choke while monitoring the casing pressure gauge for
maximum allowable casing pressure.
 Sour Gas: Natural gas containing hydrogen sulphide.
 Space Out: Procedure conducted to position a predetermined length of tubing/drill pipe so

that no connection or tool joint is opposite a set of preventer rams.
 Space-Out Joint: The joint of tubing/drill pipe which is used to hang off operations so that
no tool joint is opposite a set of preventer rams.
 Squeezing: Pumping fluid into a formation.
 Stack: The assembly of well control equipment including preventers, spools, valves, and
nipples connected to the top of the casing head.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Page
 Stripper: A device which packs-off around wire or pipe run into the well and seals. They
may be self-energised or hydraulically activated.
 Stripping: The process of running pipe through a stripper with or without pressure in the
well.
 Swabbing: The lowering of the hydrostatic pressure in the wellbore due to upward
movement of tubulars and/or tools.
 Tertiary Barrier: Is a third line of defence against an uncontrolled well flow and in well
interventions is usually a device but may also be an overbalanced fluid. Is only used when
the primary and secondary barriers have failed or been compromised.
 Transducer: The device located in the solenoid valve box that is actuated by hydraulic
pressure and converts the force to an electrical signal for indication on a meter. The
electrical output signal is in proportion to the hydraulic input pressure.
 Tubulars: Drill pipe, drill collars, tubing, and casing.
 Underground Blowout: An uncontrolled flow of formation fluids from a sub-surface

zone into a second subsurface zone.
 Underbalance: The amount by which formation pressure exceeds pressure exerted by the
hydrostatic head of fluid in the wellbore.
 Valve, Float: A device that is positioned as either open or closed, depending on the position
of a lever connected to a buoyant material sitting in the fluid to be monitored.
 Valve, Poppet: The opening and closing device in a line of flow that restricts flow by
lowering a piston type plunger into the valve passageway.
 Valve, Relief: A valve that opens at a present pressure to relieve excessive pressures within
a vessel or line whose primary function is to limit system pressure.
 Valve, Shut-off: A valve which operates fully open or fully closed to control the flow
through a conduit.
 Valve, Sub Surface Safety: A completion safety valve installed at a depth below the
surface according to various criteria.
 Viscosity: A measure of the internal friction or the resistance of a fluid to flow.
 Watt: A unit of electromotive force.
 Wireline BOP (valve): Preventers installed on top of the well or drill string as a
precautionary measure while running wirelines. The preventer packing will close around the
wireline.
 Xmas Tree: The head terminating a completion with a set of valves to control well flow and
well servicing activities.
Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

IWCF Well Intervention Classroom Manual - Latest6th June

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IWCF Well Intervention Classroom Manual - Latest6th June

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IWCF Well Intervention Pressure Control Manual 1 of 288| P a g e

IWCF Well Intervention

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

Owner Maersk Training

Phone: +44 (0)1224 608 266

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

1.0 Foreword ......................................................................................................................... 6

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

32.0 WEQG– Completion Equipment ................................................................................. 138

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

65.0 Formulae ..................................................................................................................... 299

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

This course is designed to provide essential knowledge to delegates participating in Well

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

2.0 CANDIDATES GUIDANCE NOTES

Well Intervention Pressure Control Syllabus - Level 3 and 4

Who takes the Well Intervention Pressure Control course?

How long is the course?

 The Level 2 training course must be a minimum of 20 hours.

How many candidates can a Centre have on a course?

 Well Intervention Pressure Control Syllabus - Level 3 and 4

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

3.0 LEARNING OUTCOME – SYLLABUS IMPORTANCE LEVELS

Importance Level of Risk Explanation

5 Major Major risk factor

Key knowledge – could lead to risk to life, limb, and

3 Moderate Necessary knowledge

2 Minor Underpinning knowledge

1 Foundation Foundation knowledge

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

4.0 TEST INFORMATION

The written test syllabus is divided into two sections:

Level 2, 3 & 4 Compulsory Modules

 Completion Operations Level 2 & 3 - Test duration 60 minutes (45 questions)

Level 2, 3 & 4 Optional Modules

 Coiled Tubing Operations – Test duration 30 minutes (25 questions)

Please note: at least one optional module must be taken.

4.1 ASSESSMENT METHOD

The Level 3 and 4 course is based on written assessment.

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

The individual aims are to:

 Improve the delegate's competence in well intervention pressure control.

The individual objectives are to assist the delegate to:

 Identify various types of completions and their impact on well interventions.

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

7.0 HYDROSTATIC CALCULATIONS

7.1 WB - INTRODUCTION TO WELL CONTROL

Hydrostatic Pressure WB01.01/02/03 Level of Importance L3.10/L4.10

 Fresh water has a density of 8.33 ppg

 The gradient of fresh water is 0.433 psi/ft.

 The Specific Gravity is 1

 The constant is .052 ( PPG to PSI )

API = 141.5 ÷ 131.5 + API Density of the liquid ÷ Cubic foot

Density of Fresh Water ÷ Density of given example

X 8.33 ppg X .433 Psi/ft

Specific Gravity = 1 Specific Gravity = 1

Universal Hydrostatic Calculator

Doc Number 08.15.01.01 08/2015

7.2 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDS AND PRESSURE

Understanding pressures and pressure relationships is important in understanding well

Pressure = Force ÷ Area

Force = Pressure x Area

Pressure can be expressed as absolute or as gauge pressure. Absolute pressure includes